o^-.f /^^, 


PRESENTED  TO  THE  LIBRARY 


OF 


PRINCETON  THEOLOGICSL  SEMINSRY 

JAvs.  Rlexandep  Ppoudfit. 


^ 


THE 


Apocalyptic  Drama 


"We  have  ..  a  ..  sure  word  of  prophecy,  whereunto  ye  do 
well  that  ye  take  heed,  as  unto  a  light  that  shineth  in  a  dark 
place,  until  the  day  dawn,  and  the  daj^-star  arise  in  your 
hearts."— 2  Pet.  l;i 9. 


NEW  YORK  AND  CHICAGO. 

fflemiuG  1b.  IRevell  Company 

Publishers  of  Evangelical  Literature. 


"Entered  According  to  Act  of  Congress  in  the  Year  1891, 

BY  FLEMING  H.  RE  YELL  COMPANY, 

In  the  Office  of  Librarian  of  Congress  at  Washington. 


GREETING  : 
"'*  Unto  all  them  that  love  his  appearing." 


THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA, 


Good  and  Evil. 

"And  the  Lord  God  said,  behold,  the 
man  has  become  as  one  of  us,  to  know  good 
and  evil.'"^  Alas,  for  man,  that  it  has  been 
so.  He  pays  dearly  for  his  knowledge.  And, 
what  is  to  be  the  end  of  it  ? — is  now  the  all 
important  question.  The  good  and  the  evil 
are  inseparable  from  us.  They  are  wnthin 
and  without.  They  are  mixed  up,  inexplic- 
ably mixed  up;  and  their  antagonism  is 
intense.  Must  it  ever  be  so  ?  Is  the  strife 
inevitable  ?  Is  this  the  order,  or  rather,  the 
disorder  of  the  universe  ?  Is  it  nature  with 
her  inexorable  law — unalterable,  everlasting; 
or  is  the  evil  destined  to  gain  the  ascendancy, 
and  to  assume  the  mastery?  It  seems  the 
stronger  of  the  two.  "What  I  would,  that 
do  I  not;  but  what  I  hate,  that  do  I."t  Is, 
then,  this  principle  of  evil  to  go  on  increas- 
ing in  strength,  untill  mind  and  matter — all 
the  universe — shall  succumb  to  its  power,  and 
evil,  and  only  evil,  be  the  law  of  being? 
These  questions  are  forcing  themselves  upon 

*Gen.  3:22.     fRom.  7:15. 


10  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA. 

lis.  Neither  our  philosophy  nor  our  science 
have  as  yet  answered  them;  nor  is  there  any 
prospect  that  they  will  ever  be  able  to  do  so. 
If  an  answer  come,  it  must  be  from  the  be- 
yond— from  the  unseen,  the  spiritual.  And 
we  who  bow  before  an  all-wise  Creator  and 
governor  of  the  universe,  not  only  look  to 
him  for  an  answer  to  these  questions,  but  we 
believe  that  he  has  already  given  it.  His 
word,  "the  scriptures  of  truth,"  recognizes 
the  existence  in  this  world  of  these  two  con- 
flicting principles.  This  word  begins  with  an 
account  of  the  way  in  which  the  evil  was  in- 
troduced ;  its  every  succeeding  narrative  is  an 
unfolding  of  the  irrepressible  conflict  between 
the  two  as  antagonized  principles;  and  it  ends 
with  the  "mystery  of  iniquity  "  finished,  sin 
cast  out,  and  truth  and  righteousness  triumph- 
ant. 

The  Study  of  Prophecy, 

To  those  who  accept  this  word  as  a  divine 
revelation,  dnd  who  ' '  keep  those  things 
which  are  written,"  this  conflict  and  this 
consummation  must  be  a  subject  of  never- 
failing  interest.  There  must  be  a  desire  on 
the  part  of  all  such  to  '  'look  into  these  things, ' ' 
not,  however,  with  idle  curiosity.  All  scrip- 
ture is  given  for  our  profit.  Even  in  its  hard 
sayings,  and  its  mysteries,  and  its  far-reach- 


THE  STUDY  OF  PROPHECY.  11 

ing  prophecies,  wrapped  up  in  the  language 
of  type  and  symbol — even  in  these,  there  must 
be  instruction,  for  they  are  a  part  of  ' '  all 
scripture. ' '  The  question  as  to  the  propriety 
of  searching  into  these  hidden  things  has  dis- 
turbed many  devout  minds,  and  has  led  to  a 
neglect  of  the  study  of  prophecy.  And  yet 
this  question  seems  to  have  been  anticipated 
and  answered  in  the  word  itself  At  the  very 
outset,  e.  g. ,  of  the  book  of  Revelation,  and 
before  a  prophecy  is  uttered  or  a  symbol  used, 
a  blessing  is  invoked  on  him  ' '  that  readeth  ' ' 
and  on  them  ' '  that  hear  the  words  of  this 
prophecy,  and  keep  those  things  which  are 
written  therein. ' '  *  And  as  the  book  begins, 
so  does  it  end,  with  benediction  on  him  who 
studies  these  mysteries.  ' '  Blessed  is  he  that 
keepeth  the  sayings  of  the  prophecy  of  this 
book."t 

And  let  it  be  noted  that  nothing  is  said  of 
understanding.  The  blessing  is  in  hearing 
the  words,  and  in  keeping  the  things  written 
in  the  heart,  for  warning,  instruction,  and 
hope.  The  wonderful  things  spoken  con- 
cerning Jesus,  and  also  by  himself,  were  not 
understood  by  his  mother:  but  we  are  told 
that  she  "  kept  "  them,  and  "  pondered  them 
in  her  heart"!  And  there  continues  to  be 
many   things  spoken  by  Jesus,    or   concern- 

*1:3.     t22:7.     t  Lu.  2:19. 


12  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA. 

ing-  him,  that  we  cannot  now  understand; 
but  we  can  keep  it  in  our  hearts  and 
ponder  them.  And  this  is  what  the  Lord 
would  have  us  do  in  regard  to  everything 
given  us  in  his  word.  Prophecy  is  no  ex- 
ception. If  there  is  much  connected  with 
it  that  is  mysterious  and  beyond  our  present 
grasp,  there  is  much  more  that  is  plain  and 
simple,  and  within  the  reach  of  every  docile 
mind  willing  to  take  God  at  his  word.  And 
it  is  these  "things" — these  fundamental 
facts — that  lie  on  the  very  surface  of  scrip- 
ture, and  especially  its  prophetic  portions, 
that  we  are  to  treasure  up  in  our  hearts. 
Look  at  some  of  these  things  that  the 
'sure  word  of  prophecy" — prophecy  used  in 
its  large  sense  of  forth-telling — has  revealed 
to  us.  The  world  that  now  is  with  in  the 
power  of  the  evil  one.  *  The  gospel  is  in  it 
witnessing  for  Jesus,  inviting,  warning,  and 
taking  from  among  the  Gentiles,  a  people 
for  His  name,  t  The  evil  element  working 
in  the  world  is  eventually  to  culminate  in 
the  lawless  one,  who  is  to  be  energized  by 
Satan:  along  with  his  appearing  there  is  to 
be  a  great  falling  away  in  the  church.  X  The 
Lord  is  to  come  again.  He  is  to  bring  his 
saints  with  him.  ||     He  is  to  put  all  enemies 

*John  5:19.      t  Acts  1:18.    15:14.        +  2  Thess.  2:1-11 
II 1  Thess.  4:13  &c. 


THE  STUDY  OF  PROPHECY.  13 

under  his  feet.  *  There  will  be  a  new  heaven 
and  a  new  earth.  Old  things  are  to  pass 
away,  all  things  are  to  become  new.f 

These  are  great  truths,  clearly  stated,  easy 
of  comprehension,  and  well  calculated  to  in- 
spire hope,  to  awaken  desire,  to  lift  the 
thoughts  above  the  things  seen,  to  center  the 
affections  on  things  not  seen,  and  to  make 
the  heart  cry  out — "  Come,  Lord  Jesus,  come 
quickly. ' '  Surely  these  are  ' '  sayings  ' '  to 
read,  and  to  hear  about,  and  to  keep  in  the 
heart,  and  to  ponder. 

And  so  also  of  the  things  not  so  easy  of 
comprehension.  There  are  indeed,  many 
such,  and  from  the  nature  of  these  "sayings," 
it  is  to  be  expected.  But  let  it  be  remem- 
bered that  these  are  not  forbidden  things. 
They,  too,  are  among  the  sayings  of  the  book 
that  are  to  be  kept.  Prophecies  that  are  now 
understood  were  once  inexplicable  even  to 
angels.  Yet  they  desired  to  look  into  them, 
and  were  not  chided  for  an  irreverent  curios- 
ity, j  Of  things  future,  disciples  asked: 
"Tell  us,  when  shall  these  things  be?  And 
what  the  sign  of  thy  coming,  and  the  end  of 
the  world  (age)?"§  The  master's  reply  is 
prompt,  and  it  meets  all  the  demands  of  his 
questioners.  Nor  is  there  on  the  occasion  a 
note  of   warning    against   a    too    inquisitive 

-1  Cor.  15:  24-26.     fRev.  21.    jl  Tit.  1:12.  ^Math.  24:3 


14  THE  APOCAIvYPTIC  DRAMA. 

Spirit  that  would  know  things  that  are  com- 
ing on  the  earth. 

Such  is  the  character  of  the  sayings  of  the 
book  we  propose  considering.  They  relate  to 
things  that  either  have  come,  or  are  yet  to 
come.  And  though  there  is  much  that  is 
sealed,  and  beside  which  we  must  write  the 
word  mystery^  yet  their  consideration  is  not 
forbidden.  They,  too,  are  among  the  sayings 
to  be  heard,  and  read,  and  pondered.  We 
know  so  much,  that  we  can  well  afford  to 
exercise  patience  and  wait  for  that  which  is 
not  plain.  ' '  At  the  end  it  shall  speak  and 
not  lie:  though  it  tarry,  wait  for  it."*  In 
due  time  we  shall  walk  with  the  master,  and 
our  understandings  shall  be. opened.  He  will 
himself  be  our  teacher.  Beginning  with 
Moses  and  all  the  prophets,  he  will  expound 
unto  us  in  all  the  scriptures  the  things  con- 
cerning himself  Meanwhile,  disciples  are 
to  keep  all  these  things  in  their  hearts,  pro- 
fiting by  what  they  know,  pondering  over 
what  they  cannot  understand,  and  ever  desir- 
ing and  receiving  more  and  more  of  the  prom- 
ised blessing. 

The  Object  of  the  Book. 

It  has  been  in  this  spirit  that  the  book  ot 
Revelation  has  been  studied  by  a  few  loving 

*Heb.  2:3. 


THE  OBJECT  OF  THE  BOOK.  15 

students  of  the  word,  and  we  send  out  some 
of  the  results  of  our  studies.  What,  another 
book  ?  Yes.  More  wild  fancies  to  be  con- 
signed to  the  flames?  Perhaps  so.  Many 
and  crude  have  been  the  interpretations  given 
to  the  words  of  this  book.  But  what  of  that  ? 
They  have  been  in  the  line  of  the  master's 
command,  and  they  have  kept  the  fact  of  a 
coming  Christ  before  the  world.  Time  has 
corrected  many  of  the  misconceptions  of  the 
past  and  will  continue  to  do  so.  The  vers^  inad- 
equacy of  some  of  these  conceptions,  has  stim- 
ulated others  to  a  more  intelligent  study  and 
to  more  satisfactory  results.  Thus  will  it 
be  to  the  end,  when  the  vision  ' '  shall  speak, 
and  not  lie,"  and  the  command  is,  "  wait  for 
it."  Now  it  is  waiting  for  the  vision,  not  in 
the  idleness  of  indifference,  but  in  reading  and 
speaking  often  one  to  another  concerning  the 
things  that  are  written — it  is  in  this  spirit  of 
waiting,  that  our  book  has  taken  shape.  We 
make  no  claim  to  a  solution  of  the  mystery,  or 
indeed,  of  any  of  the  mysteries  of  the  book. 
Far  from  it.  It  is  an  humble  feeling  after 
truth,  if  haply  we  may  find,  be  it  only  the 
smallest  fragment.  If  we  do  not  throw  light 
on  our  subject,  who  shall  say  that  another, 
stimulated  by  our  very  dullness,  may  not  re- 
ceive inspiration,  and  so  the  church  eventual- 
ly be  edified.      Then  will  our  little  book  have 


16  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA. 

accomplished  its  mission,  and  it  can  be  as- 
signed to  the  grave  of  forgetfulness. 

In  studying  the  Apocalypse,  its  structural 
character  has  occupied  our  attention  more  than 
exegesis;  and  our  thoughts  have  been  led  in 
this  direction  from  the  examination  of  other 
prophecies.  That  our  readers  may  be  the  bet- 
ter prepared  to  go  along  with  us  and  to  feel 
the  force  of  the  suggestions  to  be  made,  we 
must  ask  them  to  follow  us  in  a  brief  outline 
of  at  least  one  of  these  prophecies. 

Daniel  9:24-29. 

In  our  interpretation  of  prophecy  we  follow 
mainly  those  who  are  known  as  literalists. 
We  regard  Daniel's  prophecy  of  the  70  weeks 
as  an  epitomized  history  of  the  world,  from 
the  rebuilding  of  Jerusalem,  after  the  Baby- 
lonish captivity,  to  the  second  coming  of  the 
Lord.  The  70  weeks,  we  are  told,  concern 
' '  thy  people  and  thy  holy  city.  ' '  The 
prophecy  then  in  the  strictest  sense  re- 
lates to  Israel,  And  yet  there  is  wrapped 
up  in  it  of  very  necessity,  the  history,  not 
of  Israel  only,  but  of  the  church  and 
the  world,  and  that  to  the  end.  When  it 
speaks,  it  is  of  Israel.  But  there  is  a  break, 
a  long  interval  between  its  69th  week  and  its 
70th,  And  here  its  silence  is  most  instructive, 
for  it  sends  you  elsewhere  with   the   inquiry 


DANIEL  U:L:4-:i!J. 


— what  of  this  interval  ?  It  is  here  that  much 
of  previous  prophecies,  and  of  all  that  follows, 
whether  spoken  by  the  Lord  or  his  disciples, 
falls  into  place.  These  prophecies  break  the 
silence  and  fill  up  what  has  been  left  unsaid 
by  Daniel. 

The  Hebrew  word  here  "^  translated 
"weeks"  is  the  word  that  is  used  to  denote 
a  heptard  or  period  of  seven  days.  But  it  is 
claimed  by  most  commentators  that  in  the 
prophecy  it  stands  for  a  longer  period.  It  is 
thought  that  a  week  of  years,  and  not  of  days, 
is  intended.  And  this  is  common  sense.  To 
make  these  70  weeks,  weeks  of  days,  is  to  as- 
sign a  period  of  less  than  one  year  and  a  half 
(iVz)  for  the  whole  course  of  the  prophecy. 
This  clearly  was  not  the  intent  of  the  Spirit. 

Regarding  the  prophecy  then  as  speaking 
of  weeks  of  years,  the  whole  period  designat- 
ed amounts  to  490  years,  and  is  divided  into 
three  portions: 


(a),     7  weeks,  (V.  25), 

49  years. 

(A),  62       '' 

434     " 

{€),      I       "       (V.  27), 

/ 

70     ''  490 

Verse  24  tells  us  what  is  to  be  accomplished 
when  the  whole  period  of  70  weeks  has  run  its 
course,  viz. ,  the  finishing  of  transgression,  etc. 


Dan.  9:24. 


18  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA. 

In  V.  25  we  learn  that  "  from  the  going  forth 
of  the  commandment  to  restore  and  to  build 
Jerusalem,  unto  Messiah  the  Prince,  shall  be 
seven  weeks,  and  three  score  and  two  weeks. ' ' 
Seven  weeks,  i.  e. ,  49  years,  will  be  con- 
sumed in  the  rebuilding  of  the  city;  and  62 
weeks,  i.  e.,  434  years,  will  elapse  from  that 
time  to  the  cutting  off  of  Messiah.  After  this 
event  the  city  and  sanctuary  are  destroyed. 
49  and  434=483  years.  There  yet  remains 
one  week,  or  seven  years  of  the  prophecy  un- 
fulfilled, to  make  up  the  whole  period  of  490 
years. 

Up  to  this  point  there  is  much  unanimity 
in  interpretation,  but  just  here  there  is  di- 
vergence. What  of  this  week  ?  We  concur 
with  those  who  hold  that  after  the  cutting  off 
of  Messiah  at  the  close  of  the  69th  week,  the 
further  fulfilment  of  the  prophecy  is  stayed. 
It  stops  short  within  a  week  of  its  entire  ful- 
filment, and  that  last  week  still  waits  to  run 
its  course. 

In  V.  26  we  read  that  Messiah  shall  "  be 
cut  off,  but  not  for  himself"  The  margin 
reads,  and  so  also  the  R.  V. — "And  shall  have 
nothing,  ' ' — i.  e. ,  instead  of  a  kingdom  which 
he  sent  his  fore-runner  to  announce,  and 
which  he  came  to  establish,  he  has  nothing. 
Israel  would  none  of  him.  They  disallowed 
his  claims,  rejected  his  person,    and   refused 


DANIKL  J>:24-29.  19 


him  his  throne.  He  is  cast  out  of  the  vine- 
yard, and  he  is  sent  away  empty. 

Consequent  upon  this  rejection,  "the 
people  of  the  prince  that  shall  come  shall  de- 
stroy the  city  and  the  sanctuary ;  and  the  end 
thereof  ( i.  e.  of  this  destruction)  shall  be 
with  a  flood,  and  even  unto  the  end  shall  be 
war;  desolations  are  determined."  (R.  V.) 
The  idea  seems  to  be  this:  This  destruction 
of  their  city  and  temple  is  only  the  beginning 
of  this  new  controversy  that  Jehovah  God 
will  now  have  with  his  people  on  account  of 
their  rejection  of  their  Messiah.  Indig-nation 
and  wrath  will  be  poured  out  upon  them  a 
tremendous  and  resistless  flood,  and  it  will  be 
prolonged  "  many  days.  "*  Desolations  are 
determined  even  unto  the  end  of  this  divine 
war.  "  The  end".  This  is  a  point  of  time 
frequently  referred  to  by  Daniel,  f  It  is  found 
also  in  the  N.  T.  scriptures.  X  From  the  de- 
struction ol  the  city  to  "  the  end  " — a  point 
in  time  determined  on  in  divine  councils,  but 
not  yet  revealed — desolations  are  determined 
upon  Irsael. 

No  w  observe  that  the  cutting  off  of  Messiah 
brings  us  to  the  close  of  the  69th  week  of  the 
prophecy.  There  remains  one  more  week  to 
complete  the  70.  The  predictions  of  v.  26 
concern  the  destruction  of  the  city,  which  is 

''  Hos.  3:4.     t  VIA,  6,  9,  13.     J  Matt.  13:40,  24:3, 13,  14. 


'20  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA. 

the  beginning  of  a  war  that  is  to  last  to  ' '  the 
end."  This  (to  "  the  end  ")  is  an  indefinite 
period  that  has  been  running  on  for  over 
eighteen  centuries,  and  ' '  the  end  ' '  is  not 
yet,  whereas  this  particular  prophecy  calls 
for  only  one  more  week  of  seven  years. 
These  prophecies  therefore  concerning  these 
determined  desolations  can  have  no  relation 
to  this  week. 

Then  again,  these  prophecies  of  v.  26  relate 
to  divine  wrath  poured  on  Israel,  whereas 
the  70  weeks  portend  blessings.  Look  at  them. 
V.  24:  "  Seventy  weeks  are  determined  up- 
on thy  people,  and  upon  thy  holy  city,  to 
finish  the  transgression,  and  to  make  an  end 
of  sins,  and  to  make  reconciliation  for  in- 
iquity, and  to  bring  in  everlasting  righteous- 
ness, and  to  seal  up  the  vision  and  prophecy, 
and  to  anoint  the  most  holy."  All  this  is 
just  the  reverse  of  "desolations  are  deter- 
mined" (v.  26).  Surely  these  gracious  pur- 
poses await  their  fulfilment,  and  the  70th 
week  of  the  prophecy  is  yet  to  dawn  on  Israel 
and  the  world  in  the  fulness  of  its  blessed- 
ness. 

We  are  then  forced  to  the  conclusion  that 
there  has  been  an  interruption  in  the  onward 
movement  of  this  prophecy.  Its  further  ful- 
fillment is  clearly  arrested  at  the  cutting  off 
of  Messiah;  and  its  70th  or  last  week  awaits 


DANIEIy  9:24-29.  21 


its  accomplishment.      In  the  hiatus  thus  cre- 
ated, we  are  living. 

This  interpretation  is  important  in  its  bear- 
ing on  the  suggestions  to  be  proposed  in  our 
study  of  the  Apocalypse.  We  must  therefore 
ask  for  it  further  consideration. 

Our  theory  is,  that  of  the  70  weeks  of  Dan- 
iel's prophecy,  69  have  met  their  fulfilment. 
One  week  remains  to  run  its  course.  There 
has  therefore  been  an  interruption  in  the  con- 
tinuity of  the  prophecy.  At  the  time  of  the 
cutting  off  of  Messiah  there  was  a  break.  It 
has  lasted  now  through  nineteen  centuries, 
and  it  will  continue  to  the  time  of  "the 
end",  when  again  the  prophecy  will  resume 
its  course,  and  the  announcements  connected 
with  its  last  heptard  will  have  their  fulfill- 
ment. Is  this  fanciful  ?  Is  it  trifling  with 
the  word  of  God  by  an  attempted  accommo- 
dation to  our  preconceived  notions?  Or  does 
the  prophecy  itself  necessitate  such  an  inter- 
pretation, and  does  the  analogy  of  scripture 
authorize  it  ?     Let  us  see. 

(a)  We  claim  that  the  prophecy  itself  neces- 
sitates this  view.  It  concerns  Israel,  and  Israel 
only.  Daniel  has  been  confessing  the  sins  of 
his  people,  and  has  been  presenting  his  suppli- 
cation for  the  holy  mountain  of  his  God  (v. 
20).  While  he  is  yet  speaking  the  man  Ga- 
briel comes  to  him   to  orive  him  understand- 


22  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA. 

iiig.  He  tells  him:  "  Seventy  weeks  are  de- 
termined upon  thy  people^  and  upon  tJiy  holy 
city  (v.  24).  The  prophecy  then  relates  to 
Israel  and  to  their  city,  and  to  them  only. 
In  his  explanations  the  announcing  angel 
reaches  a  point  where  people  and  city  are  not 
(v.  26).  "The  people  of  the  prince  that 
shall  come,  shall  destroy  the  city  and  the 
sanctuary."  They  cease  to  be.  Israel  is  no 
longer  a  nation.  Their  house  has  been  left 
unto  them  desolate.  *  x\nd  this  is  to  be  their 
condition  for  ' '  many  days' ' .  f  Of  necessity 
therefore,  all  through  these  ' '  many  days  ' ' 
of  desolation,  the  onward  course  of  the 
prophecy  toward  its  fulfilment  must  be  ar- 
rested. The  one  week  that  remains  concerns 
them  as  much  as  did  the  69  that  are  passed. 
What  remains  of  the  prophecy  to  be  fulfilled 
(its  last  heptard),  must  therefore  continue  in 
this  state  of  suspense  until  the  nation,  and 
city,  and  sanctuary,  have  existence  again. 
Their  existence  is  a  necessity  to  the  require- 
ments of  the  prophecy.  Its  fulfillment  is  sus- 
pended because  they  are  not.  In  the  interim, 
we  have  the  history  of  the  '  'scattered' '  people, 
and  the  destroyed  city,  in  the  closing  state- 
ments of  V.  26.  It  is  a  war  of  divine 
judgments  against  them  because  they 
have  rejected  and  cut  off  their  Messiah.     The 

*  Matt.  23:38.     f  Hos.  3:4. 


DANIEL  9:24-29.  23 


vineyard  has  been  taken  from  them  and  given 
to  others.  *  Their  house  has  been  left  unto 
them  "desolate;"  it  still  remains  for  them, 
but  desolate,  t  And  they  "  shall  be  led  cap- 
tives into  all  nations,  and  Jerusalem  shall  be 
trodden  down  of  the  Gentiles,  until  the  times 
of  the  Gentiles  be  fulfilled,  "t 

{b)  This  view  of  the  prophecy  is  further 
necessitated  by  its  relation  to  other  proph- 
ecies. The  word  of  God  is  a  unit.  Even 
when  not  so  expressed,  there  is  always  im- 
plied a  connection  and  dependence  of  parts 
with  parts.  Scripture  is  to  be  compared  with 
scripture.  One  statement  is  to  be  contrasted 
with  another,  and  the  harmony  of  the  whole 
is  thus  to  be  adjusted.  And  the  prophetic 
portions  are  no  exceptions  to  this  rule.  Every 
prophecy  has  relations  of  more  or  less  import- 
ance with  those  that  have  preceded  it.  In 
seeking  interpretations  therefore,  these  mu- 
tual relations  and  dependencies  are  important 
factors.  Many  other  prophecies  concerning 
Israel  had  preceded  the  one  we  are  consider- 
ing. Its  uninterrupted  fulfillment  to  ''the 
end"  must  therefore  depend  upon  the  man- 
ner in  which  the  conditions  of  these  prior 
prophecies  shall  be  carried  out,  E.  g.  In 
Dent.  i8:  i8,  19,  we  find  the  promise  of  a 
coming    prophet    like    unto    Moses.     Along 

*  Matt.  21:33,  &c.     t  Matt.  23:38.     ;  Lu.  21:24. 


24  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA. 

with  this  announcement  is  a  warning  against 
an  ungracious  reception  of  this  prophet,  and 
threatened  punishment  should  they  not 
hearken  to  his  words.  And  this  was  the  very 
thing  that  Israel  did.  They  refused  to 
hearken  to  the  words  of  this  prophet,  and  they 
rejected  their  Messiah.  But  all  scripture 
must  be  fulfilled,  and  in  its  fulfillment  must 
harmonize.  Hence  it  is  that  just  at  this  point 
in  Daniel's  prophecy — the  cutting  off  of  Mes- 
siah— the  two  prophecies  touch  each  other, 
and  there  is  need  of  adjustment.  The  fulfill- 
ment of  the  entire  70  weeks  is  depend- 
ent upon  what  Israel  will  do  with  a  prophet 
whom  Moses  has  announced.  If  they  will 
hearken  unto  him,  then  the  70  weeks 
can  move  on  in  their  fulfillment,  and  the 
conclusion  of  the  last  week  will  find  Israel  in 
possession  of  all  the  blessings  announced  in 
V.  24.  But  Israel  in  the  exercise  of  the  free- 
dom of  the  will,  rejected  the  prophet,  and 
therefore  Daniel's  prophecy  had  to  give  way 
to  the  threatened  punishments  of  the  prior 
prophecy.  Daniel's  last  week  has  been  sus- 
pended until  Moses'  forewarned  judgments 
are  executed.  *  Many  other  prophecies  have 
a  similar  bearing  upon  this  one  of  Daniel's 
that  we  are  considering,  e.  g..  Lev.  26.  Deut. 
28.     Josh.  23:15,  16.      Is.  1:19,  20. 

*Acts  3:23,  etc. 


DANIEL  5:24-29.  25 


It  is  thus  apparent  that  the  dependence  of 
this  prophecy  on  others  necessitates  the  sus- 
pension of  the  fulfilhnent  of  its  last  week  in 
order  that  the  unity  and  harmony  of  scripture 
may  be  maintained. 

(c)  And  this  conditional  feature  in  a 
book  so  full  of  strong  and  positive  state 
ments  must  not  surprise  us.  The  warn- 
ings, counsels,  commands  and  promises  of 
scripture  are  addressed  to  intelligent  and  free 
agents,  and  God  never  loses  sight  of  this  fact. 
In  proportion  as  he  gives  liberty  to  the  crea- 
ture, he  limits  himself.  "  If  ye  will  harken 
unto  me, ' '  etc.  "If  ye  will  obey  my  voice, ' ' 
etc.  ' '  I  would  ...  ye  would  not. "  "Ye 
will  not  come  to  me  that  ye  may  have  life."* 
Such  is  the  conditional  element  that  runs 
through  the  whole  of  scripture.  The  prophe- 
cies are  no  exception.  If  this  element  is  not 
always  expressed  it  is  always  implied.  And 
hence  we  find  many  prophecies  marked  with 
the  peculiarity  that  we  are  claiming  for  these 
70  weeks  of  Daniel.  Look  for  instance 
at  the  commission  given  to  Moses  to  lead  the 
children  of  Israel  into  Canaan.  It  was  a 
short  journey  from  Egypt  to  Canaan.  A  few 
weeks  at  most  could  have  accomplished  it. 
So  far  as  the  record  shows  it  was  the  Divine 
intent  to  accomplish  this  object  speedily.   The 


Jer.  11:3-9.     Pro.  1:24,  &c. 


26  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA. 


people  expected  to  enter  in  and  inherit  at 
once.  But  that  generation  died  in  the  wild- 
erness, and  it  is  forty  years  before  Israel  is 
settled  in  their  land.  The  cowardice  and  re- 
bellion of  the  people  hindered.  And  while 
they  could  not  frustrate  divine  purposes  they 
could,  and  did,  delay  their  fulfillment.  Thus 
we  have  delay,  a  postponement,  such  as  we 
claim  in  this  prophecy  of  Daniel's,  of  the 
time  set  for  the  completion  of  the  divine 
purposes. 

There  are  several  remarkable  prophecies 
that  present  us  with  this  same  feature  of  a 
break  in  their  continuity,  and  singularly 
enough  they  relate  to  Israel  and  their  accept- 
ance or  rejection  of  their  Messiah.  We  call 
attention  to  one.  Compare  L^u.  4:17-21  and 
Is.  61:1,  etc.  Why  did  the  Lord  close  the 
book  after  reading  the  clause,  ' '  To  preach 
the  acceptable  year  of  the  Lord  ?  ' '  There 
was  but  a  comma  between  it  and  the  next, 
and  they  were  closely  connected  by  the  con- 
junction and.  Why  then  did  he  not  go  on 
to  proclaim  also  "  the  day  of  vengeance  of  our 
God,"  and  all  else  that  follows?  It  is  all 
one  prophetic  proclamation.  Clearly,  the 
answer  is,  because  the  carrying  out  of  what 
follows  was  dependent  upon  the  reception  on 
Israel's  part  of  "the  acceptable  year  of  the 
Lord,"   and   a  recognition  of  him  who  pro- 


DANIEL  9:24-29.  27 


claimed  it  as  their  Messiah.  In  his  ministry 
the  lyord  is  now  approaching  the  close  of  the 
69th  week  of  Daniel's  prophecy.  The  words 
of  Isaiah  are  the  divinely  appointed  language 
in  which  Messiah  is  to  announce  his  advent, 
and  is  to  offer  himself  for  acceptance  to 
Israel.  Jesus  uses  these  words  and  thereby 
appropriates  them  to  himself,  and  proclaims 
himself  to  Israel  as  their  expected  Messiah. 
Will  they  accept  him?  He  must  wait  and 
see.  Their  future  is  now  in  their  own  hands. 
It  is  for  them  to  say  whether  the  remainder 
of  the  prophetic  proclamation  is  to  go  on  to 
its  immediate  completion  or  not.  Here,  as 
ever,  ' '  the  awful  freedom  of  the  human  will 
was  respected  by  its  Maker. ' '  They  rejected 
him.  The  proclamation  in  its  completeness 
could  not  be  carried  out.  The  day  of  Israel's 
redemption  must  be  postponed.  It  is  not 
forever  lost  to  them.  It  is  still  future;  but 
will  not  be  until  they  are  ready  to  say, 
' '  Blessed  is  he  that  cpmeth  in  the  name  of 
the  Lord."  *  This  prophecy  tells  the  same 
story  as  the  one  we  are  considering.  The 
events  it  announces  synchronize  with  the 
events  that  are  to  follow  the  close  of  Daniel's 
last  week,  and  it  presents  us  with  precisely 
the  same  hiatus.  A  rejected  Messiah  stays 
the  future  progress  of  both  prophecies,  and 

*  Matt.  23:39. 


28  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA. 

when  the  events  of  Daniel's  last  week  shall 
be  accomplished,  then  shall  the  words  of  this 
proclamation  be  sounded  forth  again,  and  this 
time  in  all  its  fullness.  The  same  voice  that 
in  Judea  eighteen  hundred  years  ago  began 
it,  shall  now  complete  it,  amid  the  acclama- 
tions of  the  people,  ' '  Blessed  is  he  that 
cometh  in  the  name  of  the  I^ord. ' ' 

A  word  in  reference  to  this  70th  week,  and 
some  of  the  events  that  are  connected  with 
it  as  shadowed  forth  in  v.  27. 

^^ And  he  shall  confirm^' ^  etc.  Who  is  the 
person  here  referred  to  ?  is  an  important  ques- 
tion. It  has  called  forth  many  answers. 
Some  consider  him  the  Messiah.  This  per- 
son causes  ' '  the  sacrifice  and  oblation  to 
cease,"  and  this,  it  is  said,  is  what  Christ 
did  by  the  sacrifice  of  himself.  But  did  he  ? 
It  was  thirty  years  after  his  death  before  Jew- 
ish sacrifices  were  discontinued,  and  then  not 
because  of  any  influence  of  the  crucified  Christ 
upon  the  nation,  but  because  of  the  destruc- 
tion of  their  city  and  temple.  And  so  far  as 
his  influence  on  them  is  concerned,  they 
would  be  offering  their  sacrifices  to-day  if 
their  temple  was  still  in  existence. 

Then  notice  the  difference  between  this 
covenant  and  the  one  Messiah  is  to  make. 
This  person  is  to  make  a  (see  marg.  and  R. 


DANIEL  9:24-20.  29 


V.)  covenant;  but  Messiah's  is  the  covenant.  * 
This  person's  covenant  is  for  a  week,  /.  ^. , 
seven  years,  clearly  Daniel's  last  heptard;  but 
Messiah' s  is  an  'everlasting  covenant,  t  Then , 
again,  in  the  midst  of  the  week  this  person  is 
to  break  his  covenant;  but  Messiah's  cove- 
nant cannot  be  broken.  The  word  of  the 
Lord  is  sure.  His  covenant  is  an  everlasting 
covenant.  Observe,  also,  that  the  Lord  re- 
fers to  the  events  connected  with  this  proph- 
ecy as  future  in  his  day,  {  and  names  the 
time  of  "the  end"  (v.  14)  for  their  fulfill- 
ment. He,  therefore,  cannot  be  the  person 
intended  in  this  27th  verse. 

Many  historical  characters  have  been  named 
in  this  connection,  but  the  only  one  worthy  of 
the  slightest  consideration  is  Titus,  the  com- 
manding general  when  Jerusalem  was  de- 
stroyed. But  the  destruction  announced  in 
V.  26  is  attributed  to  ^'' the  people  of  the  prince 
that  shall  come, ' '  and  not  to  the  prince  him- 
self. And  let  it  be  further  noted  that  the  de- 
struction announced  in  this  verse  is  of  the 
city  and  sanctuary,  and  that  it  is  complete, 
fulfilling  the  threatenings  of  Lev.  26:14,  &c. , 
and  Deut.  28:15,  &c,  Whereas,  in  v.  27  it 
is  not  the  city  that  is  to  be  destroyed,  but  "  the 
Desolator^^^   who  has  broken  the  covenant. 


*Is.  59:21  cf.;  Heb.  8:10.     f  Is.  55:3;  Jer.  32:40;  Ezek. 
16:60.     t  Matt.  24:15. 


30  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA. 

(See  marg.  and  R.  V.).  In  these  and  other 
respects  it  will  be  found  that  Titus  cannot 
meet  the  requirements  of  v.  27. 

Who,  then,  is  "  >^^ "  f  Observe  who  are 
the  first  agents  in  this  war  of  desolation  that 
we  are  told  in  v.  26  is  determined  against  the 
holy  city,  etc.  "  The  people  (v.  26)  of  the 
prince  that  shall  come."  In  this  verse  we 
are  dealing  with  fulfilled  prophecy,  and  we 
therefore  know  the  people  who  were  the  in- 
instruments  of  this  first  destruction.  But  who 
is  the  prince  that  shall  come?  It  is  ^Hhe 
people  ^^  (the  Romans)  who  shall  destroy 
the  city.  "  The  prince  "  is  yet  future.  The 
' '  shall  come  ' '  belongs  to  ' '  the  prince, ' '  not 
to  the  Roman  people — "  the  prince  that  shall 
come."  When?  Verse  27  introduces  us  to 
him,  we  think,  and  tells  us  something  about 
him.  When  all  the  conditions  required  by 
the  prophecy — a  restored  nation  and  a  city 
rebuilt — are  in  place  again,  then  will  the 
prophecy  resume  its  fulfillment,  and  then 
this  "prince  of  the  people"  (Romans)  who 
destroyed  Jerusalem,  A.  D.  70,  shall  come. 
With  his  coming,  the  last  week  of  the  70,  its 
interrupted  week,  will  begin  to  run  its  course 
of  fulfillment.  This  prince  will  then  step 
upon  the  scene  of  this  world's  greatest  trag- 
edy. He  will  make  his  covenant  with  Israel, 
and  begin  to  magnify  himself,     In  the  midst 


DANIEL  9:24-29.  31 


of  the  week  he  will  break  his  covenant,  and 
will  turn  his  power  against  Israel,  to  desolate; 
but  at  the  determined  moment,  "  wrath  shall 
be  poured  out  upon  the  desolator. "   (R.V.) 

The  ''//^"  of  V.  27  is,  then,  we  think, 
"  the  prince  "  of  v.  26.  He  is  identical  with 
Daniel's  "little  horn"  of  chap.  7:7,  8.  He 
springs  from  that  "  fourth  beast, ' '  so  dread- 
ful and  terrible.  All  expositors  who  do  not 
spiritualize  the  prophecies  into  airy  nothing- 
ness, regard  this  * '  fourth  beast ' '  as  the  sym- 
bol of  the  Roman  Empire,  the  last  consoli- 
dated power  of  Gentile  dominion.  We  further 
identify  this  person  with  ' '  the  man  of  sin, ' ' 
' '  the  son  of  perdition, ' '  spoken  of  by  St. 
Paul,  2  Thess,  2:3,  and  the  wild  beast  of  Rev. 
13:,  to  whom  the  dragon  gives  "  his  power, 
and  his  seat,  and  great  authority. ' ' 

The  following  is  a  summary  of  the  inter- 
pretation we  have  been  considering.  Seventy 
weeks  (490  years)  are  determined  on  Daniel's 
people.  During  this  period,  starting  with 
the  restoration,  the  city  is  to  be  rebuilt,  recon- 
ciliation for  sin  is  to  be  accomplished,  ever- 
lasting righteousness  brought  in,  etc.,  (v.  24). 

To  this  whole  period  there  is  given  a  three- 
fold division,  (i)  From  the  decree  to  restore, 
etc.,  (v.  24,)  7  weeks,  or  49  years,  are  de- 
termined. (2)  From  this  point  to  the  cut- 
ting off  of  Messiah,  62  weeks,  or  434  years. 


32  THE  APOCAI.YPTIC  DRAMA. 

The  combined  periods  equaling  483  years. 
(3)  One  more  week  remains  to  complete  the 
whole  number  (490)  of  predicted  years.  But 
here  the  onward  movement  of  the  prophecy 
stops.  Instead  of  ' '  everlasting  righteous- 
ness,"  etc.,  we  have  the  announcement  of  a 
destroyed  city,  etc.  "War" — Divine  chas- 
tisement— determined  upon  Israel  because  of 
their  rejected  Messiah.  His  cutting  off  is 
required  of  them  according  to  a  prior 
prophecy.  *  And  so  long  as  this  controversy 
lasts  "desolations  are  determined."  Israel 
and  Jerusalem  aie  given  up  to  Gentile 
power  to  be  trodden  down.  But  when  ' '  the 
times  of  the  Gentiles  shall  be  fulfilled,"  the 
covenant  with  Israel  will  be  remembered. 
They  will  be  restored  to  their  land.  City 
and  sanctuary  will  be  rebuilt.  Then  will 
the  prophecy  resume  its  course  of  fulfillment, 
and  its  last,  long  suspended  week,  will  begin 
to  run  to  its  completion.  On,  or  about,  the 
opening  of  this  week,  a  notable  personage 
(v.  27)  is  to  appear,  who  is  to  make  this 
week  famous.  He  is  the  prince  of  v.  26,  of 
whom  it  is  said — he  ' '  shall  come. ' '  He  is 
of  the  people  who  formerly  destroyed  the 
city — the  Roman.  I.  e.  He  will  spring  from 
some  one  of  the  great  powers  that  in  his  day 
represents  the  fourth  beast,  or  Roman  empire. 


*Deut.  18:18. 


DANIEL,  9:24-27.  33 


This  prince  will  make  ' '  a  firm  covenant 
with  many"  (R.  V.),  i.  e.,  with  Israel. 
This  will  be  at  the  begining  of  the  last  week. 
At  this  time  therefore  Israel  will  be  restored*. 
Heretofore — during  "many  days" — the  Gen- 
tile has  been  treading  down  Israel;  now  he  is 
to  build  him  upf.  He,  ' '  the  prince, ' '  makes 
a  covenant.  But  he  does  not  keep  it.  In 
the  midst  of  the  half  of  the  week  (R.  V.),  he 
begins  to  exalt  himself.  As  he  has  done 
elsewhere,  so  will  he  do  at  Jerusalem. 
There  will  possibly  be  some  interference  with 
worship  and  with  religious  rites.  ' '  And  for 
the  overspreading"  etc.,  (see  marg.), — "and 
upon  the  wing  of  abominations  shall  come 
one  that  maketh  desolate,"  (R.  V.). 
' '  Abominations ' '  in  the  O.  T.  scriptures 
often  stands  for  idolsj.  "  Overshadowing," 
literally  wings  (R.  V.).  It  conveys  the  idea 
of  protection§.  The  meaning  possibly  is — 
for  the  protection  of  idols,  he  shall  make  it 
desolate. 

But  when  this  half  week  (3^  years)  shall 
have  run  its  course,  the  consummation  that 
has  been  "  determined  "  shall  be  poured  out 
upon  the  desolator  (R.  V.),  i.  e.,  upon  this 
prince.  He  being  destroyed,  Israel  and  the 
world  will   be  ready  for  the  promised  bless- 


-Joel8:4.    Hos.  3:5.    fls.  49:     jl  Kings   11:5,  7.     ^Ps. 
17:8.  36:7. 


34  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA. 

ings  of  V.  24,  and  there  will  now  be  an  end 
of  transgressions,  etc. 

We  have  dwelt  thus  fully  on  this  prophecy 
because  it  is  important  in  its  bearing  on  our 
proposed  suggestions  regarding  the  Apoc- 
alypse. It  is  the  key  to  our  position.  If 
this  explanation  of  Daniel's  70  weeks  is  right, 
all  that  follows  seems  but  a  filling  up  of  what 
he  has  left  unsaid — a  filling  up  of  the  hiatus 
caused  by  the  interruption  of  his  prophecy. 
This  interruption  began  with  the  cutting  off 
of  Messiah,  and  extends  to  a  point  of  time 
yet  future.  We  are  living  in  its  times.  It 
has  been  running  on  more  than  eighteen 
hundred  years;  how  much  longer  it  is  yet  to 
run  we  cannot  tell.  It  is  an  eventful  time, 
full  of  history,  and  God's  word  is  not 
silent  regarding  it.  Both  Testaments  speak. 
Their  prophecies  foreshadow  events  down  to 
this  last  week  of  Daniel,  and  through  it  to 
' '  the  end. ' '  And  nowhere  are  these  fore- 
shadowings  more  remarkable,  and  more  dis- 
tinct, than  in  those  symbolic  representations 
found  in  the  Revelation  of  Jesus  Christ  to  the 
Churches.  In  these  prophecies  of  both  Testa- 
ments, four  lines  of  history  may  be  clearly 
traced,  viz. :  (i)  Concerning  Israel,  (2)  con- 
cerning Gentile  power  and  dominion,  (,^) 
concerning  the  Christ,  and  (4)  in  the  N.  T. 
concerning  the  Church. 


THE  BOOK  OF  REVELATION.  35 

This  is  the  statement  we  wish  to  carry 
with  us  to  the  book  of  Revelation.  This 
book  we  regard  as  an  historic  prophecy.  Its 
utterances  and  visions  have  for  their  subjects 
in  a  special  manner  these  last  three  histories 
as  they  are  influenced  by  unseen  and  super- 
natural forces,  and  as  they  act  and  re-act  one 
upon  the  other.  It  begins  with  them  some- 
what later  than  the  end  of  Daniel's  69th 
week,  and  it  carries  them  to  his  last  week 
and  through  it,  and  extends  them  even  be- 
yond the  present  aeon,  giving  us  promises 
and  glimpses  of  a  new  heavens  and  a  new 
earth. 

As  we  look  at  the  utterances  and  visions 
of  this  book,  they  seem  to  be  a  hopelessly 
tangled  skein.  Can  they  be  unravelled? 
This  is  our  hope,  guided  by  the  light  that 
other  and  prior  prophecies  throw  upon  the 
subject.  All  have  come  from  the  same 
source,  all  must  have  the  same  drift.  If  the 
prophetic  events  of  this  book  synchronize 
with  the  times  of  Daniel's  hiatus,  viz.,  the 
interval  between  his  69th  week  and  his  70th, 
and  if  there  are  other  prophecies  of  an  his- 
torical character  that  evidently  belong  to  this 
same  period,  then  it  is  not  unreasonable  to 
suppose  that  the  prophetic  visions  of  the 
Revelation  may  treat  of  the  same  subjects. 
If  these  prior  prophecies  give  us  several  lines 


36  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA. 

of  history  connected  with  different  persons 
or  events,  we  tnrn  to  these  last  forth-tellings  of 
the  spirit  of  prophecy  with  the  inquiry — do 
they  look  in  the  same  direction  also?  Is  it 
their  purpose  to  unfold  to  us  these  same  his- 
tories, and  to  cause  us  to  understand  more 
definitely  the  events  to  transpire  from  the 
time  of  the  suspension  of  Daniel's  prophecy 
to  the  resumption  of  its  last  week,  and  on  to 
''the  end?" 

As  a  preparation  for  this  proposed  study 
it  is  important  to  get  before  us  distinct  con- 
ceptions of  these  prophetic  histories,  and  to 
assure  ourselves  that  they  are  the  subjects  of 
previous  prophecies.  In  this  direction  we 
must  be  very  brief.  It  is  impossible  even  to 
look  at  the  wealth  of  O.  T.  teachings  on  this 
subject.  Contenting  ourselves  with  references 
to  them  in  the  progress  of  our  study,  we 
pass  on  to  the  N.  T.,  and  glance  at  the 
Lord's  prophecy  as  contained  in  Matt.  24, 
and  the  corresponding  chapters  of  MarkJ  and 
Lukef. 

The  Lord's  Prophecy. 

The  time  embraced  by  this  prophecy  is — 
"  this  age"  (aio^v).  This  includes  the  whole 
period  of  the  gospel  dispensation.  It  runs 
from  the  crucifixion   of    the  Lord    and    the 

*  Mark  13.     f  Luke  21. 


MATTHEW  24:  37 


organization  of  his  Church,  to  his  coming 
again — "the  end  of  the  age  J."  It  thus 
synchronizes  with  the  period  of  Daniel's 
hiatus,  beginning  with  the  cutting  off  of 
Messiah,  and  running  to  and  through  his 
last  week. 

We  find  in  this  prophecy  the  fourfold  his- 
tory that  has  been  spoken  of,  beginning,  as 
we  have  said,  with  the  time  then  present 
and  running  on  to  "  the  end. ' ' 

I.  IsraeV s  history.  It  is  very  brief.  In 
the  Revelation  it  is  even  more  so  than  here. 
There  is  perhaps,  according  to  our  interpre- 
tation, not  more  than  one  allusion  to  Israel 
throughout  that  book,  and  the  reason  is  not 
far  to  find.  Israel,  though  "  not  cast  away," 
has  been  given  up  to  judicial  blindness.  In 
the  exercise  of  the  freedom  of  the  will,  they 
have  rejected  their  Messiah.  As  a  people 
they  are  suffering  the  judgments  denounced 
against  them  should  they  be  guilty  of  this 
act.  So  far  as  their  national  life  is  con- 
cerned, they  are  not.  They  have  no  history, 
save  that  of  the  prisoner  serving  his  sen- 
tence. And  if  you  would  know  what  that  his- 
tory is,  go  read  the  sentence.  In  Israel's 
case  we  will  find  it  in  the  latter  half  of  the 
26th  V.    of    Daniel's  ninth  chapter,  and  still 


\  Matt.  24:3,  13,  14,  30  and  23;  38,  39. 


38  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA. 

more  fully  in  Lev.  26:  Deut.  28:15,  &c. ;  Matt. 

23-38,  39;  L^i-  21:6,  20-24. 

This  is  not  a  fancy  arrangement  to  suit 
the  condition  of  things  we  are  contending 
for.  It  is  not  only  in  accordance  with  the 
positive  statements  of  the  divine  word  as  to 
Israel's  present  status  (see  e.  g.  Hosea  3:4), 
but  it  is  a  repetition  of  what  has  actually 
occurred  before.  There  is  a  similar  instance 
of  such  a  gap  in  Israel's  history  as  the  one 
we  are  now  considering,  in  connection  with 
Jeremiah's  prophecy  of  the  Babylonish  cap- 
tivity (Jer.  25:11,  and  29:10).  The  king- 
dom is  interrupted  by  the  taking  of  Zedekiah 
to  Babylon,  and  we  hear  no  more  of  Israel 
in  their  nationality  from  that  time  on  until 
the  expiration  of  the  70  years.  As  a  nation 
they  cease  to  have  a  history  until  the  cap- 
tivity ends.  Israelis  sacred  history,  the  his- 
tory with  which  the  word  of  God  is  con- 
cerned, is  identified  with  the  theocracy. 
This  suspended,  Israel's  national  life  is  sus- 
pended. Their  record,  as  the  chosen  people, 
disappears  from  the  divine  page.  The  word 
of  God  knows  nothing  of  them  save  as  they 
are  undergoing  their  sentence.  This  is 
Israel's  condition  now.  From  the  cutting 
off  of  Messiah  and  their  scattering,  to  their 
restoration,  there  is,  so  to  speak,  an  historic 
parenthesis.      The  kingdom,  in  its  temporal 


MATTHEW  24. 


ascendency  and  in  its  spiritual  privileges,  has 
been  taken  from  them,  and  has  been  given 
to  the  Gentile. 

In  the  book  of  Revelation  therefore  Israel 
has  no  recognition.  During  the  most  of  the 
historical  period  that  it  covers,  Israel  has  no 
national  life,  nor  has  their  history  any  bear- 
ing upon  the  national  life  about  them.  Nor 
will  it,  until  Daniel's  last  week  begins  to 
run  its  course.  With  this  week,  Israel  again 
take  their  place  among  the  nations,  and  after 
a  brief  interval  of  distress,  a  new  and  glorious 
national  career  opens  before  them.  Hence, 
we  are  not  to  expect  mention  of  Israel  in  the 
Revelation,  at  least  not  until  we  are  brought 
to  the  point  where  the  events  of  Daniel's 
last  week  are  recorded. 

But  when  the  I^ord's  prophecy  was  spoken, 
Israel  still  had  a  place  and  habitation.  We 
are  therefore  to  expect  in  his  prophecy  a  his- 
tory. And  we  have  it.  And  such  a  history! 
Alas,  for  Israel!  Of  the  temple,  there  shall 
not  be  left  one  stone  upon  another  that  shall 
not  be  thrown  down.  Of  the  city,  it  is  to  be 
left  desolate,  and  is  to  be  trodden  down  of  the 
Gentiles.  Of  the  people,  there  is  wrath  upon 
them.  Theyshall  fall  by  the  edge  of  the  sword, 
and  shall  be  led  away  captive  into  all  nations. 

Read,  Matt.  23:34-39,   and  24:2. 

See  Luke,  21:6,  20-24. 


40  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA. 

The  prevailing  interpretation  of  this  pro- 
phecy of  the  Lord's,  is  made  to  center  upon 
the  destruction  of  Jerusalem  by  Titus.  This 
catastrophy  covers  the  whole  ground  in  the 
estimation  of  most  expositors.  Even  the 
passages  that  announce  the  coming  of  the 
Lord,  find  their  fulfillment  in  it.  It  seems  pre- 
sumptuous to  differ  from  the  many  learned 
who  agree  upon  this  interpretation.  And  yet 
we  must  presume  to  differ.  There  are  so 
many  statements  of  the  prophecy  that  have 
not  met  their  fulfillment,  that  we  are  compelled 
to  dissent  from  the  generally  received  ex- 
planation. 

Look  at  some  of  them. 

1.  The  gospel  is  to  be  preached  iii  all  the 
world  as  a  witness^.  This  was  not  effected 
at  the  time  of  Jerusalem's  destruction  by 
Titus;  nor  has  it  been  accomplished  as  yet. 

2.  "77?^  abomination  of  desolatio^t^''''  etc. 
(v.  15).  This  was  not  made  to  stand  in  the 
holy  place  by  the  Romans.  They  were  ever 
scrupulous  in  respecting  Jewish  religious  feel- 
ing. Titus  was  desirous  of  saving  the  temple, 
and  gave  command  to  that  effect.  The  Ro- 
mans never  had  access  to  it.  There  could 
therefore  have  been  no  abomination  set  up  in 
its  holy  place  by  them,  and  as  the  temple  has 


*Matt.  24:14. 


MATTHEW  24.  41 


ever  since  been  destroyed,  the  prophecy  must 
yet  stay  for  its  fulfillment. 

3.  The  disturbed  state  of  the  natio7is.  (Vs. 
7,  21,  22.)  No  such  universal  and  tremend- 
ous national  convulsions  took  place  at,  or 
prior  to,  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem,  and 
therefore  cannot  relate  to  that  event,  and 
must  be  still  future. 

4.  The  general  overttirning  of  govern- 
ments (v.  29). 

5.  The  appearing  of  the  Son  of  Man  (v. 

30)- 

6.  The  gathering  together  of  the  elect  (v. 

In  connection  with  these  events  take  in 
the  following  attendant  circumstances: 

7.  The  secrecy  of  the  time  when  they  shall 
happen  (v.  36). 

8.  The  suddeiiness^  and  therefore^  unex- 
pectedness of  their  happening  (vs.  37-41). 

9.  The  ijnportance  of  these  events  to  the 
Churchy  and  the  call  to  watchfulness  (vs.  24, 
etc.). 

10.  The  parables  that  follow  (chap.  25), 
and  that  are  a  portion  of  the  prophecy,  and 
that  can  have  no  adaptation  to  events  that 
transpired  at  the  time  of  the  fall  of  Jeru- 
salem. 

None  of  these  events,  with  their  conditions, 
did  meet  with  their  fulfillment,  as  it  appears 


42  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA. 

to  US,  at  the  time  that  Jerusalem  was  de- 
stroyed. We  are  compelled,  therefore,  in  all 
humility,  to  dissent  from  the  prevailing  in- 
terpretation. Israel's  history  stops  with  the 
announcement  of  the  destruction  of  the  city 
and  the  scattering  of  its  people.  But  the 
prophecy  embraces  other  histories,  and  in  its 
scope  reaches  on  to  "the  end." 

The  destruction  by  Titus  is  very  distinctly 
given  us  in  the  prophecy,  as  recorded  by 
Ivuke,  21 :  20  to  24.  These  statements,  let  it 
be  observed,  are  peculiar  to  Luke.  He  gives 
us  what  the  others  give,  and  this  much  in  addi- 
tion, and  we  regard  this  portion  of  the 
prophecy  as  applying  exclusively  to  Israel. 
It  will  be  noted  that  (a)  the  period  during 
which  this  prophecy  (in  Luke)  runs,  embraces 
the  days  of  judicial  vengeance,  when  all  the 
prophetic  threatenings  against  Jerusalem  will 
have  their  fulfilment  (vs.  22,  23):  {^)  The 
armies  are  to  surround  her  walls,  and  the  de- 
struction is  to  be  meted  out  to  her  (v.  20): 
(c)  The  Gentile  is  the  Divinely  appointed  ex- 
ecutioner of  these  chastisements  (v.  24). 
Read  in  this  connection  the  last  half  of 
Daniel's  26th  verse  (9:),  and  you  may  well 
believe  that  it  is  present  to  the  Lord's  mind 
as  he  utters  his  prediction.  They  are  mar- 
velously  alike  in  their  drift. 

Now  compare  the  language  of  these  verses 


MATTHEW  24.  43 


(Luke  2 1  :)\vith  verses  8  to  13,  and  25,  26,  and 
the  corresponding  verses  in  Matthew  and  Mark, 
and  the  difference  is  apparent.  Here  (a)  the 
commotion  is  world  wide.  It  is  nation  against 
nation,  etc.  (vs.  9,  10).  (d)  There  are  to  be 
manifestations  of  false  Christs  (v.  8).  (c) 
There  are  to  be  bitter  persecutions  against  the 
Church  (vs.  12,  etc.).  (d)  Amid  these  po- 
litical overturnings,  there  are  to  be  natural 
phenomena  (vs.  25,  26)  that  will  appal  men, 
and  cause  their  hearts  to  fail  them  for  fear  of 
those  things  that  are  coming  on  the  earth. 
There  is  an  universality  given  to  these  wars, 
persecutions  and  catastrophies,  that  cannot 
find  their  fulfillment  in  the  destruction  of 
Jerusalem  by  Titus.  And  there  is  one  other 
note  of  difference  that  must  not  be  over- 
looked. The  end — the  bringing  to  a  close 
of  these  two  prophetic  periods  is  so  entirely 
different,  that  this  alone  is  sufficient  to  point 
out  the  correctness  of  our  contention.  The 
prophecy  (Luke  21:)  of  verses  20  to  25  (relat- 
ing as  we  think  exclusively  to  Jerusalem), 
ends  with  "the  times  of  the  Gentiles"  being 
"fulfilled."  On  the  other  hand,  the  wars, 
persecutions  and  convulsions,  of  verses  8  to 
20,  and  25,  26,  end  with  seeing  "the  Son  of 
Man  coming  in  a  cloud,  with  power  and  great 
glory  (v.  27). 

For  these  reasons  we  are  constrained  to  re- 


44  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA. 

Strict  the  history  of  Israel  in  this  prophecy 
to  the  portions  that  have  been  enumerated, 
viz. :  Luke  21 :20  to  25. 

2.  The  Church,  In  the  N.  T. ,  the  Church 
in  its  comprehensiveness  is  presented  to  us 
under  a  two-fold  aspect,  the  outward  and 
visible,  and  the  mystical  and  invisible.  It 
is  the  distinction  between  the  professing 
Christian,  who  is  one  outwardly  by  registra- 
tion only  ;  and  the  professing  Christian,  who 
is  one  inwardly  by  regeneration.  It  is  the 
mingling  of  the  elements  of  the  true  and  of 
the  false.  By  the  first  (registration),  we 
have  the  visible  Church,  seen  and  known  of 
all  men.  By  the  second  (regeneration), 
there  is  a  number  that  is  known  with  cer- 
tainty only  to  God,  and  therefore  compar- 
atively, unknown  and  invisible  to  men. 
Separate  them,  and  we  have  the  true  Church, 
and  the  false  Church.  United  and  mingling 
together  we  have  the  Church  in  its  compre- 
hensiveness and  visibility.  Nor  is  this  dis- 
tinction peculiar  to  the  Church  of  the  New 
Testament.  The  O.  T.  dispensation  was  a 
theocracy.  All  Israel  composed  the  congre- 
gation (the  visible  Church)  of  Jehovah  God. 
But  as  a  loyal  nation  and  a  true  Church,  its 
history  has  been  comparatively  brief.  Long 
and  shameful  have  been  its  lapses  into  idol- 
atry.   And  yet  Israel's  God  never  left  himself 


MATTHEW  24.  46 


without  witnesses.  There  was  always  a 
remnant — faithful  ones  who  lifted  their 
voices  in  protest  against  Israel's  shame. 
Sometimes  indeed  they  were  reduced  so  low 
that  their  testimony  was  silenced  and  they 
were  wholly  lost  sight  of.  So  complete  at  one 
time  was  this  hiding,  that  God  had  to 
encourage  his  desponding  servant  by  assur- 
ing him  :  '  *  I  have  left  me  seven  thousand  in 
Israel,  all  the  knees  which  have  not  bowed 
unto  Baal,  and  every  mouth  which  hath  not 
kissed  him*."  They  were  his  faithful  ones, 
his  true  Church,  invisible  to  the  world,  but 
seen  and  known  of  him. 

In  the  gospels  this  distinction  comes  out  in 
the  parable  of  the  taresf.  Also  when  the  Lord 
compares  himself  to  a  vine|  with  branches, 
some  fruitful  and  others  not.  There  are  dis- 
ciples whom  he  addresses  with  tender  assur- 
ances. "  Fear  not,  little  flock,  for  it  is  your 
Father's  good  pleasure  to  give  you  the  king- 
dom. "§  And  there  are  many  who  in  the  day 
of  his  power  will  claim  him  as  Lord,  and  to 
whom  he  will  declare — "I  never  knew  you"  ||. 
The  distinction  is  constantly  forcing  itself 
upon  us  throughout  the  epistles.  In  this 
historic  prophecy  of  the  Lord,  it  is  very 
marked,  as  also  in  the  Apocalypse. 


n  Kings  19:18.     tMatt.   13:24,  etc.     IJohn  15:1,  etc. 
^Luke  12:32.     ||Matt.  7:21,  etc. 


46  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA. 

In  this  prophecy  the  church  runs  through 
the  same  course  of  time  as  Israel's  history; 
viz. :  From  the  time  then  present  to  the  ap- 
pearing of  anti-Christ,  and  the  coming  of  the 
Lord.  And  it  is  a  history  of  struggle,  and  per- 
secution, and  failure,  and  patient  suffering, 
and  faithful  witnessing,  and  martyrdom,  and 
false  prophets,  and  of  many  decieved,  offended, 
betrayed,  and  hatred  one  of  another,  and  of  a 
great  falling  away,  and  of  evil  servants  lord- 
ing it  over  their  fellows,  and  saying  in  their 
hearts,  "My  Lord  delayeth  his  coming," 
and  of  general  unbelief  in  that  event,  and 
unpreparedness  for  it.  Such  is  the  histor}^ 
of  the  church  down  to  the  end  of  this  age — 
this  gospel  dispensation,  as  the  Lord  pic- 
tured it  to  his  disciples. 

Matt.  24:4  to  15,  and  25:1  to  31,  and  10: 
16  to  42,  and  13: 

Mark  13:4  to  14. 

Luke  21:8  to  21. 

3.  The  history  of  Gentile  dominion.  The 
nondescript  beast  of  Daniel  (7:7)  had  met  its 
fulfillment  in  the  Roman  empire.  In  our 
Lord's  day  it  was  dominating  the  earth.  In 
this  prophecy  he  announces  that  it  would 
continue  to  do  so  to  "the  end."  Aggran- 
dizement and  oppression  would  still  be  its 
ruling  passion.  It  would  keep  the  nations 
and  kingdoms  stirred  up  against  each  other. 


MATTHEW  24. 


it  would  persecute  the  true  Church  of  God, 
and  it  would  tread  Jerusalem  under  its  feet, 
all  through  its  allotted  time=  The  anti- 
Christ*  is  to  be  its  last  development.  This 
will  be  DaniePsf  "  prince  that  shall  come" — 
the  "7/^"  of  verse  27,  and  the  one  who 
shall  cause  "  the  abomination  of  desolation" 
to  stand  in  the  holy  place.  His  career 
begins  and  closes  with  Daniel's  last  week. 

Matt.  24:15  to  29. 

Mark  13:14  to  24. 

Luke    21:8  to  13,  25,  26. 

4.  The  history  of  the  Lord.  This,  too, 
synchronizes  with  the  other  histories.  He  is 
revealed  to  us  in  his  care  over  his  true  Church; 
in  his  coming  again;  in  his  gathering  together 
of  his  elect;  in  his  judgment  on  the  Church: 
and  in  his  destruction  of  his  enemies. 

Matt.  24:29  to  32.      25:1-31. 

Mark  13:24  to  28. 

Luke  21:15,  27,  28. 

Such,  we  think,  are  the  histories  outlined 
in  the  Lord's  prophecy,  and  filling  up  the 
hiatus  occasioned  by  the  break  in  Daniel's 
prophecy  of  the  70  weeks. 

We  are  now  ready  to  give  our  attention  to 
"the  revelation  of  Jesus  Christ,  which  God 
gave  unto   him    to  show  unto  his  servants 


*Matt.  24:24,  15.     fDan.  9:26,  27. 


48  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA. 


things  that  must  shortly  come  to  pass." 
These  * 'things  that  must  shortly  come  to 
pass" — are  they  the  histories  that  the  Lord 
has  already  outlined  to  disciples — "his  serv- 
ants," on  the  mount?  Is  it  the  history  of 
Israel,  and  of  his  Church,  and  of  Gentile  do- 
minion, and  of  his  own  self,  during  the  in- 
terval between  Daniel's  69th  and  70th  week, 
and  on  through  and  to  the  end  of  that  last 
week?  Such  are  our  convictions.  How  far 
there  is  ground  for  them  can  only  be  deter- 
mined by  an  examination  of  the  Book. 

The  Apocalyptic  Drama. 

We  have  ventured  to  speak  of  this  Divine 
Revelation  as  a  drama.  The  whole  cast  ot 
the  prophecy  is  suggestive  of  this  structure. 
It  is  broken  up  into  distinct  visions  with  a 
succession  of  scenes.  A  great  number  of  per- 
sons are  introduced,  acting  their  part  and 
disappearing.  There  are  explanatory  agen- 
cies and  choruses.  Nature  in  all  her  varying 
moods  is  brought  in  to  heighten  the  eflfect  and 
to  add  grandeur,  or  charm,  or  terror,  as  the 
circumstances  may  call  for.  There  are  the 
boastings  of  the  self-exalted  and  defiant,  the 
cruel  excesses  of  the  ungodly,  the  patient 
suffering  of  the  righteous,  and  their  seeming 
overthrow.  There  are  battle  scenes,  and  the 
shout  of  the  victorious,   and  the  cry  of  the 


REVELATION.  49 


vanquished.  There  are  thrones  and  judg- 
ments. There  is  a  triumphal  procession,  and 
a  marriage,  and  a  marriage  feast,  and  great 
rejoicings.  The  whole  book  is  a  succession 
of  scenic  representations. 

Should  it  be  suggested  that,  if  it  was  the 
Divine  purpose  that  the  book  should  assume 
this  form,  it  would  have  been  so  ordered  and 
arranged;  let  it  be  remembered  that  at  the 
date  of  the  Revelation,  the  drama  had  not  as- 
sumed the  form  it  now  presents.  Literary 
art  in  this  direction  has  greatly  advanced, 
and  that,  too,  only  in  very  recent  times. 
Modern  writers  can  overcome  the  difficulties 
of  arrangement  with  greater  ease  and  grace 
than  their  predecessors.  The  drama  is  now 
by  means  of  these  improvements  another 
thing  from  what  it  was  in  the  days  of  the 
Greeks  and  Romans.  The  breaking  up  of 
parts  into  acts  and  scenes,  and  the  introduc- 
tion of  costumes  and  scenery,  have  not  only 
enhanced  the  attractiveness  of  the  perform- 
ance, but  they  have  given  to  the  play  itself 
coherence,  simplicity,  and  so  to  speak,  self- 
explanation.  The  Author  of  the  scriptures 
has  never  anticipated  literary  or  scientific 
progress.  He  adapts  his  communications  to 
the  times  when,  and  persons  to  whom,  he 
speaks.  And  so  wonderfully  comprehensive 
have  been  all  these  communications,  that  they 


50  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA. 

have  been  found  adaptive  also  for  all  time  and 
all  conditions  of  men. 

This  book  of  the  Revelation  illustrates  this 
fact.  Its  structure  from  beginning  to  end  is 
dramatic.  The  divisions  which  the  progress 
in  dramatic  art  calls  for  are  not  perceptible 
on  its  face;  but  they  are  none  the  less  there. 
The  book  is  so  constructed  that  it  requires 
but  little  attention  to  tell  you  where  these 
divisions  ought  to  be.  They  fall  into  place 
naturally,  and  bring  out  the  dramatic  feature 
of  the  book  with  great  clearness. 

This  is  the  object  of  our  present  study. 
We  would  treat  the  book  as  a  prophetic- 
historical  drama,  and  would  break  up  its  sub- 
jects (histories)  into  three  natural  divisions 
(acts),  and  these  again  into  such  sub-divisions 
(scenes)  as  the  many-sided  incidents  of  the 
stor>^  seem  to  necessitate.  Comparatively 
little  attention  is  given  to  exegesis.  It  is 
this  structural  character  of  the  book,  and  its 
probable  historical  bearings,  that  will  mainly 
occupy  our  thoughts.  Here  and  there  ex- 
planations and  proposed  interpretations  may 
be  necessitated.  But  in  this  there  is  little  or 
no  claim  to  originality.  It  will  be  hard  to 
find  new  thoughts  on  a  subject  that  has  been 
so  much  studied  and  written  upon.  Doubt- 
less all  explanations  that  may  be  offered  have 
been    suggested    before    somewhere.       It    is 


RF.VELATION.  51 


mainly  in  the  general  divisions  of  the  book, 
and  in  some  of  its  historical  connections,  and 
in  the  times  and  dates  of  some  of  its  events, 
that  there  is  a  departure,  so  far  at  least  as  our 
information  goes,  from  theories  and  explana- 
tions heretofore  put  forward. 

In  studying  the  Apocalypse  we  have  been 
led  to  believe  that  it  synchronizes  with  the 
hiatus  we  have  suggested  as  existing  in 
Daniel's  prophecy  of  the  70  weeks.  Between 
his  69th  week  and  70th,  or  last  week,  there 
is  a  break  in  the  onward  progress  of  the 
prophecy  toward  its  completion.  It  is  a 
period  undefined  as  to  duration,  and,  by  the 
prophecy  itself  is  passed  over  in  almost  com- 
plete silence.  And  yet  we  know  from  other 
sources  that  it  is  a  period  replete  with  mo- 
mentous events  to  the  world  and  to  the  people 
of  God.  It  is  with  these  times  and  histories 
that  we  think  the  Apocalypse  deals. 

It  further  synchronizes  and  harmonizes 
with  the  Lord's  utterances  recorded  in  Mat- 
thew, chapters  10:16-42,  and  13:  and  24:  and 
25:  It  moves  along  on  these  same  lines  of  his- 
tory, treating  them  with  greater  fullness,  and 
giving  more  of  detail.  Consequently  we  will 
expect,  if  our  conjecture  is  right,  to  find  in 
in  this  book  {a)  a  history  of  the  Christian 
Church  in  its  two- fold  aspect,  viz:  as  the 
Church  visible    and    corrupted,    and  as    the 


52  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA. 

Church  invisible  and  faithful,  {b)  We  will 
further  expect  to  find  a  history  of  Gentile 
dominion  and  its  consummation  in  the  Anti- 
christ; and  (c)  there  will  also  be  a  history 
of  the  Lord  Christ.  Of  Israel,  as  has 
been  said  already*,  we  are  not  to  expect  a 
history.  Nor  do  we  think  there  is  an  alhision 
to  them  until  toward  the  close  of  the  dis- 
pensation, when  the  events  of  Daniel's  last 
week  begin  to  run  their  course.  The  same 
principle  holds  here  that  was  mentioned  in 
connection  with  Daniel's  prophecy.  During 
the  greater  part  of  this  period,  as  a  nation, 
Israel  is  not.  The  Lord  dismissed  them  from 
the  historic  page  when  he  pronounced  on  them 
the  judgments  in  Matt.  23:38,  39,  and  Luke 
21:24.  And  it  is  not  until  after  these  judg- 
ments have  been  executed,  and  the  times  of 
Gentile  dominion  have  been  fulfilled — it  is 
not  until  then  that  Israel  shall  once  more  get 
possession  of  their  city  and  country,  and  as  a 
restored  people,  Daniel's  last  week  shall  begin 
to  run  its  course.  It  is  at  this  junction  pos- 
sibly that  their  existence  and  their  con- 
nection with  Anti-christ  is  recognizedf. 
The  allusions  here  to  the  blasphemies 
of  the  Beast  in  connection  with  the  "taber- 
nacle" may  shadow  forth  the  event  alluded 
to  by  the  Lord  in  Matt.  24:1,  15. 


*See  page  37.     fRev.  13:6. 


REVELATION,  1.  53 

Revelation  i. 
Introdziction  mid  Explanation. 

The  character  and  scope  of  the  book  is  dis- 
tinctly announced  to  us.  It  is  a  Revelation. 
It  was  given  by  God  to  Jesus  Christ,  and  by 
him  it  has  been  made  known  to  his  Church. 
By  a  message  in  the  first  instance,  and  then 
in  a  succession  of  symbolic  acts  or  pictures, 
he  presents  us  with  a  history  of  the  Church 
and  the  world,  down  to  the  time  of  ''the 
end, ' '  i.  e. ,  down  to  the  time  of  his  coming 
again.  All  this  we  find  in  the  first  chapter. 
Its  opening  verses  tell  us  the  character  of  the 
book,  and  in  v.  19  we  have  its  scope.  The 
Lord  himself  seems  here  to  give  us  the  key 
for  its  right  division  and  understanding. 
John  is  told  to  write, 

{a)  ''''The  things  which  thoit  hast  seen.^^ 
"Seen,"  or  ''which  thou  sawest"  (R.  V.). 
The  word  is  here  used  in  a  comprehensive 
sense,  and  may  find  its  explanation  in  such 
statements  as  John,  19:35,  21:24.  i  John, 
1:1,  etc. 

(B)  ^^The  things  which  are.'' ^  The  things 
contained  in  this  first  chapter  and  which  had 
just  been  manifested  to  him;  Jesus  revealing 
himself  in  his  restored  glory ;  Jesus  in  his  re- 
lations to  his  Church — overseeing,  inspect- 
ing, taking  account,    approving,    disapprov- 


54  THE  APOLYPTIC  DRAMA. 

ing,  warning,  counseling,  threatening,  reward- 
ing, punishing;  and  the  Church  itself  in  its 
then  present  condition,  a  condition  unfolded 
possibly  in  the  message  of  the  next  chapter 
to  the  Ephesian  Church. 

(c)  Ajid  the  things  zvhich  shall  co^ne  to  pass 
(R.  V.)  hei^eafter.^^  These  are  the  things 
that  are  unfolded  in  the  visions  that  follow, 
beginning  with  the  second  chapter,  and  on  to 
the  end. 

We  must  regard  this  first  chapter  then  as 
introductory  and  explanatory.  It  tells  us 
who  is  the  author  of  the  book,  and  what  is 
its  object.  Regarding  the  book  as  a  dramatic 
prophecy  we  shall  break  up  all  that  follows 
into  Acts^  and  these  acts  again  into  Scenes. 
The  acts  will  synchronize,  i.  e. ,  although  re- 
lating to  different  persons  and  events,  they 
will  run  along  on  parallel  lines  of  time,  hav- 
ing a  common  starting  point  and  a  common 
terminus.  This  method  is  not  unusual.  It 
is  unavoidable  in  historic  narrative,  whether 
sacred  or  profane.  See  e.g.  that  of  the  kings  of 
Judah  and  Israel  after  the  separation.  If  we 
are  correct  in  the  interpretation  of  Matt.  24 :,  we 
have  in  the  one  prophecy,  each  of  the  four 
histories,  of  the  Church,  of  Israel,  of  the 
world,  and  of  the  I^ord,  traversing  the  same 
period  of  time.  And  so,  through  the  Apoca- 
lypse,  we  regard   the   seals,    trumpets,  etc., 


REVELATION,  2.  65 

as  different  acts,  relating  to  different  persons 
and  events,  but  synchronizing  in  time. 


Revelation  2:  3: 

Act  I. 

Stibject. — The  Church  visible. 

Ti7ne. — From  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem 
to  nearly  the  close  of  Daniel's  last  week. 

There  can  be  no  questioning  the  object  of 
these  chapters.  They  contain  a  message  to 
the  seven  churches  from  him  who  walked 
amid  the  seven  candlesticks,  and  who  gave 
the  command  "Write,"  (V.  i). 

'''' Seveny  The  number  seven  plays  a 
conspicuous  part  in  the  symbols  of  this 
prophecy.  It  is  itself  a  symbol.  We  find  it 
all  through  the  scriptures.  The  subject  of 
numbers  has  been  very  carefully  studied, 
and  some  profess  to  have  fathomed  their 
meaning.  The  symbolic  import  of  a  few 
seems  to  be  clear.  Seven  is  considered  the 
number  of  perfection — completeness.  It  de- 
notes finished  work.  God  rested  on  that 
day.  His  creative  work  was  finished,  and 
ever  since,  the  seventh  day  by  his  ordering, 
is  a  period  of  rest — the  sign  of  finished  work. 
It  bears  this  significance  in  the  Mosaic 
economy — the  week,  the  Sabbatic  year,  the 
year  of  jubilee.  Similar  is  its  import  through- 
out this  book.  The  messages  to  the  Churches 
are  brought  to  completeness  in  the  seventh. 


56  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.  Act  I. 

With  the  Seals  and  Trumpets,  the  6th  Seal, 
the  6th  Trumpet,  etc.,  bring  the  events  they 
bear  upon  to  that  stage  of  completeness,  that 
but  one  more  act  is  required  for  the  finishing. 
The  six  days  brought  the  creation  work  to 
that  point  when  only  one  condition  was 
needed  for  the  completion  of  the  Divine  pur- 
pose, and  the  perfection  of  his  work — rest, 
enjoyment  of  what  had  been  accomplished, 
and  that  was  the  ordering  of  the  seventh  day. 
So  with  the  successions  of  Seals  and  Trumpets. 
They  are  brought  down  to  the  sixth,  leaving 
but  one  more  scene  to  complete  the  act,  and 
consummate  the  divine  purpose.  But  that 
7  th  and  last  act,  in  each  of  these  instances, 
is  arrested.  There  are  other  synchronizing 
histories  that  must  all  be  brought  down 
to  the  one  point  of  time,  and  then  the  catas- 
trophy  common  to  all.  The  7th  seal  there- 
fore, instead  of  executing  wrath  and  making 
an  end,  develops  into  the  seven  trumpets  ; 
and  the  7th  trumpet,  for  the  same  reason, 
introduces  the  seven  vials  ;  and  these  seven 
vials  in  their  entirety,  represent  complete- 
ness, especially  the  7th,  when  we  have  the 
outpouring  of  the  wine  of  the  wrath  of 
Almighty  God,  even  to  the  last  drop — com- 
pleteness. 

When  these  messages  were  sent  there  were 
many  other    churches    beside  the  one  men- 


REVELATION,  2:  3:  57 

tioned.  Seven  therefore  must  be  used  in 
this  connection  in  its  mystical  sense  of 
completeness — as  standing  for  all  the 
Churches. 

It  is  possible  also  that  these  messages  may 
give  us  exact  representations  of  the  spiritual 
condition  of  these  several  Churches  addressed. 
But  we  must  not  confine  ourselves  to  this 
limitation.  The  whole  character  of  the 
messages,  and  the  scope  of  the  book,  forbid 
it.  Clearly  these  are  among  ' '  the  things 
that  shall  be  hereafter. ' '  We  must  therefore 
regard  these  messages  as  containing  a  pro- 
phetic history  of  the  Church  from  the  time 
then  present  to  ' '  the  end. ' '  They  are 
broken  up  into  seven  distinct  epochs.  And 
what  a  history  it  is!  Counsels,  encourage- 
ments, promises,  warnings,  threatenings,  on 
the  one  hand  ;  on  the  other,  some  instances 
of  labor,  and  suffering,  and  patience,  and 
faithfulness  unto  death ;  but  a  larger  and  more 
conspicuous  history  of  love  declining,  of  per- 
vertion  of  doctrine,  of  unfaithfulness,  and 
finally,  of  falling  away,  and  apostasy.  It  is 
the  same  history  that  we  have  in  Matt.  13:. 
In  those  parables  but  one-fourth  of  the  seed 
sown  springs,  and  with  very  varying  results. 
And  with  this  growing  seed  it  is  soon  dis^ 
covered  that  tares  are  mingled.  And  as  the 
Church   advances  to  conspicuousness  and  in- 


58  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.  Act  I. 

fluence,  the  fowls  of  the  air  (the  world)* 
seek  it  and  take  possession  of  it,  and 
now  the  woman  herself  (the  Church)  having 
tasted  of  the  sweets  of  worldly  power,  begins 
to  corrupt  herself,  and  to  apostatize  from  her 
Lord.  And,  last  scene  of  all,  the  harvest  at  the 
end  of  the  age,  the  reapers  sent  forth,  and 
the  gathering  of  the  tares  for  the  burning. 
Such  is  the  history  of  the  visible  Church  as 
given  us  in  the  gospel  by  its  Divine  Head; 
and  it  is  the  same  history  that  is  here  pre- 
sented to  us  in  the  Apocalypse  by  the  same 
Divine  Person.  The  one  is  in  parable,  the 
other  in  the  form  of  a  message. 

So  again,  in  Matt.  24  (and  corresponding 
chapters  in  Mark  and  Luke),  we  have  first 
the  struggles  and  sufferings  of  the  faithful 
elements  in  the  Church  down  to  ' '  the  time 
of  the  end  "  (vs.  4-16).  In  verse  42  to  the 
end  ot  the  chapter,  there  are  intimations  ot 
unfaithful  servants  who  have  not  watched  (v. 
43),  and  of  evil  servants  who  believe  not  in 
their  Lord's  coming,  etc.,  (vs.  48,  49);  and 
along  with  these  statements  are  exhortations 
to  watchfulness  that  we  may  escape  those 
things  that  are  coming  upon  the  earth.  And 
just  so  is  it  in  this  prophetic  history.  We  have 
the   same   story   of  loving  counsels,  of  warn- 


^v.  19. 


REVELATION,  2:3.  59 

ings  and  threatenings,  of  falling  away  and 
apostacy,  until  the  Lord  says:  "I  will  spue 
thee  out  of  my  mouth"  (3:16.) — I  will  utterly 
reject  you.  And  let  it  be  observed  that  the 
messages ^stop  when  the  Church  reaches  that 
spiritual  condition  that  calls  for  this  threat. 
The  threat  is  not  executed.  The  message  in 
the  prophetic  drama  brings  the  Divine  intent 
as  far  as  it  can  for  present  purposes,  and 
therefore  to  completeness.  What  remains 
now  is  execution,  and  this  calls  not  for  words, 
but  for  actions.  At  the  appointed  time  that 
will  come.*  But  we  now  call  attention  to 
the  point  at  which  this  7th  message  stops, 
and  we  beg  to  emphasize  it.  It  stops  with 
the  threat  of  utter  rejection.  The  reapers 
are  not  }'et  sent  forth  to  gather — out,  and  to 
execute  sentence  upon  an  apostate  Church. 
The  evil  is  only  determined  and  announced. 
A  little  space  must  yet  elapse,  and  then  the 
Lord  will  ' '  spue  ' '  from  him  the  harlot 
Churchf,  and  this  brings  the  history  of  the 
Church — the  Church  visible — to  perhaps  the 
middle  of  Daniel's  last  week.  Before  the 
close  of  this  week  the  sentence  will  be  fully 
executed. 

Of  these  chapters  we  make  one  Act.      If  it 
is  desired   to   localize  the  time  and  events  in 


*Rev.  17:16,  17.     tl7:16,  17. 


60  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.  4ct  I. 

the  Church's  history  that  fulfill  the  conditions 
of  these  several  messages,  then  the  Act  must 
necessarily  be  divided  into  seven  Scenes.  But 
this  is  not  our  purpose.  Neither  here  nor 
elsewhere  in  this  prophetic  history  is  it  our 
intention  to  particularize,  excepting  as  it 
shall  be  found  needful  for  the  understanding 
and  advocacy  of  the  explanation  we  are 
endeavoring  to  establish.  Much  has  been 
ably  written  concerning  these  messages  to 
the  seven  Churches  of  Asia.  In  these  writ- 
ings all  who  desire  to  enter  more  into  details 
will  find  ample  satisfaction.  Our  purpose  is 
accomplished  when  we  call  attention  to  these 
messages  as  a  prophetic  history  of  the  Church 
visible,  from  the  time  then  present,  to  the 
close  almost  of  the  age.  The  prophecy  stops 
short  with  the  threatened  judgment  upon  the 
apostate  Church;  its  execution  is  yet  future. 


Revelation  4: 

Act  II.     4:  to  8: 

Prologue^  4:1-8. 

The  curtain  rises.  What  a  scene  is  before 
us!  Grand  beyond  description.  Earth 
never  witnessed,  no,  never  dreamed  of  its 
like.  Its  pageants  fade  into  nothingness  be- 
fore it.  The  first  Act  was  a  message — a 
word  communication.     Now  we  are  to  have  a 


Prologue.  REVELATION,  4:1-8.  61 

succession  of  pictures,  with  living  person- 
ages, and  stirring  incidents. 

' '  Behold!  ' '  says  the  Seer.  But  first  of  all 
he  tells  us — "  I  was  in  the  Spirit."  This  is 
important.  His  being  in  the  Spirit,  and  his 
beholding,  are  coincident.  We  also  must  be 
under  the  same  influences,  and  in  heart  must 
be  occupants  of  the  same  place — "  Come  up 
hither,"  if  we  would  behold  and  understand. 
''  Come  up  hither"  is  the  trumpet  call  to  all 
who  would  read  and  hear  the  words  of  this 
prophecy,  and  who  would  keep  those  things 
which  are  written  therein. 

"/  looked^  and  beholdP^  etc.  We  must 
then  see  these  things  through  the  eyes  of  the 
Seer.  He  must  describe  them  to  us.  *  We 
may  therefore  regard  chapter  4:  vs.  i  to  8, 
as  the  prologue  to  the  dramatic  history  that 
follows.  It  gives  us  location.  It  introduces 
us  to  a  goodly  company — the  ' '  Dramatis 
Personse, "  especially  as  seen  in  the  heavenly 
places.  E.  g.^  "  The  throne  ' '  in  the  midst 
of  heaven,  and  Him  who  sits  upon  it  in  the 
resplendant  glory  that  no  man  can  approach 
unto;  the  Lamb,  the  Elders, the  Living  Crea- 
tures, the  many  angels,  and  along  with  these 
celestial  actors  we  have  the  scenery  and 
other  accessories  that  contribute  to  the  better 


*Ezek.  40:4. 


62  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.         Act  II. 


understanding  of  what  is  to  come,  and  that 
greatly  enhances  the  grandeur  of  the  concep- 
tion. There  are  the  ' '  four  and  twenty 
seats"  (thrones)  "round  about  THE  THRONE." 
There  is  the  rainbow,  and  the  sea  of  glass, 
and  the  seven  lamps  burning,  and  the  thun- 
derings  and  lightnings,  and  the  crowns  of  gold, 
and  the  adorations,  and  prostrations,  and 
choruses  of  praise,  and  the  trumpet- voice 
with  its  frequent  explanations.  This  is  a 
grand  pageant.  The  eye  can  never  vveary  in 
looking,  or  the  ear  in  listening.  But  we 
must  hasten  on.  This  is  only  the  beginning 
— the  prelude,  the  solemn  and  fitting  prepa- 
ration for  the  awful  scenes  to  follow,  and  for 
the  magnificent  triumph  that  is  to  bring 
glory  to  God,  and  joy  to  the  universe. 

V.  I.  ^^  After  tJiisy  (^era  roura  after  these 
things)  i.  e.^  after  receiving  these  messages 
for  the  Churches.  This  formula  is  much 
used  throughout  the  book.  We  have  already 
met  with  it  in  chapter  1:19.  We  will  find 
it  also  in  7:1,  9;  15:5,  and  elsewhere.  In 
this  verse  it  occurs  twice.  In  the  first  in- 
stance it  clearly  denotes  the  order  of  time — 
after  the  reception  of  these  messages  for  the 
Churches.  At  the  close  of  the  verse  we  read 
— "I  will  show  the  things  which  must  be 
hereafter.^ ^  The  Greek  is  the  same.  Things 
which  must  come  to  pass  after  these  things. 


Prologue.  REVELATION,  4:3  8. 


Does  the  formula  (mt.)  in  this  last  instance 
denote  succession  of  time  also?  Not  necessarily. 
Lexicographers  say  that  M^a^  with  an  accusa- 
tive, may  refer  to  '^succession  either  of  place  or 
time."  What  is  the  reference  here?  Does 
it  in  this  latter  instance  refer  to  an  order  of 
time  or  of  place?  The  context  must  guide 
us  to  a  decision.  It  does  in  the  first  instance; 
let  it  do  so  in  the  second. 

The  first  ' '  after  this ' '  is  closely  linked 
with  the  messages  to  the  Churches.  It  re- 
lates to  what  follows  in  the  order  of  time 
after  these  messages  have  been  received.  In 
connection  with  the  second,  let  us  call  to 
mind  that  we  have  been  presented  with  the 
history  of  the  visible  Church.  If  we  are 
right,  it  has  been  brought  down  to  a  point 
when  in  her  self-glorification  she  is  rich,  etc. 
But  he  who  is  in  the  midst  of  the  seven  can- 
dlesticks says  :  ' '  Thou  .  .  .  knowest 
not  that  thou  art  wretched, ' '  etc.  ' '  I  will 
spue  thee  out  of  my  mouth. ' '  This  is  surely 
a  condition  of  apostacy  and  pending  judg- 
ment. Nothing  remains  but  execution — 
"  the  end."  If  it  is  true  that  these  messages 
bring  the  history  of  the  visible  Church  down 
to  the  close  of  this  dispensation,  then  there 
will  be  no  time  left  "  after  this"  for  a  suc- 
cession of  such  scenes  as  the  one  presented  in 
the  visions  that  follow.   We  are  therefore  com- 


64  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.         Act  II. 


pelled  by  the  conditions  of  the  context  to  re- 
gard the  last  ' '  after  these  things, ' '  as  refer- 
ring to  the  order  of  place — to  the  order  in 
which  the  visions  to  come  will  follow  each 
other.  All  the  visions  cannot  be  presented 
at  one  and  the  same  moment,  ahy  more  than 
all  the  incidents  of  a  narrative  can  be  given 
at  once.  There  must  be  an  order  of  place 
for  each,  although  all  may  belong  to  the 
same  order  in  time.  So  with  these  visions. 
From  the  very  necessity  of  the  case  they  can- 
not be  present  at  one  view.  The  observer 
could  not  take  them  in.  There  would  be 
utter  confusion.  There  must  therefore  be 
succession.  One  vision  must  follow  the 
other  in  an  order  of  place,  though  all  may 
be  traversing  the  same  period  of  time. 

Of  necessity  therefore  there  can  be  given 
the  Seer  but  one  picture  at  a  time,  and  in 
receiving  them  in  their  order,  the  most 
natural  language  in  which  to  announce  the 
ending  of  one  and  the  beginning  of  another, 
would  be  that  which  is  here  used — "after 
this,"  or  "after  these  things." 

Guided  then  by  the  requirements  of  the 
context,  we  regard  this  last  "after  these 
things,"  as  having  reference  to  an  order  of 
place.  In  the  order  of  time  the  visions  that 
are  to  be  presented  to  the  Seer  synchronize. 
Relating  to  different  historical  events,  they 


PrGlogiie.  REVELATION,  4:1  8.  65 

yet  have  the  same  starting  point  and  a  com- 
mon ending.  But  that  the  seer  may  behold 
correctly  and  understand,  to  each  vision 
there  is  given  an  order  of  place,  and  the 
coming  and  going  is  in  an  orderly  succes- 
sion. 

*'  Come  up  hither.  ^^  Up  to  the  present, 
John  seems  to  have  been  on  the  earth;  he  is 
now  called  up  into  the  heavens.  Through- 
out he  is  placed  in  positions  that  give  him 
the  fullest  view  of  what  is  taking  place.  At 
first  he  is  on  earth ;  then  he  is  called  up  into 
the  heavens;  and  at  other  times  he  seems  to 
be  in  mid-heaven  occupying  a  position  from 
which  he  can  command  all  that  is  taking 
place  at  the  same  moment,  or  at  least  in 
rapid  succession,  in  both  localities. 

V.  3.  In  considering  the  significance  of 
the  Divine  appearance,  let  it  be  remembered 
that  the  two  stones  "jasper"  and  "sardine" 
are  the  first  and  last  in  the  breast-plate  of 
the  Jewish  High  Priest.  * 

' '  Rainbozv. ' '  Indicative  perhaps  that  amid 
coming  judgments,  the  covenant  with  earthf 
is  not  forgotten.  J 

V.  5.  "  The  lighhiings^  etc.^^  take  you 
back  to  Sinai.  They  possibly  indicate  that 
it  is  a  throne  of  judgment  and  fiery  indigna- 


^Ex.  28:17,  20.     fGen.  9:9,  18.     |Ezek.   1:28. 


66  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.         Act  11. 

tion;    while    the  rainbow    reminds  us  that 
covenants  of  mercy  are  not  forgotten. 

' '  Seven  lamps  of  fire  bicrjiing. ' '  They  are 
explained  to  us — "Which  are  the  seven 
Spirits  of  God. "  We  read  concerning  them 
again  in  the  5th  chapter,  v.  6. 

Fire  has  always  been  regarded  as  the  sym- 
bol of  the  Divine  Spirit,  -^  the  third  Person  of 
the  adorable  Trinity.  We  have  the  Father 
shadowed  forth  in  the  ineffable  presence  on 
THE  THRONE  (v.  2),  and  the  eternal  Son  in 
the  symbol  of  the  Lamb,  t  and  it  is  appropri- 
ate that  the  Spirit's  presence  should  be  signi- 
fied by  these  "seven  lamps  of  fire."  We 
must  rest  satisfied  for  the  present,  however, 
with  these  statements.  Mystery  is  stamped 
upon  much  that  we  meet  with  in  this  book. 
It  is  written  in  letters  of  light  on  this  symbol 
—  mystery,  deep  mystery.  For  a  better 
understanding  we  must  wait  until  the  Spirit 
himself  shall  reveal  more.  Consult,  Ex. 
37:23,  Chron.  4:20,  Zach.  4:2. 

V.  6.  "^  sea  of  glass,''  ^iQ.  Glass  and 
crystal  stand  for  purity,  transparency,  calm- 
ness, permanency.  These  are  attributes  of 
Divine  truth.  The  two  symbols,  the  lamps 
of  fire  and  the  sea,  may  stand  for  judgment 
and  truth.  J 


*Acts  2:1,  etc.     t5:6.     ]:Pb.  89:14. 


Prologue.  REVELATION,  4:1-8.  67 

The  Elders  and  the  Living  Ones.  In  verses 
4  and  6,  etc.,  we  are  introduced  to  the  24 
Elders  and  to  the  four  Living  Ones.  Who  are 
they  ?  These  last  have  been  identified  with 
the  "the  living  creatures"  of  Bzek.  i:  and 
10:;  and  also  with  the  seraphims  of  Isa,  6: 
and  the  cherubim  of  Gen.  3:24.  The  ren- 
dering ("four  beasts")  of  our  version  is 
most  unfortunate.  The  Greek  word  (^a,a) 
means  life.  It  differs  entirely  from  the  word 
{m9^ov^  rendered  beast  (wild  beast)  in  chapter 
13:.  Opinions  are  many  and  divergent  as  to 
who  or  what  may  be  intended  by  these  two 
representations.  The  most  acceptable  until 
lately,  has  been  the  one  that  regarded  them 
as  the  impersonations  of  redeemed  humanity, 
and  representations  of  the  executive  powers 
of  the  Church  in  the  heavenly  places.  There 
has  always  been  more  or  less  dissent  from 
this  view,  on  the  ground  that  there  were 
several  doxologies  relating  to  the  Church,  in 
which  the  Elders  and  the  Living  Ones,  either 
did  not  take  part,  or  in  doing  so,  did  not  in- 
clude themselves.  E.  g.^  chapters  7:9,  12, 
etc.;  15:3,  etc.,  11:15,  etc.  The  main  sup- 
port for  the  view  that  the  Redeemed  Church 
was  here  represented,  was  found  in  the  dox- 
ology  in  chapter  5:9,  etc.  "  Hast  redeemed 
us^ ' '  etc.  But  the  revisers  say  that  '■^  ns^^  is 
to  be  omitted.      They. read — "  and  didst  pur- 


68  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA         Act  II. 


chase  unto  God  with  thy  blood  men  of  every 
tribe,"  etc.  This  takes  away,  or  at  least 
throws  doubt  upon,  the  rendering  of  the  only 
passage  that  has  sustained  the  view  we  are 
considering. 

May  not  the  symbols  represent  the  Princi- 
palities, Authorities,  Powers,  and  Dominions, 
in  the  heavenlies?  They  are  enthroned. 
They  encircle  the  Throne.  Th^y  are  sub- 
ordinated to  Christ,*  who  is  in  the  midst  of 
' '  THE  THRONE, ' '  and  of  them,  f  They  wait, 
they  serve,  they  worship,  they  praise.  They 
take  an  intense  interest,  an  active,  willing 
part,  in  all  that  is  now  transpiring  in  con- 
nection with  this  drama  that  we  are  study- 
ing, and  they  shall  joy  in  the  triumph  of  the 
Lord.  May  they  not  then  be  representatives 
of  that  "innumerable  company  of  angels, "  .j" 
that  belong  to  Mount  Zion,  the  city  of  the 
living  God,  the  heavenly  Jerusalem,  and  that 
are  an  important  portion  of  the  Dramatis 
Personse  of  our  drama  ? 


Revelation  4:8 — 11,  and  5: 

Act  II,  4:  to  8: 

Scene  i,  4:8 — 11,  and  5: 

Location. — In    heaven,   and    about    the 

THRONE. 
^Eph.  1:20,  etc.     fRev.  5:6.     tHeb.  12:22. 


Scene  ist.     REVELATION,  4:8—11,  and  5:  69 

Dramatis  Persons. — He  who  sits  upon 
THE  THRONE.  The  Ivamb;  the  Living 
Ones;  the  Elders. 

Time. — The  date  of  the  Apocalypse. 

Surpassingly  grand  is  the  outburst  of 
praise  recorded  in  these  verses  (8-ii.)  The 
Living  Ones  begin  it  with  their  Trisagion. 
The  four  and  twenty  Elders  take  it  up,  and 
prolong  the  glorious  anthem,  amid  piostra- 
tions  and  adorations.  It  is  a  fit  opening  for 
the  stupendous  drama  about  to  be  enacted. 
This  scene  is  altogether  heavenly.  The 
"innumerable  company  of  angels,"  and 
the  general  assembly  of  the  Church  of  the 
first-born,  are  the  interested  spectators.  Ever}- 
eye  is  fixed  upon  the  throne.  It  is  the 
very  center  of  the  whole  movement.  From 
hence  all  that  is  to  come  to  pass,  will  be 
overlooked,  and  ordered,  and  controlled. 

Chapter  5. 

V.  I.  The  anthem  dies  away,  and  now 
the  onward  movement  of  the  drama  begins. 
"  In  the  right  hand  of  Him  that  sat  on  the 
THRONE,"  the  Seer  beholds  "a  book." 

It  must  have  been  a  roll-book.  The  Re- 
visers omit  the  word  "side,"  and  read — 
' '  written  within  and  on  the  back. ' ' 

'  '•  The  book. ' '  This  book  was  sealed  with 
"seven  seals."      There  possibly   may  have 


70  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.  Act  IT. 


been  seven  pieces  of  parchment,  secured  one 
to  the  other  by  as  many  seals,  and  all  rolled 
together,  making  one  roll  or  book. 

^'^  Sealed.  ^^  The  use  of  the  Seal  carries 
with  it  several  significations  in  Scripture.  E. 
g.  (a)  It  is  binding  as  a  witness,  as  in  the 
case  of  contracts.  *  {5)  It  is  a  guarantee  of 
security,  t  {c)  It  insures  secrecy,  and  that  is 
its  import  in  this  instance.  The  book  was 
sealed.  Its  contents  were  unknown,  and  be- 
fore the}^  could  be  known,  these  seals  must  be 
broken. 

But  who  shall  break  them?  Who  shall  be 
counted  worthy  in  that  vast  assembly  to  ap- 
proach THE  THRONE,  and  to  take  the  book 
from  the  hand  of  him  who  sits  upon  it,  and 
to  break  the  seals,  and  make  known  the 
eternal  counsels  of  the  mind  of  God  ?  The 
question  runs  through  the  expectant  assem- 
bly. The  suspense  is  overwhelming.  The 
tension  is  beyond  the  limits  of  human  endur- 
ance. The  Seer  is  prostrated,  and  gives 
way,  weeping  much,  "because  no  man  was 
found  worthy  to  open  and  to  read  the  book; 
neither  to  look  thereon  "  (v.  4).  But  he  is 
re-assured  and  comforted.  "One  of  the  Elders 
saith  unto  him,  weep  not:  Behold,  the  Lion 
of  the  tribe  of  Juda,  the  Root  of  David,  hath 


Jer.  82:10,  &c.     fMaU.  27:66.     Rev.  20:3. 


Scene  ist.  REVELATION,  5:  71 

prevailed  to  open  the  book,  and  the  seven 
seals  thereof."  The  Seer's  attention  is  now 
turned  to  this  "Lion"  that  has  been  an- 
nounced. But  note  that,  instead  of  a 
"Lion,"  there  is  seen  "a  Lamb,"  and  the 
Lamb  had  the  appearance  of  one  that  "  had 
been  slain."  It  is  even  so.  He  is  the  all- 
conquering  Lion,  because  he  was  first  the 
sacrificial  Lamb,  and  whether  he  manifests 
himself  as  the  "  Lion  "  or  the  "  Lamb,"  de- 
pends altogether  with  whom  he  is  dealing.  * 
To  John  he  appears  as  a  Lamb  that  had  been 
slain.  To  Him  has  the  honor  been  accorded 
to  receive  the  book.  He  has  prevailed — has 
overcome,  and  all  power  in  heaven  and  earth 
has  been  given  unto  him.  "  And  He  came 
and  took  the  book  out  of  the  right  hand  of 
Him  that  sat  upon  the  '  'throne.  ' '  At  once 
the  silence  is  broken,  and  there  is  a  grand 
outburst  of  praise.  Amid  prostrations,  and 
the  sound  of  harps,  and  the  odors  of  incense, 
the  Living  ones  and  the  Elders  lead  off  the 
grand  orchestra.  Now  they  address  them- 
selves to  the  Lamb.  It  is  "  a  new  song. ' ' 
It  tells  the  story  of  redemption  through  his 
blood.  It  announces  a  kingdom  purchased 
and  possessed — a  people  taken  from  among 
the  tribes  of  men,  and  who  shall  reign  upon 


*Rev.  14:1,  19:7.  and  6:16,  19:15,  &c.    2  Thess.  1:6,  &c. 


72  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.        Act  11. 

the  earth,  and  the  refrain  of  their  song  is 
—  "Thou  art  worthy  to  take  the  book,  and 
to  open  the  seals  thereof. ' '  And  the  Anthem 
grows  louder  as  it  rolls  on,  until  "  ever}' 
creature  which  is  in  heaven,  and  on  earth, 
and  under  the  earth,  and  such  as  are  in  the  sea, 
and  all  that  are  in  them,  are  heard  saying: 
Blessing,  and  honor,  and  glory,  and  power, 
unto  him  that  sitteth  upon  THE  throne, 
and  unto  the  Lamb  forever  and  ever. ' '  And 
so  this  first  scene  is  brought  to  its  close. 

This  Sealed  book^  what  is  its  significance  ? 
May  we  not  find  its  explanation  in  the  first 
verse  of  the  Revelation?  Contrast  these  two 
portions,  and  see  if  there  are  not  features  of 
strong  resemblance.  What  in  that  first 
verse"^  is  told  us  in  words,  seems  here  to  be 
unfolded  in  symbol.  In  the  first  instance,  a 
' '  Revelation  ' '  is  announced — something  un- 
known, but  to  be  revealed;  in  the  symbol  it 
is  a  book  sealed — its  contents  are  yet  un- 
known. In  the  word-statement,  God  gives 
it,  therefore  it  is  in  his  possession;  in  the 
symbol,  the  book  is  in  the  right  hand  of 
Him  who  sits  upon  the  throne.  In  the 
word-statement,  God  gives  it  to  Jesus  Christ; 
in  symbol,  the  Lamb  takes  the  book  out  of 
the    hand    of    Him     who    sits    upon     the 

*Rev.  1:1. 


Scene  I  St.  REVELATION,  5:  73 

THRONE.  In  the  word-statement,  the  Lord 
Christ  shows  the  Revelation  that  has  been 
given  him  to  his  servant  who  is  to  testify 
concerning  it;  in  the  symbol,  the  Lamb  pro- 
ceeds to  break  the  seals,  and  summons  his 
servant  to  ' '  behold, ' '  that  he  may  record 
the  visions  for  the  instruction  of  his  Church. 
This  resemblance  is  ver}^  striking.  And  it  can 
hardly  be  presumptuous  to  answer  the  ques- 
tion concerning  this  sealed  book  by  saying, 
that  it  is  the  same  Revelation  given  to  Jesus 
Christ,  and  that  it  relates  to  things  that 
' '  must  shortly  come  to  pass. "  It  is  the 
book  of  the  world's  and  the  Church's  history, 
during  the  hiatus  of  Daniel's  prophecy;  and 
it  runs  from  the  date  of  the  Apocalypse  to 
and  through  his  last  week. 


Act,  II.  chp.  4:  to  8: 
Scene ^  2d.  chap.  6: 
Location.      Partly  in  heaven,  and  partly  on 

earth. 
Subject.    Opening  of  the  seals.    The  course 

of  Gentile  Dominion  with  its  terrible 

consequences  down  to  the  time  of  the 

end. 
Thne.      From  the  date  of  the  Apocalypse  to 

the  middle  or  latter  portion  of  Daniel's 

last  week. 
The  second  scene  opens.    The  Lamb  is  now 
the  conspicuous  personage  on  the  stage.      He 


74  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.        Ad  II. 


holds  the  attention  of  the  vast  audience.  In 
his  hand  is  the  book  received  from  him  who 
sits  upon  THE  THRONE.  It  is  the  book  of 
Revelation.  It  contains  ' '  the  mystery  of 
God,"  and  "  the  mystery  of  iniquity,"  and 
the  history  of  the  World  and  the  Church 
down  to  the  time  of  ' '  the  end, ' '  and  the 
Church  of  Christ,  and  the  Mighty  intelli- 
gences of  the  Universe  desire  to  look  into  these 
things,  and  are  waiting  with  intense  eagerness. 

He  opens  one  of  the  seven  seals.  Immedi- 
ately, in  tones  of  thunder,  one  of  the  Living 
Creatures  cried— "  Come."  The  R.  V. 
omits,  "  and  see. "  The  command  is  there- 
fore issued  to  the  ordained  symbol.  And 
straightway  there  passes  before  the  Seer's 
vision  "a  white  horse."  "He  that  sat  on 
him  had  a  bow,  and  a  crown  was  given  unto 
him,  and  he  went  forth  conquering  and  to 
conquer. ' ' 

' '  A  white  horse. ' '  And  what  of  this 
horse  and  his  rider?  It  is  of  course  a 
symbol.  But  whom  does  it  represent,  and 
what  does  it  signify?  Surely  not  Christ. 
The  fact  that  the  riders  here  and  in  chp.  19:, 
are  both  on  white  horses  and  wear  crowns,  is 
not  ground  sufficient  to  establish  identity  be- 
tween them.  The  similarity  is  easily  ac- 
counted for.  The  horse  personifies  strength. 
The  white  horse  indicates  victory,   and  tri- 


Scene  2d.  REVELATION,  6:  75 

umph;  and  a  crown  is  always  the  emblem  of 
royalty  and  kingship.  The  Lord  Christ  is 
not  the  only  one  who  lays  claim  to  these 
prerogatives  in  this  world.  There  is  "a 
prince  of  this  world,"  who,  pointing  to  its 
kingdoms,  dared  to  say  even  to  the  Christ: 
'  A 11  these  things  will  /  give  thee,  if  thou 
wilt  fall  down  and  worship  me. ' '  He  claims 
this  world  as  his.  He  wears  its  crowns,* 
and  transfers  them  to  whom  he  pleases,  t 
And  his  mastery  over  it,  and  impress 
upon  it,  is  unmistakably  manifest 
everywhere.  The  white  horse  and  the  crown, 
and  all  that  they  symbolize,  are  not  therefore 
in  this  world  and  at  this  time,  the  exclusive 
right  of  Him  who  opens  the  seals.  In  this 
s)'mbol  an  usurper  sits  upon  the  white  horse, 
and  guides  him  on  his  conquering  career. 
For  so  is  it  '  'given  unto  him  (V.  2). ' ' 

Observe  also  other  considerations  that  will 
not  suffer  us  to  recognize  the  Lord  Christ  in 
this  symbol. 

{a)  This  rider  is  nameless.  Wherever  the 
Lord  Christ  is  brought  before  us,  there  is  no 
attempt  at  disguise.  Whether  as  the  Lion, 
or  the  Lamb,  or  the  King  of  Kings,  there  is 
no  mistaking  him.  Attending  multitudes, 
the  glorified  Church — the  all-beauteous  Bride, 


^Rev.  12:3.     tl3:2. 


76  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.  Aci  II. 

the  hallelujahs,  the  crowns  at  his  feet,  the 
Armies  of  heaven  following  him, — always 
is  he  proclaimed  the  Christ  of  God.  He  is 
no  longer  nameless.  He  cannot  be  obscured. 
God  has  highly  exalted  him.  God — He  who 
sits  upon  THE  THRONE,  has  given  Him  a 
name  which  is  above  every  name.  Any 
allusion  to  him  must  cause  the  knee  to  bend, 
and  the  tongue  to  confess,  and  the  anthem 
of  praise  to  ascend.  No  nameless  horseman 
then  can  symbolize  Him.  When  His  time 
comes,  and  he  mounts  his  horse,  his  names 
shall  be  blazoned  on  vesture  and  thigh,  and 
the  tramp  of  his  conquering  legiqns  shall  stir 
the  heart  of  the  Universe, 

(b)  This  horseman  comes  with  "a  bow." 
But  this  is  not  Christ's  weapon.  When  he 
rides  forth,  he  bears  a  sword.  The  bow  is 
the  instrument  for  the  discharge  of  arrows. 
The  arrow,  the  dart — "fiery  darts,"  these  in 
the  New  Testament  are  Satan's  weapons. 
The  Ivord  Christ  has  no  identification  with 
him  and  with  his  weapons. 

(c)  This  horseman,  as  a  royal  conqueror 
must  be  identified  with  the  times  of  this 
present  dispensation.  But  these  attributes  of 
kingship  and  conquest  do  not  appertain  to 
Christ  at  this  present  time.  This  is  the  dis- 
pensation of  the  Spirit.  The  gospel  is  being 
preached  as  a  witness.     A  people  are  being 


Scene  2d.  REVELATION,  6:  77 


gathered  out  of  all  kindreds  and  nations  for 
his  name.  But  He,  the  risen  Jesus,  is  in  the 
heavens.  They  have  received  him  and*  must 
retain  him,  until  the  times  of  the  restitution 
of  all  things.  In  His  providential  dispensa- 
tion he,  of  course,  over-rules  all  things;  but 
his  special  work  is  now  "  within  the  veil." 
It  is  here  that  His  official  relations  to  His 
Church  are  being  exercised.  He  is  Prophet, 
Priest,  Sacrifice,  Intercessor.  Take  the 
scene  we  are  considering  as  illustrative.  He 
is  before  us  as  the  Lamb  Slain — the  sacrifice. 
Where  is  he?  In  heaven,  before  THE  throne. 
And  what  is  he  doing?  Exercising  his 
Prophetic  office — opening  the  sealed  book 
that  he  may  ' '  show  to  his  servants  things 
that  must  shortly  come  to  pass. ' ' 

He  is  then  exercising  his  offices  in  the 
heavens,  and  is  not  on  earth.  He  is  not  on 
his  own  throne.  ' '  Now  we  see  not  all 
things  put  under  him."  He  is  on  Iiis 
Father's  throne,  not  his  own.  His  kingly 
office  is  as  yet  in  abeyance,  and  must  con- 
tinue so  until  he  takes  unto  himself  his 
' '  great  power, ' '  then  shall  he  reign.  We 
cannot  therefore  recognize  the  Lord  Christ 
in  the  symbol  of  this  conquering  horseman. 

((£)    And  yet  further  we  would  call  atten- 


*Act8  3:21. 


78  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.        Ad  11. 

tion  to  the  attendants  of  this  horseman — 
war,  famine,  death.  These  are  not  the 
attendants  of  the  Prince  of  Peace.  He  is 
never  presented  to  us  with  such  surround- 
ings. True  his  presence  brings  a  sword 
upon  the  earth.  But  He  does  not  draw  it. 
On  the  contrary  his  command  is — "  Put  up 
again  thy  sword  into  his  place. ' '  His  mis- 
sion is  peace  on  earth,  good  will  toward  men, 
and  even  when  he  does  take  unto  him  his 
' '  great  power, ' '  and  comes  to  reign,  there 
will  indeed  be  judgment  quick  and  sharp, 
but  his  attendants  are  the  armies  of  heaven 
clothed  in  white,  and  riding  on  white  horses; 
and  in  the  day  of  his  sovereignty,  swords 
will  be  beaten  into  plow-shares,  and  spears 
into  pruning-hooks:  nation  shall  not  lift  up 
sword  against  nation,  neither  shall  they 
learn  war  any  more. 

We  therefore  cannot  recognize  Christ  in 
this  symbol.  To  us  it  in  no  way  speaks  of 
him.  Of  whom  or  of  what  then  does  it 
speak? 

We  suggest  that  it  stands  for  Gentile 
Dominion.  The  existence  and  character  of 
this  power  has  been  brought  to  our  notice 
before  in  prophetic  symbol.  The  metallic 
image  of  Daniel  represents  it  in  its  totality.  * 


*2:31,  &c. 


Scene  2d.  REVELATION,  6:  79 

This  image  is  a  perfect  man  from  head  to 
feet,  and  so  it  continues  until  ' '  the  stone  ' ' 
smites  it.  There  is,  however,  well  defined 
divisions  in  the  image.  In  the  interpreta- 
tion we  are  told  that  they  denote  four  suc- 
cessive empires,  and  yet  the  unity  of  the 
image  is  not  broken.  No  matter  what 
different  metals  or  substances  may  enter  into 
its  composition,  yet,  from  its  head  to  its  feet, 
the  one  idea  (Gentile  Dominion)  is  embodied. 

These  different  parts  of  the  image  'are  in 
Daniel's  vision  symbolized  by  four  Beasts. 
He  describes  the  fourth  Beast  as  ' '  dreadful 
and  terrible,  and  strong  exceedingly;  and  it 
had  great  iron  teeth,  it  devoured  and  brake 
in  pieces,  and  stamped  the  residue  with  the 
feet  of  it."* 

It  is  this  terrible  nondescript  Beast  that 
we  are  now  most  interested  in.  It  is  the  last 
of  the  four  Beasts,  and  it  therefore  represents 
the  last  period  of  Gentile  Dominion,  the 
period  in  which  we  are  now  living.  It 
answers  to  the  legs  of  iron,  and  the  feet,  part 
of  iron  and  part  of  clay,  of  the  image.  Most 
expositors  see  a  connection  between  this 
symbol  and  the  Roman  Empire.  In  the 
Lord's  day  the  government  by  military 
tribunes  had  passed  away,   and    Rome  had 


*7:7. 


80  THE  APOLYPTIC  DRAMA.         Act  II. 

assumed  the  purple,  and  was  stretching  forth 
its  arms  in  Conquest.  At  the  time  of  this 
Apocalyptic  vision,  it  had  reached  the  zenith 
of  its  power,  and  war,  famine  and  death, 
marked  the  advance  of  its  legions. 

According  to  our  scheme  of  interpretation, 
the  history  of  this  Gentile  Dominion  must  be 
found  in  this  book,  and  here  we  think  we 
have  it.  This  symbol  of  the  white  horse 
and  its  rider,  and  his  attendant  horsemen, 
tells  the  story  with  all  the  distinctness  of  the 
other  symbols  that  relate  to  this  subject,  and 
that  have  preceded  it.  It  synchronizes 
with  the  legs  and  feet  of  Nebuchadnezzar's 
image,  and  with  the  nondescript  Beast  of 
Daniel's  vision.  It  portrays  this  power  as  it 
then  was,  as  it  since  has  been,  and  as  it  will 
continue  to  be  to  "  the  end."  The  color  of 
the  horse  (white)  denotes  triumph.  The 
crown  given  the  rider  is  sovereignty,  his 
weapon  is  death  dealing,  and  his  mission  is 
conquest.  This'  is  the  Divine  ordering  for 
this  power  down  to  ' '  the  end. ' '  It  was  to 
be  an  instrument  in  his  hand  who  ruleth  in 
the  armies  of  heaven  and  upon  earth,  to 
"overturn,  overturn,  overtfirn, 
until  he  come  whose  right  it  is  to  reign. ' '  * 
To  Nebuchadnezzar,  the  first  acknowledged 

*Bzek.  21:27. 


Scene  2d.  REVELATION,  6:  81 

head  of  this  power,  it  was  said:  "The  God 
of  heaven  hath  given  thee  a  kingdom  . 
and  wheresoever  the  children  of  men  dwell, 
hath  he  given  into  thine  hand,  and 
hath  made  thee  ruler  over  them  all. "  *  Of 
Daniel's  fourth  Beast  it  is  said:  "  It  devoured 
and  brake  in  pieces,  and  stamped  the  residue 
with  the 'feet  of  it.  "f  And  here  it  is  again. 
A  symbol  armed  for  destructiveness,  com- 
missioned for  conquest,  and  attended  by  war, 
famine,  pestilence  and  death.  What  can  be 
more  terrible?  And  the  picture  is  true  to  the 
life.  Read  history  and  see  these  awful  out- 
lines filled  up.  And  even  now,  though  some 
years  of  peace  have  intervened,  yet  the 
governments  that  continue  to  represent  this 
Gentile  Dominion,  are  armed  to  the  teeth. 
They  are  crushing  out  the  life  of  the  people 
asking  for  bread,  and  they  are  watching 
their  opportunity  to  spring  at  each  other  for 
conquest.  Not  only  is  Jerusalem  to  be  trod- 
den down  by  it,  until  the  times  of  the  Gen- 
tiles be  come,  but  all  the  peoples  of  the  earth. 
It  ' '  shall  devour  the  whole  earth,  and  shall 
tread  it  down,  and  break  it  in  pieces. ' '  % 

V.  J.  The  second  Seal  is  opened,  and  here, 
as  in  the  other  instances,!  the  command 
'*cbme",  is  to  the  appointed  symbols.   These 


*2:37,  38.     f7:7.     ^7:23.     gVs.  1.  5,  7. 


82  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.  Act  II. 

horsemen  follow  each  other  in  rapid  succes- 
ion.  We  do  not  regard  them  as  independent 
and  separate  symbols,  each  shadowing  forth  a 
different  person  or  event,  but  as  parts  of  one 
symbol — the  White  horse  and  his  rider  with 
his  attendants.  The  White  horse  leads,  these 
follow.  The  four  unite  to  make  the  one  sym- 
bol. As  the  different  metallic  substances  unite 
in  the  making  up  of  the  one  image  of  Nebuc- 
hadnezzar's dream;  so  here,  the  four  horse- 
men unite  to  give  us  a  complete  symbol. 
The  first  horseman  by  himself  is  incomplete. 
Associate  him  with  the  others  and  we  have  a 
finished  picture  that  tells  its  own  story.  As 
a  symbol  it  takes  its  place  unmistakably  be- 
side those  found  in  Daniel,  and  we  are  im- 
pressed with  the  fact  that  it  represents  Gen- 
tile Dominion  down  to  "the  end"  with  its 
misrule,  with  its  greed,  persecutions  of  the 
Church  of  God,  and  oppression  and  massacre 
of  the  peoples  of  the  earth. 

The  two  pictures  that  follow  vs.  9-17  present 
us  with  the  result  of  this  domination.  And 
they  are  {a)  a.  persecuted  and  slaughtered 
Church;  and  {U)  a  devastated  and  terror 
stricken  earth. 

V.  p.  The  scene  is  now  in  heaven,  but 
is  closely  linked  with  the  one  that  has  just 
preceded  it.  The  opening  of  this  Seal 
brings  to  our  notice  for  the  first  time  the  real 


Scene  2d.  REVELATION,  6:  83 

Church  of  God — the  true,  the  faithful  ones. 
They  are  the  Souls  that  are  with  Jesus.  They 
are  resting,  waiting,  expecting.  They  have 
passed  through  their  fight  of  afflictions. 
They  have  been  faithful  even  unto  death,  and 
they  are  now  witnessing  against  the  mis- 
rule and  God-hating  spirit  of  this  Gentile 
power. 

They  are  seen  under  the  Altar.  On  the 
Altar  is  the  place  for  the  offering;  beside  it  is 
the  position  of  the  priestly  offerer;  but 
"under"  it — at  its  base,  is  here  designated  as 
the  place  of  rest — "rest  yet  for  a  little  sea- 
son", is  the  answer  given  them.  It  may  also 
carry  with  it  the  idea  of  safety.  In  all 
countries  and  religions  the  Altar  was  the 
place  of  sanctuary.  The  man  whose  life  was 
forfeited  sought  refuge  at  the  Altar.  If  there 
was  safety  anywhere,  it  was  there.*  And 
these  souls  were  in  the  place  of  safety,  be- 
yond the  reach  of  Satanic  hate,  and  the 
World's  persecution.  But  though  safe,  they 
are  not  dissociated  from  earth.  They  are  in 
the  fullest  sympathy  with  their  brethren  who 
are  yet  bearing  the  heat  and  burden  of  the 
day,  and  together  with  us,  they  are  anticipat- 
ing "the  end" — the  day  of  vengeance  of  our 
God.t 


*Ex.  21:14.     1  Kings  2:28,  etc.     fLuke  18:7. 


84  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.         Aci  //. 

y.  12^  etc.  The  sixth  Seal  is  broken.  The 
picture  now  presented  is  the  second  evidence 
of  the  misrule  of  this  Gentile  domination. 
The  Most  High  entrusted  it  with  power,  and 
it  has  abused  it.  In  the  fifth  Seal  was  heard 
the  cry  of  the  Church  against  it.  Here  we 
have  a  picture  of  the  condition  into  which  it 
has  brought  the  earth  through  its  cruelty, 
ambition,  and  God-defying  spirit. 

Sun,  Moon,  and  Stars,  stand  for  persons  of 
distinction.  Note  Joseph's  dream,  Gen.  37:9, 
etc.  Consult  also.  Rev.  1:20,  9:  i ,  Num. 
24:17,  and  Matt.  2:2,  Dan.  8:10. 

Earthquakes  and  natural  disturbances  sig- 
nify political  and  social  upheavals  and  hor- 
rors. *  While  it  is  not  improbable  that  when 
the  events  called  for  by  this  seal  shall  be 
transpiring  there  may  be  great  natural  dis- 
turbances, as  at  the  time  of  the  Lord's  cruci- 
fixion, yet  we  are  disposed  to  regard  this  and 
similar  discriptions  throughout  the  book,  as 
figurative,  announcing  social,  rather  than 
natural  convulsions. 

The  closing  of  this  scene  is  tragic  and  awful 
to  the  last  degree.  The  'White  Horse"  and 
his  attendants  have  done  their  work  effect- 
ively. In  addition  to  wasting  and  desolating 
the  earth,    Gentile   Dominion  has  also  blas- 


ts. 2:10,  etc.,  13:9  etc.,34:    2  Peter,  3:6,  etc. 


Scene  2d.  REVELATION,  6:  85 

phemed  the  God  of  heaven,  and  defied  his 
sovereignty,  and,  as  we  shall  learn  elsewhere 
in  the  book,  has  compelled  the  nations  to  do 
the  same.  And  now  the  time  of  reckoning 
has  come.  The  hand- writing  is  on  the  Wall. 
The  characters — ^^  Mene^  Mene^  Tekel^ 
Upharseii' ' ,  are  blazoned  in  letters  of  light. 
Even  a  scoffing  world  can  no  longer  doubt. 

The  events  of  this  seal  bring  us  down  in 
all  probability  to  the  beginning  of  Daniel's 
70th  week,  and  consequently  to  the  uprising 
of  the  Anti-Christ.  It  must  even  continue 
well  into  the  week — to  a  point  of  time  when 
a  rebellious,  God-defying  world  begins  to 
realize  that  there  is  an  all-conquering  power, 
that  his  terrors  are  abroad,  and  that  the  day 
of  his  wrath  has  come.  It  is  the  day  of  con- 
sternation foretold  by  the  Lord  in  lyuke  21: 
25,  26.  "Upon  earth  distress  of  nations, 
with  perplexity;  the  sea  and  the  waves  (the 
enraged  peoples)  roaring:  men's  hearts  fail- 
ing them  for  fear,  and  for  looking  after  those 
things  which  are  coming  on  the  earth:  for 
the  powers  of  heaven  shall  be  shaken. "  See 
also  Isa.  2:12,  &c. 

But  here  let  it  be  carefull}^  noted  as 
important  to  our  scheme  of  interpretation, 
that  in  the  events  taking  place  under  this 
seal,  verse  27  of  Luke  has  no  place.  "And 
there  (in   the  midst  of  this  expectancy  and 


86  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.        Act  II. 

consternation)  shall  they  see  the  son  of  man 
coming  in  a  cloud,  with  power  and  great 
glory. ' '  Events  under  this  seal  stop  short  of 
this  consummation.  Doubtless  it  is  expect- 
ancy of  this  coming,  that  gives  occasion  for 
the  World's  consternation.  But  events  under 
this  seal  stop  short  of  it.  It  is  this  fact  that 
we  want  especially  to  emphasize.  This 
sixth  seal  brings  the  world's  history — the 
history  of  Gentile  Dominion,  down  to  a  point 
of  time  just  prior  to  the  Lord's  Advent,  and 
there  it  stops — there  it  leaves  it.  There  is 
more  to  come,  but  this  seal  is  not  to  tell  it, 
nor  is  this  history  to  be  further  pursued  for 
the  present.  This  second  scene  of  Act  II, 
closes,  leaving  Gentile  Dominion  still  in 
existence,  but  in  a  state  of  terror  and  fearful 
expectation.  This,  it  will  be  remembered, 
was  precisely  the  condition  in  which  the 
visible — the  false  and  apostate  Church,  was 
left  at  the  close  of  Act  I.  Its  prophetic  his- 
tory of  chapters  2:  and  3:  closed,  leaving  it 
still  in  existence,  a  self-righteous,  rejected 
Church,  with  threatened  judgments  awaiting 
the  hour  of  execution.  The  two  histories  in 
the  two  Acts  traverse  the  same  period  of  time. 
The  one  tells  the  story  of  the  Church  down 
to  the  moment  of  its  rejection;  the  other 
brings  the  history  of  Gentile  Dominion  to  a 
similar  moment,  when  it  too  has  been  judged, 


Scene  2d.  REVELATION,  6:  87 


and  its  heart  isjfailing  it  for  fear.  In  both 
instances  we  naturally  look  for  the  onward 
movement  of  the  history,  and  for  the  execu- 
tion of  the  threatened  judgment.  But  not 
so.  Other  histories,  and  strange  events  must 
be  narrated,  and  must  be  brought  down  to  this 
same  point  of  time,  before  "the  end"  will 
be  announced.  The  judgments  and  awards 
are  alike  for  an  appointed  time,  therefore 
must  the  history  of  all  be  first  brought  down 
to  that  day  and  hour,  before  the  Drama  can 
unfold  the  judgments  in  their  execution,  and 
the  honors  in  their  bestowment. 


Revelation  7: 

Act,  IL     4:  to  8: 

Scene. — 3d.  chap.    7: 

Location.— Y2,x\Xy  in  heaven,  partly  on 
earth. 

Dra^natis  PersoncE. — Angels.  The  Sealed. 
The  Elders.     The  Lamb. 

Ti7ne. — The  entire  period  of  O.  and  N. 
Testament  dispensations  down  to  the  transla- 
tion. 

This  third  scene  presents  us  with  the  his- 
tory of  the  hidden  Church.  We  have 
already  had  in  Act  I,  a  history  of  the  Church 
visible — the  Church  as  it  is  seen  by  the 
world,   and   that  indentifies  itself   with   the 


THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.  Act  II. 


world,  and  that  eventually  apostatizes.  The 
history  of  Gentile  Dominion,  with  its  cruel- 
ties and  godlessness,  was  the  subject  of  the 
next  scene.  Now  there  is  given  us  what  to 
the  world  is  a  hidden  history.  It  relates  to 
the  Church  invisible — the  sealed  ones.  We 
have  already  called  attention*  to  the  fact  that 
the  Church  is  made  up  of  these  two  elements. 
In  the  history  of  the  visible  Church  (Act  I) 
— the  Church  of  the  world  and  of  the 
Apostasy,  we  read  of  those  who  have  labored, 
who  have  not  fainted,  and  have  suffered 
tribulation  and  poverty,  and  have  not  denied 
the  faith,  and  have  been  faithful  even  unto 
death.  What  of  these?  Where  are  they? 
They  cannot  be  identified  with  those  who 
left  their  first  love,  who  consented  to  the 
doctrine  of  Balaam,  who  associated  them- 
selves with  the  woman  Jezebel,  and  who 
have  joined  the  synagogue  of  Satan?  Cer- 
tainly not.  They  have  a  separate  history, 
and  this  scene  tells  us  all  about  them. 

No  Seal  is  here  opened.  They  (the  Seals) 
belong  exclusively  to  Gentile  Dominion,  and 
the  results  of  its  mis-rule.  This  picture-his- 
tory may  be  regarded  as  an  explanation  and 
expansion  of  the  fifth  seal.  There  we  were 
shown  the  souls — the  victims  of  Gentile  per- 

*p.  44,  &c. 


Scene  3d.  REVEIvATION,  7:  89 

seditions,  sheltered  beneath  the  Altar.  This 
scene  tells  ns  more  about  them.  It  is  the  his- 
tory of  the  true  Chuich,  the  Church  unrecog- 
nized by  the  world,  and  unknown  to  it;  but 
sealed  of  God,  and  therefore  known  to  him, 
and  kept  by  his  power,  and  that  will  at  last 
be  gathered  before  The  throne,  and  before 
the  Ivamb.      (V.  9.) 

V.  I.  The  scene  opens  with  a  beautiful 
conception  and  illustration  of  Christ's  head- 
ship over  all  things  for  his  Church.  *  Four 
Angels  standing  on  the  four  corners  of  the 
earth,  hold  the  four  winds  of  the  earth,  that 
they  should  not  blow  on  the  earth,  nor  on  the 
sea,  nor  on  any  tree.  The  earth  is  doomed,  f 
"The  winds," — the  forces  of  nature  and  the 
passions  of  evil  intelligences,  are  ready  at 
any  moment  to  break  loose  and  destroy,  if 
But  God  has  his  purposes.  He  holds  them 
in  check.  His  Church  is  still  in  the  world. 
All  have  not  been  gathered  yet,  and  until 
they  are,  the  restraining  Angels  must  stand 
to  their  posts. 

V.  2.  Another  angel  is  now  seen  ascend- 
ing from  the  east — ''the  sun- rising"  (R.  V.). 
His  course  is  from  the  East  to  the  West.  In 
his  hand  is  the  Seal  of  the  Living  God,  with 
which  he  is  to  seal  the  servants  of  his  God. 


Eph.  1:20,  etc.     12  Peter  3:5,  etc.     t  Jer.  51:16. 


90  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.        Act  II. 

Farther  on*  we  read  of  an  Angel  flying  in  the 
midst  of  heaven  with  the  everlasting  gospel 
to  preach  unto  them  that  dwell  on  the  earth. 
This  is  the  fact  revealed  here.  It  is  a  sym- 
bol of  the  Church  commissioned  to  go  into  all 
the  world  and  preach  the  gospel.  This 
preaching  began  in  Jerusalem,  t  Its  course 
has  been  steadily  westward.  Its  mission  is  to 
proclaim  the  grace  of  God,  and  to  take  out 
from  among  the  Gentiles  a  people  for  his 
name.J.  "He  that  believeth  and  is  baptized 
shall  be  saved.''  But  before  this  calling  out 
and  sealing  process  begins,  the  messenger 
Angel  gives  charge  to  those  holding  the  four 
winds,  to  keep  them  in  check.  "Hurt  not 
the  earth,  etc.,  till  we  have  sealed  the  serv- 
ants of  our  God  in  their  foreheads."  (V.  3.). 
And  to-day  we  can  look  with  John  upon 
this  striking  picture.  To  those  who  have 
eyes  to  see  and  ears  to  hear,  it  is  as  distinctly 
set  forth  in  the  heavens  as  when  the  seer  be- 
held it.  The  restraining  Angels  are  still  at 
their  posts.  The  apostle  Paul  announces 
that  the  mystery  of  iniquity  was  working  in 
his  day — that  it  only  awaited  the  removal  of 
a  restraining  power,  and  then  will  he  be  re- 
vealed, the  lawless  one,  whom  the  Lord  Jesus 
will    consume,    etc.  ||      The   existing   World 


14:0.     fActs  1:8.     JActs  15:14.     1|2  Thes.  2:7,  etc. 


Scene  3d.  REVELATION,  7:  91 

power — the  Beast  so  dreadful  and  terrible, 
the  lawless  one,  whose  coming  is  after  the 
working  of  Satan  with  all  power  and  signs 
and  lying  wonders* — this  world  power  is  re- 
strained, until  the  sealing  is  finished  and  the 
number  of  the  elect  completed.  '  'AH  things 
continue  as  they  were  from  the  beginning  of 
the  creation' ' ,  t  is  ever  the  taunt  of  unbelieving 
scoffers.  They  dream  not  that  destructive 
forces  are  ready  to  burst  upon  them,  restrained 
only  by  Divine  command.  The  world  con- 
tinues as  it  is  for  the  sake  of  the  Church,  un- 
til the  servants  of  God  shall  be  sealed. 

The  gospel  message  proposes  a  compact.  If 
accepted,  it  involves  agreement  and  action 
between  contracting  parties — "believe  and  be 
baptized,  and  thou  shalt  be  saved."  God 
and  the  believing  soul  entering  into  Covenant. 
This  sealing  is  then  the  sign  of  these  Cove- 
nant relations.  It  signifies  identification, 
ownership,  security,  {a)  It  is  the  Lord  know- 
ing them  that  are  his;]:  {b)  it  is  giving  this 
knowledge  to  them  that  are  his,  sealing  them 
with  the  Holy  Spirit  of  promise ;||  and  {c)  it 
is  his  people  desiring  this  knowledge — "Set 
me  as  a  seal  upon  thine  heart",  etc.§  And 
this  sealing  is  "in  their  foreheads".!  All 
men  must  be  able  to  know  them  at  once.    By 

*Dan.  7:7,  2  Thes.  2:7,  etc.,  Rev.  18.  t2  Peter  3,  4.  |2 
Tim.  2:19.     ||Eph.  1:13,  etc.     ^.Cant.  8:6.     «! Ezek.  9:4,  etc. 


92  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.         Act  II. 

the  confession  of  the  mouth,  and  by  the  man- 
ner of  living,  it  must  be  manifest  to  all  that 
they  have  been  with  Jesus,  and  that  they  are 
witnessing  for  him. 

K  4.  In  this  fourth  verse  the  result  of 
this  sealing  is  given.  The  messenger  Angel 
has  therefore  accomplished  his  mission.  The 
number  of  the  elect  is  completed,  and  the 
time  of  "the  end"  is  reached.  This  is 
further  confirmed  by  the  fact  that  the  earth- 
picture  here  closes,  and  we  are  introduced  to 
a  heavenly  one  (V.  9).  Behold  the  multi- 
tude of  the  sealed  ones  gathered  on  the 
Mount  Sion. 

This  determines  also  for  us  the  time  occu- 
pied by  the  vision.  It  extends  from  the 
first  sending  forth  of  the  gospel  on  its  mis- 
sion of  calling  and  sealing  down  to  the 
translation.*  This  event  takes  place  just 
prior  to  the  Lord's  appearing.  Its  period 
synchronizes  then  exactly  with  the  other  his- 
tories we  have  been  considering.  It  is  the  in- 
terval between  Daniel's  69th  and  70th  week, 
and  runs  on  to  perhaps  the  middle  of  that 
week. 

^^  Israeiy  This  nimibering  is  said  to  be 
among  "  the  tribes  of  the  children  of  Israel. " 
Our    vision    relates    immediately    to   gospel 


1  Cor.  10:50,  etc.,  1  Thes.  4:13,  etc. 


Scene  3d.  REVELATION,  7:  98 


times.  Israel  as  a  nation  are  not.*  They 
are  in  blindness  and  banishment.  This  is 
the  dispensation  when  God  is  taking  out  a  peo- 
ple for  his  name  among  the  Gentiles,  f  This 
gathered  people  are  declared  to  be  Abraham's 
seed,  and  heirs  to  the  promises.  J  So  that 
we  are  authorized  in  interpreting  the  term- 
"  Israel  "  in  its  largest  spiritual  conception. 
These  gathered  people  belong  to  both  dis- 
pensations. Under  the  Theocracy  there  was 
a  ''holy  seed" — sealed  ones.  So  hidden 
away  were  they  at  times  that  one  of  the  most 
distinguished  of  the  prophets  was  not  aware 
of  their  existence.  But  God  knew  them. 
These  are  their  successors — their  brethren. 
What  if  those  of  the  present  dispensation 
were  once  alienated,  and  enemies  in  mind  by 
wicked  works  ?  Yet  now  hath  he  reconciled 
them  in  the  body  of  his  flesh  through  death, 
to  present  them  holy  and  unblamable  and 
unreproveable  in  his  sight.  ||  They  are 
all  one  in  Christ  Jesus.  Both  Jew  and 
Gentile  are  comprehended.  Verse  nine  re- 
quires this.  Here  is  the  aggregate  of 
this  sealing — "A  great  multitude,  which  no 
man  could  number. "  Who  are  they?  They 
are  "  of  all  nations,  and  kindreds,  and  people, 
and    tongues."     This    is  exactly  what  the 


*See  p.  37,  &c.     }  Acts  15:14.     tGal.  3:29;  Rom.  2:29. 
iCol.  1:21,  22. 


94  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.        Act  II. 

apostle  James  declares  to  be  the  present  mis- 
sion of  the  gospel;*  and  it  is  in  connection 
with  this  fact  also  that  the  Living  Ones 
count  Him,  who  had  received  the  book, 
worthy  to  be  praised  and  honored — "for 
thou  wast  slain,  and  didst  purchase  unto  God 
with  thy  blood  men  of  every  tribe,  and  tongue, 
and  people,  and  nation,  "f  "Israel" 
stands  then  for  the  Redeemed  of  Christ. 
Nor,  as  we  take  them  in  the  aggregate,  must 
we  limit  them  to  the  called  of  this  dispensa- 
tion. While  we  regard  the  historic  limits 
of  this  vision  to  be  the  gospel  period,  yet 
when  we  come  to  consider  those  sealed  ones 
as  a  great  multitude,  and  as  the  same  com- 
pany that  we  read  of  in  chapter  14,  we  must 
recognize  the  saints  of  the  Old  Testament 
dispensation  as  well  as  those  of  the  New. 
We  must  include  that  faithful  company 
recorded  in  Hebrews  1 1 :,  and  "  of  whom  the 
world  was  not  worthy. ' '  The  sealed  ones  in 
their  completed  numbers  are  the  Lamb's 
Bride — the  Redeemed  of  all  generations  and 
of  all  nationalities. 

'  ^An  hundred  and  forty  and  four  thousand. ' ' 
So  in  regard  to  this  numbering.  The  very 
genius  of  the  book  we  are  studying  requires 
that  this  number,  as  well  as  the  term  "Israel" 


*Acts  16:14.     tRev.  5:9. 


Scefiejd.  REVELATION,  7:  95 

shall  be  taken  figuratively.  The  aggregate 
of  this  sealing  is,  we  are  told,  "  a  multitude, 
which  no  man  could  number. "  Then  it  is 
impossible  to  give  the  exact  figures.  There 
must  be  some  "x"  that  shall  stand  as  the 
sign  of  the  unknown  quantity,  and  we  have 
it  in  the  number  designated.  In  symbolic 
numbers,  twelve  is  supposed  to  be  the  num- 
ber of  the  heavenly,  the  perfected  Church. 
There  are  twelve  patriarchs,  twelve  tribes, 
twelve  apostles,  twelve  thrones,  twelve  stars,  * 
twelve  gates,  t  One  hundred  and  forty-four 
thousand  is  the  multiple  of  twelve.  This 
number  must  then  be  regarded  as  a  repre- 
sentative one.  It  stands  for  the  whole  mul- 
titude of  the  Redeemed  throughout  all  the 
ages  down  to  ' '  the  end. ' ' 

V.  p.  "After  this,"  i.  e.^  after  the  seal- 
ing has  been  finished.  The  first  part  of  the 
scene  was  an  earth-picture.  It  calls  our  atten- 
tion to  four  angels  standing  on  the  four 
corners  of  the  earth,  and  holding  in  restraint 
the  four  winds  of  earth  that  they  should  not 
destroy.  It  shows  us  the  messenger  /Vngel 
moving  from  the  sunrising,  and  sealing  the 
servants  of  God,  and  it  gives  us  the  result  of 
this  finished  work.  Now  we  have  another 
picture.      It  is  in  the  heavens.      The  sealing 


*Rev.  12:1.     tRev.  21:14,  1(3. 


96  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.        Act  II. 

is  finished,  and  the  translation,  described  in 
I.  Cor.  15:50,  etc.,  and  again  in  i.  Thess. 
4:13,  etc.,  has  taken  place.  This  multitude 
is  composed  of  those  who  during  the  ages 
past  have  slept  in  Jesus,  together  with  those 
who  at  the  time  of  his  appearing  were  yet 
in  the  flesh,  and  were  caught  up  to  meet  him 
in  his  coming. 

Nor  must  it  be  supposed  that  in  this 
picture  we  have  an  overlapping  of  the  time 
limits  of  the  other  histories.  Not  at  all. 
These  two  events,  the  sealing  and  translation, 
and  the  conquest  mission  of  the  "white 
horse,"  move  along  on  the  same  parallels  of 
time.  They  reach  their  terminus  at  or  about 
the  same  period.  The  history  of  the  Apostate 
Church  was  brought  down  to  a  point  where 
sentence  awaited  execution.  So  in  the  his- 
tory of  Gentile  Dominion,  the  nations  are 
affrighted,  and  men  are  realizing  that  the 
great  day  of  wrath  is  at  hand.  And  in  this 
scene,  the  history  of  the  faithful  Church  is 
brought  down  to  the  time  of  its  removal 
from  the  earth.  This  wrath  cannot  be 
poured  out  while  any  of  the  sealed  ones  are 
here.  The  command  to  the  angels  is — hold 
the  winds  until  the  sealing  is  finished. 
These  sealed  ones  must  be  beyond  their 
hurt.  And  this  is  what  our  last  picture  pre- 
sents.    It  shows  us  the  redeemed  Church  on 


Scene  3d.  REVELATION,  7:  97 

Mount  Sion,  safe  with  its  Lord.  There  is 
nothing^  now  between  the  world  and  the  on- 
rushing  winds  of  destruction.  The  Angels 
but  wait  the  command.  And  so  the  histories 
of  the  Apostate  Church,  of  the  godless  world 
power,  and  of  the  faithful  Church,  are  brought 
down  to  the  same  awful  moment  in  time — 
judgment  threatened,  and  certain,  and  all 
ready  to  be  executed  on  an  evil  world  and  an 
Apostate  Church;  but  the  true  Church  is  safe. 
The  five  virgins  whose  lamps  were  burning, 
have  entered  in  with  the  Bridegroom.  The 
door  is  shut.  While  zvithoitt^  men's  hearts 
are  failing  them  for  fear  of  impending  judg- 
ments, in  this  heaven-picture  we  are  presented 
with  the  scene  ivithin  the  closed  doors — the 
Church  safe,  and  rejoicing,  and  adoring  Him 
that  sitteth  on  The  Throne.  This  scene  has 
correspondence  and  close  connection  with 
chapters  12:5,  and  14:1  &c. 

What  follows  from  v.  1 3  to  end  of  chapter, 
does  not  properly  belong  to  the  picture.  It 
is  explanatory.  We  shall  meet  with  such 
interruptions  or  additions  often  in  the  course 
of  the  drama.  It  is  a  filling  up  of  the  pic- 
tures. Telling  us  in  word-pictures  what 
cannot  be  so  well  expressed  by  symbol.  In 
the  present  instance  it  is  one  of  the  Elders 
explaining  to  the  wondering  Seer  the  per- 
sonnel of  this  worshiping  rejoicing    throng. 


THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.      Act  III. 


They  are  not  the  multitudinous  Angel  host. 
Neither  are  they  of  the  order  of  the  Living 
Ones,  nor  of  the  Elders,  nor  yet  come  they 
from  the  ranks  of  Cherubim  or  Seraphim;  but 
from  earth,  out  of  great  tribulation,  and 
have  washed  their  robes  and  made  them 
white  in  the  blood  of  the  Lamb.  What 
follows  is  anticipative,  and  tells  of  the 
honors  and  glories  of  the  Redeemed  Church, 
and  transports  us  to  the  scenes  connected 
with  chapters  21:  and  22  : 

But  the  historic  pictures  are  not  yet  all 
completed.  Others  are  to  be  presented,  and 
to  be  brought  down  to  this  same  moment  of 
fearful  waiting  for  of  judgment,  before  the 
actual  outpouring  of  the  vials  of  wrath  can 
be  described.  We  now  pass  on  to  Act  III, 
and  its  several  scenes. 


Scene  ist.  REVELATION,  8:  9:  99 

Revelation,   8:  9: 

Act  III.     8:  to  11:  I- 1 5. 

Scene  ist. — Chapters  8:  to  9: 

Location. — Partly  in  the  heavens,  and 
partly  on  the  earth. 

Dramatis  PersoncE. — The  Lamb,  Angels, 
Trumpeters,  Men. 

Time. — From  Apocalyptic  date  to  the 
beginning  or  middle  of  Daniel's  last  week. 

The  Seer  is  still  in  the  heavenly  places. 
He  is  before  THE  throne,  and  in  the  pres- 
ence of  the  Lamb,  and  the  great  multitude 
of  attending  angels. 

There  are  seven  seals.  The  6th  at  its 
close  showed  us  Gentile  dominion  ripe  for 
judgment  and  expecting  it.  I'here  was  also 
given  us  a  glimpse  of  "the  Church  of  the 
First  Born ' '  in  heaven.  They  have  not 
only  escaped  those  things  that  are  coming 
upon  the  earth,  but  by  their  absence  the 
barrier  that  hindered  these  threatened  judg- 
ments has  been  removed.  We  should  expect, 
therefore,  all  things  being  now  ready,  that 
the  opening  of  the  7th  and  last  seal  would 
usher  in  the  climax  of  the  tragedy — the 
threatened  judgment  executed.  But  it  does 
not.  The  seal  is  broken,  and  instead  of  the 
winds  being  let  loose,  and  the  storm  of 
Divine  wrath  sweeping  in  its  fierceness  over 


100  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.      Act  III. 

the  earth,  we  read — ''there  was  silence  in 
heaven  about  the  space  of  half  an  hour" 
(v.   I). 

Is  it  the  silence  of  rest?  Is  it  to  give  the 
Seer's  mind  time  to  adjust  itself  for  the  new 
series  of  events  that  is  to  be  brought  before 
it?  Is  it  carrying  out  our  idea  of  the 
dramatic  structure  of  the  book,  the  dropping 
of  the  curtain  to  allow  the  shifting  of  the 
scenes  preparatory  to  a  new  Act?  We  are 
disposed  to  think  so. 

The  seventh  seal  then,  instead  of  bringing 
the  drama  to  a  close,  contains  and  unfolds 
the  prophetic  symbols  of  a  new  Act  with  its 
succession  of  Scenes.  There  are  yet  other 
histories  connected  with  this  "mystery  of 
iniquity"  that  must  be  disclosed.  The 
Book  taken  from  the  hand  of  Him  who  sits 
upon  THE  THRONE  Contains  "the  whole 
course  of  the  world's  history."  The  seals, 
the  trumpets,  the  vials,  are  parts  of  this 
whole.  The  seals  contain  the  trumpets,  the 
7th  or  last,  develops  them.  So  from  the 
trumpets  come  the  vials.  They  are  succes- 
sive acts  presenting  us  with  parallel  histories. 
In  Act  I,  it  was  the  Church  corrupting 
itself.*  In  Act  II  it  was  Gentile  domin- 
ion   in   its    pride,    and    greed,   and    cruelty. 


*Rev.  2:3:  Matt.  18:    33-36. 


Scene  I  St.  REVELATION,  8:  9:  101 

Here  (Act  III),  it  is  the  history  of  Satanic 
power  under  spiritual  guises  assailing  the 
Church  and  the  World.  In  the  former  case, 
it  was  the  material  world-forces  working  out, 
through  Satanic  energy,  their  awful  conse- 
quences upon  the  nations.  In  the  symbols 
now  to  be  presented,  we  have,  energized  by 
the  same  power,  a  history  of  the  spiritual 
world-forces  within  and  without  the  Church. 
The  spiritual  elements  predominating 
throughout  these  scenes  lead  to  such  an  in- 
terpretation, if  they  do  not  necessitate  it.  E. 
g.  The  Altar,  the  censer,  the  incense,  the 
fire  from  the  Altar,  the  prayers  of  the  saints. 
These  are  all  spiritual  in  their  relations.  So 
also  in  regard  to  the  ultimate  results  upon 
men,  as  presented  by  the  6th  trumpet.  They 
become  worshippers  of  devils,  and  of  idols  of 
gold  and  silver,  neither  repent  they  of  their 
murders,  of  their  sorceries,  fornications,  or 
thefts.  * 

Without  this  representation,  the  Apocalypse 
as  a  prophetic  history  would  be  incomplete. 
This  spiritual  world-force  workings  its  evil,  is 
as  conspicuous  in  its  destructiveness,  as  the 
material  world-force  in  its  oppressions.  From 
the  very  beginning  it  has  opposed  itself  to  the 
word  of  Jehovah  God.  You  can  trace  it  from 
Jannes  and  Jambres,  who  withstood  Moses,  f 

*(9:20,  21.).     f2  Tim.  3:8. 


102  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.         Act  III. 


down  to  the  close  of  the  O.  T.  dispensation. 
And  from  the  very  outset  of  the  present  it  has 
sought,  and  to  the  end  will  it  continue  to 
seek,  the  overthrow  of  the  gospel  of  the  glory 
of  Jesus.  In  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles,  that 
tell  us  of  the  first  planting  of  the  Church,  we 
read  of  Judaizing  teachers.  The  Epistles 
warn  against  Gnostic  heresies,  and  in  this 
book  of  the  Apocalypse,  we  read  of  the  Nico- 
laitans,  and  of  the  doctrine  of  Balaam,  and 
of  Jezebel  the  prophetess  and  seducer,  and  of 
the  synagogue  of  Satan.  Passing  on  to  Ec- 
clesiastical history,  we  find  its  pages  occupied 
with  controversies  concerning  Arianism,  Pe- 
lagianism,  Socinianism,  and  spiritual  world 
forces  without  end.  And  with  the  years,  the 
number  and  intensity  of  these  assaults  upon 
the  word  of  God  and  the  gospel  of  Jesus,  have 
multiplied.  These  are  the  spiritual  world- 
forces  within  the  Church.  And  from  with- 
out, from  the  world  itself,  they  have  been  no 
less  numerous  and  persistent  in  their  assaults. 
From  the  day  that  Elymas,  the  sorcerer,  with- 
stood Paul*  to  the  present,  the  succession  has 
been  unbroken.  It  counts  in  its  ranks  such 
names  as  Celsus,  Julian,  Porphery,  Mahom- 
med.  Gibbon,  Voltaire,  and  such  like,  all 
children  of  the  devil,  enemies  of  all  righteous- 


*Acts.  13:10. 


Scene  r St.  REVELATION,  8:  9:  103 


ness,  perverters  of  the  right  ways  of  the  Lord. 
And  to-day  the  world  is  full  of  them.  Where- 
soever their  origin,  and  whatsoever  their  tend- 
encies, they  all  have  a  common  center  of 
unity — hatred  of  Jesus,  contempt  for  his  cross, 
and  rejection  of  his  Kingship.  In  the  present 
day  these  spiritual  forces  are  multiplying  and 
exercising  a  wide-spread  influence  upon  the 
minds  of  men  both  within  and  without  the 
Church.  Their  tendency  is  to  undermine  the 
authority  of  Scripture  as  the  word  of  the 
Lord,  to  dethrone  God  from  his  universe,  and 
to  make  men  return  to  the  worship  of  de- 
mons, and  to  all  immorality.  The  material 
world-forces  presented  to  us  under  the  seals, 
culminate  in  the  Beast  of  the  sea,  of  Chap- 
ter 13:1,  etc.  These  spiritual  forces  find  their 
culmination  in  the  Beast  of  the  earth — the 
false-prophet  of  the  same  chapter,  V.  11, 
etc. 

Vs.  1-6.  Possibly  it  is  during  the  contin- 
uance of  this  silence  that  the  seer  has  the 
opportunity  of  taking  in  his  new  surround- 
ings. The  throne  is  still  there.  The 
grand  tableau  of  chapter  4  is  a  permanency. 
It  is  ever  present  to  the  seer.  He  is  ever  in 
the  midst  of  its  glories.  It  is  not  only  a  rep- 
resentation of  Divine  Majesty,  but  it  is  the 
THRONE  itself  which  is  from  everlasting  to 
everlasting.      And  God  is  on  it.      He  has  de- 


104  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Act  III. 


serted  neither  his  universe,  nor  his  earth. 
Not  a  sparrow  falls  to  the  ground  without  his 
permission.  There  have  been  times  when 
indeed  it  has  seemed  otherwise,  and  it  will  be 
so  again.  But  THE  throne  is  still  there. 
God  reigns.  By  his  secret  providences  he 
rules  and  restains.  Upon  the  raging  madness 
of  ungodliness,  he  lays  his  hand,  and  says: 
'^Hitherto  shalt  thou  come,  but  no  further; 
and  here  shall  thy  proud  waves  be  stayed. ' '  * 
This  is  one  of  the  facts  that  the  Revelation  is 
intended  to  teach,  and  to  impress,  on  the 
minds  of  God's  people.  The  world  kvill  not 
recognize  it.f  But  to  those  who  are  "in  the 
spirit",  THE  THRONE  and  he  who  sits  upon 
it,  are  always  visible. 

In  this  new  vision  therefore  the  throne 
is  still  present  to  the  seer.  And  now  stand- 
ing conspicuously  by  it  are  seven  Angels.  To 
them  seven  trumpets  are  given.  The  Angel 
beside  the  Altar,  and  the  burning  incense, 
and  the  fire  from  the  Altar  poured  on  the 
earth,  with  its  direful  results,  these  are  all 
preparatory,  and  as  we  have  suggested,  ex- 
planatory. 

V.  6.  And  now  the  first  Angel  sounds. 
Are  there  historic  facts  in  the  direction  sug- 
gested that  correspond  to  the  symbols  of  these 


*Job,  38:11.     tis.  10:5,  etc. 


Scene  ist.  REVELATION,  8:  105 

six  trumpeters  ?  It  is  not  our  purpose  to  at- 
tempt an  answer  to  this  question.  Many  ex- 
positions have  been  made,  and  those  who 
would  go  more  into  this  matter,  will  not  be 
disappointed  for  lack  of  material. 

Chap.  g:i.  We  call  attention  to  this  5th 
trumpet,  because,  {a)  it  is  ushered  in  by  a 
special  announcement.  An  iVngel  (8:13)  is 
heard  ''flying  through  the  midst  of  heaven, 
saying  with  a  loud  voice.  Woe,  Woe,  Woe, 
to  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth,  by  reason  of 
the  other  voices  of  the  trumpets  of  the  three 
Angels,  which  are  yet  to  sound."  This  cry 
is  doubtless  intended  for  the  Church.  There 
will  be  a  portion  of  it  in  the  days  of  these 
trumpeters  that  will  have  ears  to  hear.  For 
them  the  warning  is  intended.  Knowledge 
has  increased,  and  with  it  the  power  for  evil 
as  well  as  for  good.  There  will  therefore  be 
an  increased  intensity  in  spiritual  wickedness, 
and  in  the  afllictions  that  flow  from  it.  And 
(p)  it  is  furthermore  worthy  of  remark,  that 
there  is  great  unanimity  among  expositors  in 
recognizing  in  this  symbol  the  rise  and 
career  of  the  Mahommedan  power. 

V.  12.  At  this  point  there  is  an  interrup- 
tion to  the  onward  movement  of  the  drama. 
An  explanation  must  be  given.  This  was 
common,  and  a  necessity  in  the  Greek  plays.; 
By   the  introduction  of   scener>'  and  dress, 


106  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Act  III. 

and  other  improvements  in  the  dramatic  art 
we  are  able  in  our  dramatic  representations 
to  dispense  with  these  interruptions.  The 
voice  is  both  explanatory,  and  a  note  of 
warning  and  preparation.  It  announces  that 
one  woe  is  past,  and  that  two  more  are  to 
follow. 

V.  ij.  The  6th  Angel  sounds,  and  im- 
mediately a  voice  from  the  altar  bids  the 
trumpeter  (v.  14)  "loose  the  four  angels 
which  are  bound  in  the  great  river  Euphra- 
tes."  The  Euphrates  in  that  day  was  the 
border  line  between  the  civilized  and  the 
barbarous — between  culture  and  savagery. 
Interpreting  the  command  as  the  language 
of  symbol,  we  may  regard  the  ' '  Euphrates' ' 
as  the  boundary  between  the  material  and 
immaterial — between  the  land  where  there  is 
God,  and  Christ,  and  hope,  and  the  realms 
of  outer-darkness.  And  the  character  of  these 
Angels  to  be  loosed  must  be  determined  by 
the  results  of  their  loosing,  and  these  are 
awful  in  the  extreme.  The  announcing 
voice  may  well  give  warning  of  coming  woe. 
They  are  none  other  than  Satanic  agencies — 
spirits  of  evil,  that  in  the  working  out  of 
"  the  mystery  of  iniquity,"  He  who  sits  upon 
THE  THRONE,  suffers  to  visit  the  earth,  and 
to  influence  and  energize  those  who  will  not 
obey  the  truth. 


Scene  I  St.  REVELATION,  9:  107 

These  Angels  are  not  to  be  confounded 
with  those  mentioned  in  chapter  7:1.  The 
position  and  mission  of  those  Angels  of  the 
winds  are  entirely  different.  They  are  holy 
ones,  and  throughout  these  prophetic  times 
they  are  still  at  their  posts  holding  in  reserve 
the  agencies  of  Divine  judgments,  while 
these  emissaries  of  evil  are  pursuing  theii 
mission.  In  chapter  16:13,  we  read  of  an 
occurrence  not  unlike  the  one  we  are  con- 
sidering. Here  the  spirits  are  three.  The}- 
come  out  of  the  mouth  (the  device  and  coun- 
sel) of  the  dragon  and  his  materialistic 
agencies.  They  are  not  identical,  and  yet 
they  probably  stand  in  close  relations.  These 
four  Angels  of  darkness  are  the  sowers  of  the 
tares — the  scatterers  of  the  seeds  of  endless 
heresies  throughout  Christendom,  and  are 
thus  preparing  the  way  for  these  unclean 
spirits. 

V.  75.  The  R.  V.  translates— "  Which 
had  been  prepared  for  the  hour,  and  day,  and 
month,"  &c.  From  this  improved  reading, 
the  inference  is  that  the  reference  is  to  the 
arrival  of  an  appointed  time.  The  fullness 
of  the  time  had  now  come,  even  to  the  very 
hour,  when  these  Angels  were  to  be  loosed 
and  sent  on  their  errand.  And  what  an  awful 
one  it  is — ' '  for  to  slay  the  third  part  of  men. ' ' 
We  must  take  this,  as  we  are  doing  the  other 


108  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.      Act  III. 

portions  of  the  vision,  in  a  spiritual  sense. 
It  is  a  spiritual  slaughter  that  is  intended. 
These  emissaries  of  Satan  are  probably  those 
''seducing  spirits"  of  whose  appearance  in 
the  latter  times,  the  Divine  spirit  warns  the 
Church.  *  They  are  to  teach  ' '  doctrines  of 
devils,  and  speaking  lies  in  h)  pocrisy. "  As  a 
consequence,  there  is  to  be  "a  falling 
away,  "t  Nominal  Christendom  will  make 
shipwreck  of  its  faith.  Men  will  cease  to 
' '  endure  sound  doctrine. ' '  After  their  own 
carnal  and  materialistic  desires  shall  they 
heap  to  themselves  teachers,  having  itching- 
ears;  and  they  shall  turn  away  their  ears 
from  the  truth,  and  shall  be  turned  unto 
fables.  J  Are  we  in  the  beginning  of  these 
times?  Have  these  Angels  of  darkness  been 
let  loose  upon  Christendom?  And  in  the 
higher-criticism,  in  agnosticism,  and  univer- 
salism,  and  unitarianism,  and  conditional 
immortality  theories,  in  Theosophism,  and 
Positivism,  and  scepticism  that  is  everywhere 
cropping  up  in  a  thousand  forms, — are  these 
'*the  army  of  the  horsemen"  that  these 
Angels  of  the  Euphrates  are  to  lead  forth  on 
the  earth?  Surely  ' '  perilous  times' '  must 
result  from  their  presence.  For  from  these 
teachings  men  will   ' '  become  lovers  of  their 


*1  Tim.  4:1.     t2  Thess.  2:3.     i2  Tim.  4:3,  4. 


Scene  I sL  REVELATION,  9:  109 

own  selves,  covetous,  boasters,  proud,  blas- 
phemous, .  .  .  lovers  of  pleasure  more 
than  lovers  of  God;  having  the  form  of  god- 
liness, but  denying  the  power  thereof, "  *  By 
these  ' '  doctrines  of  devils  ' '  shall  the  third 
of  men  be  slain. 

In  executing  their  mission  these  Angels 
send  forth  an  immense  body  of  horsemen. 
Attention  has  been  called  to  the  fact  that  the 
horses  in  this  symbol,  rather  than  the  riders, 
are  the  conspicuous  agencies,  and  the  questions 
asked  are  these,  ' '  Is  the  intimation  intended 
that  these  riders  (heretics)  are,  in  many 
respects,  not  so  bad  as  their  horses  (death- 
breathing  heresies)?  Or  is  it  suggested  that 
the  horses  (the  heresies)  ordinarily  run  away 
with  them  (the  heretics);  that  they  speedily 
lose  control  over  the  movements  originated 
by  themselves?  Possibly  both  thoughts  are 
intimated,  "t 

V.  ig.  "  Their  power  ^^ — the  power  of 
this  legion  of  horsemen  (heresies),  "is  in 
their  mouth,  and  in  their  tails. ' '  The  mouth 
is  the  organ  of  speech.  It  is  by  speech,  and 
its  adjunct,  the  printing  press,  that  they 
disseminate  their  "lies."  "  And  their  tails 
were  like  serpents,  and  had  heads" — their 
doctrines  were  Satanic.      They  were  inspired 


*2  Tim.  3:1,  &c.     fLange's  Com.  on  Rev.,  p.  200. 


110  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Act  III. 

by  that  "old  serpent,  the  devil,  which  de- 
ceiveth  the  whole  world. ' '  *  They  related  to 
the  earth,  and  the  worship  of  devils,  and  the 
idolatry  of  gold  and  silver,  &c.  f 

In  chapter  12:4,  it  is  the  Dragon's  tail  that 
' '  drew  the  third  part  of  the  stars  of  heaven, 
and  did  cast  them  to  the  earth."  Both 
symbols,  we  think,  relate  to  the  same  apostasy, 
and  represent  the  wisdom  of  the  world  made 
all  powerful  by  Satanic  energy  and  cunning. 

The  results  produced  by  these  spiritual 
world-forces  under  the  6th  trumpet,  J  are 
precisely  analagous  to  those  produced  under 
the  6th  seal  ||  by  the  material  world-forces. 
In  the  former  symbol  (the  6th  seal),  the 
scene  closes  with  the  political  world-forces 
(Gentile  dominion)  in  upheaval  and  conster- 
nation because  of  expectant  §  evil.  And  so  it 
is  left.  The  final  catastrophy  is,  to  the  Seer, 
still  pending.  Meanwhile  his  attention  is 
called  to  other  considerations.  So  here  we 
have  precisely  the  same  conditions.  There 
are  seven  trumpets.  Six  describe  the  spirit- 
ual apostasy  of  Christendom.  Of  Christen- 
dom, not  of  the  Apostate  Church.  Keep  this 
distinction  clear.  It  is  the  utter  abandon- 
ment of  Christianity  for   ' '  the   doctrines  of 


*Rev.  12:9.     fV.  20.     +Vs,  20,^1.     ||6:15-17.     JJLu.  21 
25.  26. 


Scene  I  St.  REVELATION,  9:  111 

devils,"  through  the  agencies  of  spiritual 
world-forces  (*' damnable  heresies"),  that 
these  trumpet  symbols  treat  of.  The  sixth 
trumpet,  like  the  sixth  seal,  brings  its 
apostacy  to  the  full,  with  its  terrible  conse- 
quences realized;  but  Christendom  still  de- 
fiant and  impenitent,  and  persevering  in  its 
wicked  courses.  And  just  at  this  point  the 
curtain  drops.  The  history  of  this  apostacy, 
as  in  the  case  of  the  defiant  world-power  in 
the  sixth  seal,  is  for  the  present  suspended. 
The  next  scene  opens,  and  in  it  our  attention 
is  fascinated  by  new  objects  and  histories. 
There  is  yet  another  trumpet,  the  seventh 
and  last.  But  the  Seer  is  not  ready  for  it. 
When  it  sounds,  it  announces  development 
— a  progressive  movement  along  the  whole 
line  of  the  prophetic  history. 

According  to  our  scheme  of  interpretation 
the  apostate  Church  in  chapters  2:  and  3:, 
the  God  defying  world-power  under  the  6th 
seal,  the  Redeemed  Church  under  the  same 
seal,  and  apostate  Christendom  under  the  6th 
trumpet,  are  brought  down  to  the  same 
moment  of  time.  The  Redeemed  Church  is 
removed  that  it  may  escape  those  things  that 
are  coming  on  the  earth,  the  others  are 
awaiting  results  with  anxious  forebodings. 
In  prophetic  time  this  will  bring  us  some- 
where from  the  beginning  to   the  middle  of 


112  •  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.        Act  III. 

Daniel's  last  week — the    week  of  the  anti- 
christ. 

The  seventh  trumpet  will  call  us  to  an 
onward  movement  in  the  prophetic  history. 
But  the  Seer  is  not  yet  ready  for  it.  This 
"second  woe"  trumpet  has  not  entirely 
told  its  story.  The  Church — the  witnessing, 
faithful  Church,  has  a  deep  and  painful 
interest  in  it,  and  this  seventh  trumpet  must 
not  sound  until  these  things  are  set  forth  so 
far  as  Divine  purposes  will  allow. 


Revelation  io. 

Act  III.     8:  to  ii:  1-15. 

Scene  2d — Chaps.  10:11:  1-15. 

Location. — Mostly  on  earth. 

Dramatis  Personce. — Angels,  the  two  Wit- 
nesses, the  Beast,  the  Seer,  dwellers  upon 
the  earth. 

Time. — Synchronizing  mostly  with  the 
period  of  the  6th  seal,  and  6th  trumpet. 

This  scene  is  located  principally  on  the 
earth.  It  concerns  mostly  the  witnessing 
Church.  "Ye  are  my  witnesses,"*  is  the 
Lord's  parting  announcement  to  his  disciples. 
And  from  that  day  to  this  the  world  has  never 
been   without   witnesses,  and   never  will  be, 


*Acts  1:8. 


Scene  2d.  REVELATION,  10:  113 

even  to  ' '  the  end. "  It  is  concerning  the 
persecutions,  sufferings,  death,  revival,  and 
translation  of  these  witnesses,  that  we  are 
now  to  hear.  The  events  recorded,  especially 
in  the  nth  chapter,  belong  to  "  the  latter 
days."  They  synchronize  with  events  con- 
nected with  the  6th  seal  and  the  6th  trumpet, 
and  they  bring  us  possibly  to  Daniel's  last 
week. 

Chap.  lo:  The  position  of  the  Seer  seems 
to  have  changed.  At  first*  he  was  sum- 
moned into  the  heavenlies,  a  location  which 
he  has  continued  to  occupy  to  the  present 
time.  Now,  however,  he  is  seeing  and 
speaking,  as  from  the  earth,  f 

The  symbols  of  this  scene  are  difficult  of 
explanation — '  'things  hard  to  be  understood. ' ' 
We  must  be  satisfied  in  regarding  them  as 
events  yet  future,  and  connected  with  the 
Witnessing  Church— the  "little  flock,"  the 
Church  that  is  faithful  and  true.  We  have 
had  recognition  of  this  Church  before  (7 :)  as 
the  Sealed  ones — the  separated  from  the 
Apostate  Church,  the  protected,  and  at  last, 
by  translation,  the  Church  delivered  from 
impending  earth  judgments. 

V.  I.  John  sees  "another  mighty  Angel 
come  down  from  heaven,  clothed  with  a  cloud; 


^Chap.  4.     tlO:l,  8,  9. 


114  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.         Act  III. 


and  a  rainbow  upon  his  head;  and  his  face 
was  as  it  were  the  sun,  and  his  feet  as  pillars 
of  fire. ' '  This  Angel,  by  most  expositors,  is 
identified  with  Christ.  But  the  similarity  of 
this  appearance  with  those  of  Rev.  1:13,  etc., 
Dan,  7:13,  is  not  a  certain  guide  to  such  a 
conclusion,  for  we  have  a  somewhat  similar 
description  of  one  who  evidently  is  not  the 
Lord  Christ.      Dan.  10:5,  etc.,  cf.  V.   13,  etc. 

V.  2s  In  his  hand  is  "  <^  little  book ' ' . 
There  are  four  books  brought  to  oui  notice 
in  the  Apocalypse:  The  sealed  book  in  the 
hand  of  him  who  sat  upon  THE  THRONE  ;  * 
this  little  book  in  the  hand  of  the  Angel  ;  t 
the  books  of  general  record ;  %  the  book  of 
life.  II  This  book  contrasted  with  the  others 
is  called  "little,"  because  perhaps  it  con- 
tained the  record  of  only  the  Church,  with  a 
glimpse  of  the  glory  that  should  follow.  It 
was  therefore  small  in  size,  and  could  quickly 
be  read  through. 

V.  4.  ^^Seveii  thunders  .  .  .  uttered  their 
voices.^ ^  We  listen  to  the  thunder  with  an 
instinctive  consciousness  that  it  is  God's 
voice,  that  he  is  speaking  from  the  heavens. 
Here  again  we  have  the  number  seven  denot- 
ing completeness — perfection.  In  the  symbol 
we  recognize  a  Divine  revelation.    God  makes 


5:1.     t  10:2.     %  20:12.     ||  20:12,  15,  21:27. 


Scene  2d.  REVELATION,  10:  115 

known  to  his  servant  some  things  that  must 
shortly  come  to  pass.  But  when  the  Seer 
would  write  in  compliance  with  previous  in- 
structions,* he  is  commanded:  ''seal  up  those 
things  which  the  seven  thunders  uttered,  and 
write  them  not."  Here,  as  in  Chap.  5,  seal- 
ing stands  for  locking  up — concealing,  f 
These  utterances  remain  therefore  among  the 
' '  hidden  things. ' '  Many  have  surmized  that 
they  relate  to  the  Reformation  of  the  15th 
and  1 6th  centuries.  But  when  the  words  are 
sealed,  who  can  tell  ? 

V.  5.  The  Angel  still  occupies  the  same 
position  that  he  did  when  the  seer  first  beheld 
him.  J  And  what  a  grand  conception  is  here 
given  us!||  This  mighty  Angel  of  such  ma- 
jestic proportions,  and  glorious  appearance,  § 
is  seen  standing  on  sea  and  land — significant 
perhaps  of  world-power  and  culture  beneath 
his  feet  ready  to  be  trodden  upon;  with  right 
hand  uplifted  to  heaven;  with  leonine  voice 
that  penetrates  to  the  uttermost  bounds  of  the 
creation,  and  that  asseverates  "by  him  that 
liveth  forever  and  ever"  the  verity  of  the 
proclamation  about  to  be  announced;  with  all 
intelligences  in  the  universe  attentive,  ex- 
pectant, and  awaiting  the  things  to  be  re- 
vealed;   this    is   the   unfolding  of  a  picture 


^1:19.     tis.  29:11,  12.     .tV.2.     ||Dan.l2:7.     ^V.  2. 


116  THE  APOCALYTIC  DRAMA.        Act  III. 

surpassingly  grand.  We  surely  need  to  be 
'•in  the  spirit"  to  grasp  it  in  its  splendor  and 
magnitude.  "There  shall  be  time  no  longer; 
but  in  the  days  of  the  voice  of  the  seventh 
Angel,  when  he  is  about  to  sound,  then  is 
finished  the  mystery  of  God,  according  to  the 
good  tidings  which  he  declared  to  his  servants 
the  prophets"  (R,  V.). 

Wonderful  and  welcome  announcement.  It 
is  the  consummation  longand  devoutly  wished 
for.  x\ngels  have  ever  desired  to  look  into 
these  things;*  disciples  asked — "when?"t 
The  souls  beneath  the  Altar  cried — "how 
long!"t  and  the  whole  creation  together 
with  the  struggling  Church,  have  ever  been 
groaning  within  themselves — "  waiting. "  1| 
Welcome  indeed  is  the  announcement  of  the 
mighty  Angel  to  those  who  have  "  ears  to 
hear." 

V.  6.  "  There  shall  be  time  no  longer  ^^ — 
time  shall  no  longer  be,  i.  e. ,  the  appointed 
delay  is  at  an  end.  That  ' '  little  season  ' ' 
announced  to  the  inquirers  beneath  the 
Altar§  has  now  reached  its  limit.  If  It  was 
needed  for  the  sealing  of  the  entire  number 
of  "the  elect,"**  and  it  was  symbolized  by 
the  four  restraining  Angels,  ft 


*1  Peter  1:12.     fMatt.  24:;^.     jRev.  6:10,  &c.     ||Rom. 
8:22,  &c.      g6:ll.     1[Ezek.  12:27,28.     **7.     tf7:l,  3. 


Scene  2d.  REVELATION,  4:1-8.  117 

V.  7.  This  consummation  is  now  near  at 
hand.  It  only  waits  the  voice  of  the  seventh 
Angel.  When  he  shall  begin  to  sound,  it 
will  be  the  signal  to  the  waiting  universe 
that  ' '  the  myster}'  of  God ' '  is  finished. 
The  wisdom  of  God  has  been  working  out 
the  problem  of  evil  in  the  presence  of  his 
intelligences.  Our  earth  has  been  the  arena 
— the  central  location,  perhaps,  where  these 
puzzling  questions  have  been  presented. 
The  presence  of  disloyalty  and  discord;  the 
unequal  struggle  between  the  good  and  the 
evil;  the  apparent  triumph  of  the  powers  ol 
darkness;  the  heir  sent  to  the  vineyard  and 
cast  out  and  killed;  Satan  still  allowed  in 
the  heavens;  his  work  upon  the  earth  un- 
hindered; the  Lord  Christ  not  upon  his 
throne,  and  his  people  still  struggling  and 
suffering  because  of  their  witness  for  him; 
these  are  some  of  the  mysteries  of  God.  The 
purposes  long  hidden  away  from  his  creatures, 
are  now  to  be  unfolded.  The  problem  of 
evil  has  been  solved,  and  when  the  seventh 
x\ngel  sounds,  great  voices  in  heaven  will  be 
heard  saying:  "The  kingdom  of  this  world 
has  become  the  kingdom  of  our  Lord,  and  of 
his  Christ ;  and  he  shall  reign  forever  and 
ever."*     (R.  V.) 

*v.  15. 


118  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Act  III. 

V.  p.  The  Seer  is  commanded  to  take 
the  little  book  from  the  hand  of  the  Angel, 
and  to  eat  it.  To  eat,  as  the  mind  eats,  by 
reception  and  apprehension.  It  is  an  open 
book,  and  therefore  easily  read  and  under- 
stood. The  effect  of  this  eating  is  at  first 
sweetness  to  the  mouth,  but  afterward  bitter- 
ness to  the  inward  parts.  There  was  a 
charming  fascination  experienced  as  the  un- 
foldings  of  the  prophecy  revealed  to  him  the 
good  things  that  were  to  come;*  but  his 
after  reflections,  when  he  came  to  consider 
the  apostasies,  blasphemies,  and  terrible 
judgments,  and  the  much  tribulation  of  the 
Church, — these  things  cause  him  great  bitter- 
ness— heaviness  of  soul. 

V.  II.  "  Thou  must  prophesy^  &c. "  To 
prophesy  is  used  in  both  Testaments  not 
only  as  fore-telling,  but  also  in  the  sense  of 
forth-telling,  announcing,  teaching.  It  is 
probably  in  this  larger  sense  that  it  is  used 
here.  The  explanation  given  by  some  ex- 
positors is,  that  at  the  Reformation  John's 
teachings  would  be  revived  in  the  Church, 
and  thus,  though  dead,  he  would  yet  be 
prophesying. 

Chap,  ii:  All  expositors  concur  in  regard- 
ing the  symbols  of  this  chapter  as  difficult 


Dan.  7:28,  8:27,  10:  1-4,  10,  17,  21. 


Scene  2d.  REVELATION,  11:1-15.  119 

beyond  any  others.  Alford  says:  ''No 
solution  at  all  approaching  to  a  satisfactory 
one  has  ever  yet  been  given  of  any  one  of 
these  points. ' ' 

V.  I.  A  measuring  reed  or  rod,  is  given 
the  Seer,  and  he  is  required  to  ' '  measure  the 
temple  of  God,  and  the  Altar,  and  them  that 
worship  therein."*  The  measuring  must  be 
taken  in  a  figurative  sense. 

"  The  Tefnple.^^  According  to  the  theory 
on  which  we  are  basing  our  structural  arrange- 
ment of  this  Book,  at  this  stage  of  the 
prophecy,  we  are  at,  or  about,  the  beginning 
of  Daniel's  last  week.  If  so,  Israel  must  at 
this  time  be  restored,  f  and  their  city  must 
be  in  their  possession. 

To  what  then  is  the  reference  here?  Is  it 
to  Israel  after  the  flesh,  and  to  Jerusalem, 
and  to  the  semblance  of  a  temple  service  that 
they  may  have  in  that  day?  Or,  are  we  to  re- 
gard the  imagery  of  this  vision  as  symbolic, 
and  treat  it  as  we  have  done  that  of  all  the 
others?  Israel,  we  have  said,  will  be  re- 
stored at  this  time.  But  they  will  be  re- 
stored to  their  land  in  unbelief.!  It  is  not 
probable  that  there  will  be  any  attempt,  or 
even  disposition,  to  erect  a  temple.      Syna- 


*Ezek.  40:3,  &c.;  42:15,  &c.  Rev.  21.15,  &c  2  Kings 
21:13.  tSee  p.  %,  &c.,  and  32,  &c.  tJer.  31:81,  &c. 
Ezek.  20:  40-45.    39:27,  28.  Joel  2.    Zach.  12:10.  &c..  13: 


120  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.         Act  III. 

gogue  worship  will  be  the  most  that  they 
will  aspire  to.  And  it  is  not  until  Israel  shall 
behold  their  Priest-King,  and  shall  welcome 
him  with — "Blessed  is  he  that  cometh  in 
the  name  of  the  I^ord, " — it  is  not  until  then, 
that  this  will  be  the  holy  city,  and  that  the 
glories  of  the  temple  service  will  be  restored.  * 
The  events  mentioned  in  verse  eighth,  and 
which  are  connected  with  the  city  ' '  where 
our  Lord  was  crucified,"  clearly  indicate  the 
fact  of  a  restored  Israel  at  this  time,  and  the 
attitude  they  will  then  assume  toward  the 
witnesses  for  Jesus. 

Mount  Moriah  and  its  temple  is  undoubt- 
edly the  picture  here  presented  to  the  Seer. 
H^  beholds  it  in  all  its  glories.  But  temple, 
and  altar,  and  outer  court,  are  not.  They 
were  things  of  the  past.  The  things  there- 
fore seen  in  the  vision  must  be  symbolic, 
and  their  relation  must  be  to  the  Church, 
and  to  the  God-defying  world-power!  If  we 
except  the  statements  of  the  eighth  verse, 
there  is  nothing  in  the  symbols  of  this 
chapter  that  can  fit  in  with  Israel  after  the 
flesh.  Then,  as  now,  judging  from  verse 
eighth,  they  will  be  antagonistic  to  the 
witnesses  for  Jesus.  If  we  will  look  for  their 
history  at  this  special  point  of  time  as  given 


*Ezek   40:  &c.,  &c. 


Scene  2d.  REVEIvATION,  11:1-15.  121 

US  in  other  Scriptures,  we  will  find  that  it  is 
entirely  different  from  events  as  here  narrated. 
The  Church — the  true  Church,  and  the 
World,  are  clearly  the  subjects  of  this 
prophecy.  As  evidence  of  this,  note  the  fact, 
that  as  in  the  symbol  (6:)  of  the  downward 
career  of  the  material  world-force,  there  is 
attached  a  prophecy  of  the  condition  of  the 
true  Church  (7:);  so  to  the  history  of  the 
spiritual  world -force  (9:),  there  is  appended 
in  this  chapter  (11:  1-15)  we  are  now  con- 
sidering, a  history  of  precisely  similar  import 
— a  body  of  faithful  ones,  under  the  symbol 
of  two  witnesses,  witnessing,  suffering,  and 
eventually  translated.  We  must  therefore 
regard  the  two  histories  as  one,  and  relating 
to  the  same  subject,  viz. :  The  true  Church. 

We  interpret  then  the  temple  and  its  altar- 
court  with  its  worshipers,  as  representing 
the  Church.  The  Church  visible  and  invis- 
ible, and  its  worshipers  of  all  kinds,  the  true 
and  the  false.  The  Seer  is  to  measure  them 
by  some  spiritual  standard,  and  is  to  see 
whether  they  come  up  to  the  requirements. 
And  this  is  perfectly  in  harmony  with  what 
we  are  elsewhere  told.  We  are  nearing  '  'the 
end."  The  World  is  ripe  for  judgment. 
The  time  has  come,  and  it  must  have  its 
beginning  ' '  at  the  house  of  God. ' '  "^   And  here 

♦1  Pet.  4:17.     Ezek.  9:6. 


122  THH  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Act  III. 


it  is.  Perhaps  it  is  at  this  time  and  to  this 
assembly,  that  the  warning  cry  of  chap.  18:4, 
is  being  raised — ''Come  out  of  her  my 
people. ' ' 

V.  2,  "  The  court  that  is  without.,'^''  i.  e. 
The  world.  It  is  not  to  be  measured.  It  be- 
longs to  the  Gentiles,  to  Gentile  dominion. 
It  is  still  under  the  sway  of  this  Godless 
power.  No  need  of  measuring  it.  It  has 
been  judged  already.  See  this  judgment  in 
chaps.  6:  and  9:,  and  we  shall  learn  more  of 
it  in  connection  with  events  that  follow  the 
voice  of  the  7  th  trumpet. 

This  "Court,"  the  World,  is  given  into 
the  hand  of  Gentile  dominion — the  great  and 
dreadful  Beast,  and  ' '  the  holy  city  ' '  even,  the 
true  Church,  "  shall  they  tread  under  foot." 

This  prophecy  is  to  be  carefully  distin- 
guished from  that  in  Luke  21:24.  There  the 
prophecy  is  concerning  Jerusalem,  the  Jeru- 
salem of  our  Ivord's  day.  There  are  no 
references  in  that  prophecy  to  temple,  altar, 
and  courts,  nor  is  the  characteristic  ' '  holy  ' ' 
applied  to  it.  There  it  is  the  material  city  and 
its  inhabitants  that  are  to  be  given  up  to  Gen- 
tile dominion.  The  temple  and  altar  are  not 
excepted.  The  whole  city,  and  all  its  be- 
longings, are  given  over,  and  that  too  for  a 
prolonged  and  indefinite  period — "  until  the 
times  of  the  Gentiles  be  fulfilled. ' '      But  here 


Scene  2d.  REVKLATION,  11:1-15.  128 


the  language  is  clearly  symbolical.  It  ap-» 
pertains  to  places  and  conditions  that  have 
ceased  to  be,  and  must  therefore  be  taken  in 
a  spiritual  sense. 

If  the  temple,  and  altar,  and  them  that 
worship  there,  are  symbolic  and  figurative, 
then  consistency  requires  that  the  reference 
to  "  the  holy  city  "  should  also  be  so  regarded. 
If  the  temple,  &c. ,  stands  for  the  true  priest- 
hood who  alone  have  a  right  to  enter  and  to 
minister  within  its  precincts;  then  "  the 
holy  city"  must  stand  for  the  holy  people 
who  alone  have  a  right  to  inhabit  it. 

This  "holy  city  "—the  faithful  and  true 
Church,  shall  Gentile  power  tread  under 
foot.  This  it  has  always  done,  as  will  be 
seen  in  chaps.  0:  and  9:.  But  just  at  this 
special  time,  probably  the  beginning  of 
Daniel's  last  week,  there  seems  to  be  given 
it  larger  license,  as  the  symbolic  language 
and  prophetic  statements  that  follow,  indi- 
cate. 

The  time  here  designated  (v.  2)  for  this 
treading  under  foot  becomes,  after  this,  an 
important  factor  in  our  considerations  and 
interpretations.  We  shall  now  continue  to 
meet  with  it,  and  to  find  it  linked  with  most 
of  the  important  histories  down  to  "the  end." 

The  period  here  designated  is  ' '  forty  and 
two  months"  =3  ^<  years.      In  the  next  verse 


124  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Ad  III. 

(3)  we  are  told  that  the  ' '  two  witnesses  shall 
prophesy  a  thousand  two  hundred  and  three 
score    days"  =3^      years.      The     "Woman 
clothed  with  the  sun  "  is  to  be  in  the  wilder- 
ness (12:6  and   14)  "a  time,  and  times,   and 
half  a  time  (1260  days,  v.  6)=3^  years,  and 
power  is  given  the  Beast  (13:5)  for  the  same 
period.      Now  observe  that  this  note  of  time 
is   conspicuous   also   in   Daniel's  prophecies. 
We  have  it  in  the  form — '^  a  time,  and  times, 
and   the  dividing  of  time,"  i.  e.,  one  year, 
two  years,  and  half  a  year=3J/<  years,  (7:25, 
12:7,    cf    Rev.    12:6,   and   14).      In  Daniel's 
prophecy   concerning   the   last   week    of  his 
seventy,  his  week  is  to  be  halved  by  impor- 
tant events.      During  the  first  half,  a  cove- 
nant is  to  be  made  between   restored  Israel 
and     "  the    Prince  "     of    the    people    who 
destroyed   the   city   after  the   cutting   off  of 
Messiah.      But    in    the    midst    of   the    week 
(9:27),  it  is  to  be  broken.      Now,  three  and 
a  half  {2>y^)i  ^^^  number  of  our  consideration, 
is  the  half  of  seven,    and  let   it  be  further 
noted,    that  Daniel's   use  of  that  number  is 
always   in   connection   with     "the  Prince," 
the   covenant  breaker,    the  blasphemer  and 
oppressor,  the  anti-christ.      In  meeting  with 
this   number  {T^yi    years)   again   in  these,  as 
we   believe,  closing  prophetic  records  of  the 
world's  history,  we  are  irresistibly  led  to  the 


Scene  2d.  REVELATION,  11:1-15.  125 

inquiry — Are    the    two    prophetic    eras  the 
same?     Are    we    in    Daniel's    last     week? 
Everything  tends  to  strengthen  that  impres- 
sion.   And  we  must  not  omit  calling  attention 
to  the  fact   that  in    Daniel's    prophecy*    we 
have  a  similar  scene  to  the  one  we  have  been 
considering  in  Rev.  jo:6.      Danielf  sees  the 
man  clothed  in  linen,  standing  on  the  water 
of  the  river,    with   hands  lifted  to  heaven, 
taking  a  similar  oath,   that  the  desolations 
concerning  the  holy  people   (Israel),  should 
not  be    prolonged  beyond    "a  time,   times, 
and  half  a    time."     In   both    instances  the 
Angel's   oath   precedes    this  specified   time, 
and  limits  the  events  they  speak  of  to  this  so 
well  defined  period.      Are  these  two  periods 
then  one  and  the  same?     We  think  so.     We 
think  that  they  refer  to  Daniel's  last  week. 
In   the  Angel's   oath   in  Daniel's  prophecy, 
however,    the   three  and  a  half  (3^)  years 
have  reference  to  the  last  half  of  his  week, 
which  will  be   the  period  of  Israel's  great 
tribulation,  growing  out  of  their  connection 
with  this  prince,  and   the  broken  covenant; 
while   in   this   oath   in   the   Revelation,    the 
reference  is  evidently  to  the  first  half  of  this 
same  week.      During  this  first  half  Israel  and 
"the  Prince"  will  be  in  agreement,  and  will 


*12:7.     112:7. 


126  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.      Ad  III. 


be  of  one  mind  in  their  treatment  of  ''the 
Witnesses."* 

If  our  explanation  is  correct,  then  the 
treading  down  of  "the  holy  city,"  the  true 
Church — the  Church  of  the  sealed  ones,  is 
the  subject  of  this  prophecy,  and  is  continued 
on  to  verse  fifteen  (15);  and  its  time  is  the  first 
half  of  Daniel's  last  week. 

Recall  the  history  of  the  sealed  ones  (7 :). 
We  brought  it  down  to  the  translation, 
which  we  supposed  would  be  about  the  mid- 
dle of  Daniel's  last  week.  Under  different 
symbols  and  names,  we  have  heref  we  think, 
a  repetition  of  the  same  history.  The  first 
was  a  history  of  the  true  Church  in  its  rela- 
tions to  the  material  world-forces;  this  sec- 
ond is  a  history  of  the  same  Church  in  con- 
nection with  spiritual  world-forces.  Both 
histories  run  parallel  with  each  other,  and  are 
identical.  Three  and  a  half  {y/i)  years  be- 
fore the  translation  (the  first  half  of  Daniel's 
week),  the  power  to  tread  down  "  the  holy 
city,"  will  be  granted  the  anti-christ,  the 
Beast  that  ascendeth  out  of  the  bottomless 
pit  (V.  7).  He  will  at  this  time  be  coming 
to  the  front.  For  his  own  crafty  purposes 
he  will  have  made  his  covenant  with  restored 
Israel,  and  will  be   promoting   the  interests 


*Rev.  11:8.     ]\\\l-lb. 


Scene  2d.  REVELATION,  11:1-15.  127 

of  the  material  Jerusalem;  but  the  true 
Church  will  be  under  his  heel.  The  wit- 
nesses for  Jesus  throughout  the  World,  will 
be  the  objects  of  his  hate  and  persecution, 
and  it  will  continue  for  three  and  a  half 
years,  down  to  the  translation.  This  event 
(the  translation)  will  be  immediate!}^  followed 
by  the  voice  of  the  7  th  Angel  (V.  15),  and 
this  is  the  date  (the  middle  of  Daniel's  last 
week)  to  which  we  have  brought  down  all 
the  histories. 

K  J.  "  My  two  witnesses. ' '  As  witness- 
ing can  only  be  for  Jesus,*  it  would  seem 
that  it  must  be  Jesus  speaking  here.  But 
that  does  not  necessarily  follow.  At  the 
opening  of  the  Book,  we  are  told  that  Jesus 
sent  and  signified  the  things  to  be  made 
known  by  his  Angel  (1:1).  He  is  here  prob- 
ably speaking  by  his  Angel,  who  imperson- 
ates him.  An  instance  of  this  occurs  in 
chap.  22:  6-10.  The  Angel  emphatically 
impersonates  the  Lord — "Behold,  /come 
quickly;"  and  in  the  next  breath  we  find 
him  refusing  the  offered  adoration,  and 
announcing  himself  as  a  "  fellow-servant. ' ' 
See  also  v.  16. 

A  peculiarity  of  these  two  witnesses  is, 
that  ' '  they  shall  prophesy     .      .     .      clothed 


'20:4. 


128  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.      Act  HI. 

in  sackcloth."  Sackcloth  is  a  penitential 
dress.  It  must  indicate  the  distress  of  spirit 
that  will  weigh  down  these  witnesses  in  these 
days  of  their  testimony.  Fortunately  it  will 
be  short  We  are  now  possibly  approaching 
the  times  to  which  the  Lord  referred  when 
he  said:  "Except  those  days  should  be 
shortened,  there  would  no  flesh  be  saved; 
but  for  the  elect's  sake  those  days  shall  be 
shortened."*  The  allotted  time,  for  these 
sackcloth  witnesses,  is  1260  days,  or  3^ 
years. 

And  who  are  these  witnesses?  In  V.  4,  we 
are  told  that  they  ' '  are  the  two  olive  trees, 
and  the  two  candlesticks  standing  before 
the  God  of  the  whole  earth,  "f  From  the 
language  used  they  seem  to  be  persons,  and 
the  powers  attributed  to  them,t  seem  to 
make  this  view  imperative.  Hence  many 
have  supposed  that  two  of  the  old  prophets 
would  be  sent  on  this  mission.  John  has 
been  named  as  one  of  theni-|| 

If,  however,  it  is  admissible  to  explain  the 
language  figuratively,  we  would  suggest  that 
the  two  Testa7nents^  the  Old  and  the  New, 
are  the  two  olive  trees.  The  olive  tree  is 
the  source  of  the  oil  that  supplied  the  Sanc- 
tuary lights.      The  two  Testaments  are  for  us 

"Matt.  24:22.  fZach.  4:3,  11,  &c.  J  Vs.  5  and  6. 
llJohn  21:23, 


Scene  2d.  REVELATION,  11:1-15.  120 

the  source  of  Divine  truth.  This  truth  is 
witnessed-to  in  the  world  by  God's  faithful 
people  through  (i)  preaching,  and  (2)  the 
printed  page — the  two  candlesticks,  or 
lampstands.  But  it  is  the  body  of  true 
believers — the  true  Church  of  all  generations, 
that  always  have  been  the  witnesses,  and 
that  in  this  coming  time,  will  in  a  special 
manner  bear  their  testimony,  clothed  in 
sackcloth. 

Vs.  5  and  6.  We  must  let  these  verses 
pass  without  suggestions.  They  give  per- 
sonality to  the  two  witnesses.  We  must  class 
them  among  ' '  things  hard  to  be  under- 
stood. "  It  is  as  yet  a  sealed  prophecy.  But 
when  the  time  comes,  it  will  speak,  and  will 
not  lie. 

V.  7.  ' '  The  Beast  ...  .  of  the  bottoju- 
less  pif^  is  to  be  the  instrument  in  the  slay- 
ing (silencing)  of  these  witnesses.  Who 
is  he? 

In  Daniel's  vision,*  the  four  winds  of  the 
heavens  ' '  strive  upon  the  great  sea. ' '  The 
sea  symbolizes  peoples,  &c.  ,tand  a  sea  dis- 
turbed by  winds  suggests  social  and  political 
upheavals.  His  four  Beasts,  in  their  ordered 
successions,  were  to  arise  out  of  the  social 
disorders  and  political  convulsions  of  the  na- 


^7:2.     fRev.  17:15. 


130  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.         Act  III. 

tions.  John  in  his  vision,  saw  the  same 
thing.  His  Beast,  the  last  of  Daniel's  four, 
comes  up  also  out  of  the  sea.  His  ' '  ten 
horns"  identify  him  with  Daniel's  last 
Beast.*  Out  from  among  these  horns,  in 
Daniel's  description,  there  comes  up  another 
"little  horn".  In  John's  vision,  it  is  a 
head.  He  sees  it  "as  it  were  wounded  to 
death,  and  his  deadly  wound  was  healed". t 
In  common  with  all  the  others,  he  too  comes 
up  out  of  the  stormy  sea ;  and  we  are  further 
told,  that  he  was  energized  by  the  dragon.  | 
Thus  his  origin  is  not  only  from  the  sea,  but 
from  ' '  the  bottomless  pit ' '  from  whence  he 
received  power,  and  derives  his  spirit  of 
hatred  against  the  people  of  God.  ' '  The 
Beast  out  of  the  bottomless  pit  "  is  then  the 
"little  horn"  of  Daniel's  vision. ||  He  is 
also  "the  Prince"  of  his  last  week,§ 
and  he  is  the  one  who  in  our  Book  is  de- 
scribed! as  the  head  wounded  to  death,  and 
afterwards  healed.  In  a  word,  he  is  the 
Anti-christ,  of  whom  Paul  tells  us  in  2 
Thess.  2:6,  &c.  This  is  the  power  that  is 
allowed  to  make  war  against  these  witnesses, 
"  and  shall  overcome   them,  and  kill  them  " 

(v.  7)- 

V.  S.      "  Their  dead  bodies.^ ^     The  voice 


*7:7,   8.     tl3:3.     JVs.  2,   4,   &c.     ||7:7,  8.     ^9:26,   27. 
P3:3. 


See  tie  2d.  REVELATION,  11:1-15.  131 

of  the  witnessing  Church  is  silenced.  They 
are  to  the  world  as  dead.  Perhaps  a  decree, 
like  that  during  the  French  Revolution,  will 
be  issued  by  the  Beast  from  the  bottomless 
pit.  ' '  The  book  of  the  Lord  ' '  will  be  pro- 
claimed fabulous.  Its  doctrines  will  be  stig- 
matized as  dangerous  to  social  order,  and 
those  who  hold  them  will  be  required  to  de- 
sist from  teaching  them.  And  so  the  wit- 
nesses for  Jesus  and  his  Gospel  of  grace  will 
be  killed.  This  is  not  only  probable,  but 
facts  yet  to  be  brought  to  our  notice,  make 
the  issuing  of  such  an  edict  certain.  In 
commanding  the  worship  of  himself,  the 
Beast  must  prohibit  all  other  worship.  * 

The  dead  bodies  of  these  witnesses  are  to 
lie  "in  the  streets  of  the  great  city,  which 
spiritually  is  called  Sodom  and  Egypt,  where 
also  their  Lord  was  crucified".  That  the 
reference  here  is  to  the  city  of  Jerusalem 
seems  very  clear.  According  to  our  theory 
the  events  now  under  consideration — the  wit- 
nessing, the  killing  of  the  witnesses,  are  con- 
nected with  the  first  half  of  Daniel's  last 
week.  According  to  the  interpretation  given 
elsewhere,  t  Israel  will  at  this  time  be  re- 
stored, and  will  be  in  close  alliance  and 
friendship  with  the  Anti-christ,    "the  Beast 


*13:4,  14,  &c.     tP.  20,  &c.,  and  33,  &c. 


132  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.      Act  III. 


out  of  the  bottomless  pit/'  This  decree 
therefore  may  have  been  issued  from  Jerusa- 
lem, and  so,  the  death  blow  having  been 
struck  in  that  city,  the  dead  bodies  may  be 
said,  in  a  figure,  to  be  seen  there  also. 

Vs.  p,  lo.  "  They  that  dwell  iipoit  the 
earth  shall  rejoice  over  theni.^^  Not  only 
will  Israel  be  in  sympathy  with  the  aspira- 
tions of  the  Beast,  and  with  this  his  decree; 
but  the  earth-Beast  also,*  and  the  harlot  wo- 
man, f  and  all  peoples  of  the  earth.  The 
witnessing  concerning  judgment  to  come, 
and  a  returning  Christ,  and  redemption 
through  the  blood,  has  become  both  distaste- 
ful and  hateful.  The  wisdom  of  the  world 
despises  this  word  of  the  Lord,  and  pro- 
nounces it  false.  The  power  of  the  world  is 
disturbed  by  it,  as  was  Herod  by  the  ques- 
tioning of  the  wise  men4  And  the  harlot 
woman  has  long  ago  hidden  away  this  word, 
and  forbidden  its  use,  and  misrepresented  its 
doctrines.  The  world  is  therefore  weary  of 
it.  The  testimony  of  the  witnesses  is  a  con- 
tinual source  of  alarm.  It  keeps  it  in  a  state 
of  unrest.  It  is  tormented  by  it.  The 
world  rejoices  therefore  because  their  voice 
has  been  silenced. 

Vs.  11^  12.      But  this  rejoicing  is  not  long. 


*13:11,  &c.     tl7:     JMatt.  2: 


Scene  2d.  REVEIvATlON,  11:1-15.  13B 

The  dead  bodies  are  suffered  to  lie  exposed 
and  dishonored  only  for  three  days  and  a 
half  The  1260  days  (v.  3)  are  taken  liter- 
ally. We  must  so  regard  these  three  days 
and  a  half      They  are  literal  days. 

That  our  suggestion  regarding  the  ' '  two 
witnesses' '  may  be  perfectly  clear,  we  will  re- 
state it.  They  are  the  succession  of  true 
believers,  who  in  all  ages  have  testified  for 
God.  They  may  derive  their  designation — 
' '  two  witnesses, ' '  from  the  fact  that  the  two 
scriptures  of  the  Old  and  New  Testament 
are  now  the  sources  from  which  they  draw 
their  doctrine  and  inspiration.  By  means  of 
the  speaking  voice  and  the  printed  page,  the 
true  Church  holds  these  scriptures  forth  as 
the  word  of  life*  to  an  ignorant  or  unbeliev- 
ing world.  This  is  the  position  assigned  to 
the  Church  by  her  Lord  from  the  first,  f  And 
the  true  Church  has  ever  been  a  witnessing 
Church,  basing  its  testimony  on — ''Thus 
saith  the  Lord".  Its  appeal  in  both  dispen- 
sations has  been  to  the  scriptures — "to  the 
law  and  the  testimony".]: 

Now  this  rejoicing  on  account  of  the  kill- 
ing (suppression)  of  the  Word  of  the  Lord, 
and  of  them  who  bear  it,  by  (as  we  have  sug- 


*Phil.  2:16.  fActs  1:8.  %ls.  8:20,  John  5:39,  Matt. 
24:14.  See  Peter's  Ser.  Acts  2:14,  &c.,  and  Stephen's 
Argument,  Acts  7: 


134  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.      Act  III. 


gested)  the  infidel  powers  of  the  world,  is  of 
short  duration.  Three  and  a  half  days  after 
the  issuing  of  the  decree  against  the  scrip- 
tures, there  is  a  revival  of  the  dead  witnesses. 
And  how  is  this  effected?  "The  spirit  of 
life  (v.  ii)  from  God  entered  into  them,  and 
they  stood  upon  their  feet ;  and  great  fear  fell 
upon  them  which  saw  them." 

In  I  Cor.  15:51,  52,  and  in  i  Thess.  4:13 
(&c. ,  the  Apostle  Paul  teaches  that  at  the  re- 
turn of  the  Lord,  his  believing  and  waiting 
ones  will  be  caught  up  to  meet  Him  in  his 
coming.  The  same  fact  seems  to  be  taught 
by  the  Lord  in  his  parable  of  the  ten  virgins 
(Matt.  25:).  Have  we  a  reference  here  to 
this  event? 

The  world  is  ripe  for  judgment.  It 
has  now  perpetrated  its  last  crowning  act  of 
iniquity.  It  has  not  only  refused  to  hear 
sound  doctrine,  but  has  denied  the  Lord  who 
bought  it.  It  has  decreed  God's  word  out  of 
existence,  and  so  far  as  the  will  power  goes, 
has  banished  Him  from  His  throne,  and  it  is 
now  rejoicing  in  its  supposed  triumph.  What 
more  that  is  impious  can  it  do?  Judgment 
will  now  be  surely  swift.  But  the  faithful 
ones — the  sealed  ones,  must  not  be  involved 
in  it.  "Watch,  and  pray  always,"  was  the 
teaching  of  their  Lord,  "that  ye  may  be 
counted  worthy  to  escape  those  things  that 


Scene  2d.  REVELATION,  11:1-15.  135 

shall  come  to  pass. ' '  *  And  these  waiting  ones, 
witnesses  for  their  coming  Lord,  will  surely 
be  removed,  as  Lot  from  Sodom,  before  the 
bursting  of  the  fiery  storm.  And  so  it  is. 
In  one  place  Paul  tells  us — "the  trumpet 
shall  sound;  "t  in  another,  he  says, — "the 
Lord  himself  shall  descend  from  heaven  with 
a  shout,  with  the  voice  of  the  arch-angel,  and 
with  the  trump  of  God;  J  and  here  we  are 
told — "they  (the  witnesses)  heard  a  great 
voice  from  heaven,  (v.  1 2).  And  this  voice,  this 
"trump  of  God,"  gives  no  uncertain  sound. 
To  these  suffering  witnesses  it  is  the  long  ex- 
pected summons — ' '  Come  up  hither.  And  they 
ascended  up  to  heaven  in  a  cloud,"  (v.  12). 
In  a  moment,  in  the  twinkling  of  an  eye, 
they  were  changed,  and  were  with  the  Lord. 
If  we  would  know  what  would  follow  this 
ascension,  read  Chapter  7:9,  to  end,  and 
Chapter  14:1,  &c.  These  are  scenes  in  the 
heavens.  What  of  the  earth?  "Their  ene- 
mies beheld  them' '  in  their  ascending.  Was 
it  to  them  an  ocular  demonstration?  Per- 
haps not.  It  was  sudden,  noiseless,  only 
those  summoned  heard  the  call.  Two  were 
in  the  field,  the  one  was  taken,  and  the  other 
left.  Two  were  grinding,  the  one  was 
taken,    the  other   left.  ||     Their  enemies  mis- 

*Lu.   21:36.     fl  Cor.  15:52.     X\   Thess.    4:in.      ||Matt. 
24:40.41. 


136  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.      Act  III. 

sed  them.  They  learned  of  their  sud- 
den disappearance.  But  whither?  And 
as  this  inquiry  for  the  missing  ones 
would  circle  round  the  earth  with  the  rising 
sun,  the  only  response  to  this  world-wide  cry 
of  alarm  would  be  from  the  word  of  God — 
they  have  been  caught  up  to  meet  their  com- 
ing Lord — they  have  escaped  those  things 
that  are  coming  on  the  earth.  Yes,  the  word 
of  the  Lord  still  lives.  Human  decrees 
cannot  annul  it.  Heaven  and  earth  shall 
pass  away,  but  not  one  jot  or  tittle  of  the 
word.  Men  now  see  the  hand-writing,  and 
realize  the  certainty  of  judgments  that  are 
written  against  them,  and  they  are  "af- 
frighted." For  a  little  moment  they  cease 
from  their  blasphemies,  '  'and  give  glory  to  the 
God  of  heaven"  (v.  13).  But  it  is  not  for 
long.  It  is  the  same  mental  and  spiritual 
condition  that  is  described  at  the  close  of  the 
sixth  seal  and  the  sixth  trumpet.*  The  time 
is  the  same.  The  powers  of  heaven  are 
shaken.  "Men's  hearts  are  failing  them  for 
for  fear,  and  for  looking  after  (expectation  of 
R.  V.)  those  things  which  are  coming  on  the 
earth,  "t  They  are  affrighted,  and  for  a 
moment  seemingly  religious,  but  continue 
utterly  and  hopelessly  Godless. 

*6:12,  &c.  and  9:20,  21-     fLu.  21:26. 


Scene  2d.  REVELATION,  11:15.  137 

V.  14.  '■'■The  second  woe  is  past.''''  It 
synchronizes  with  the  close  of  the  first  act  * 
and  also  with  that  of  the  second,  f  It  brings 
the  Apostate  Chnrch  and  the  rebellious  world 
to  the  hour  of  judgment.  They  are  aware 
of  it,  and  intense  alarm  prevails.  J 

We  are  thus  brought  to  the  beginning  of 
the  last  half  of  Daniel's  Seventieth  Week. 
But  three  and  a  half  years  of  the  appointed 
time  remains.  The  mystery  of  God  is  almost 
finished. 

The  7th  trumpet  is  now  to  be  sounded, 
and  "the  third  woe  cometh  quickly." 


Revelation  11:15,  ^c. 

Act  IV,    11:15,  &c.     12:  to  20:1-4. 

Scene  I  St. — Chp.  11:15,  &c. 

Location. — In  heaven. 

Dramatis  Personcs. — The  Seventh  Trum- 
pet Angel.  The  four  and  twenty  Elders. 
The  Living  Creatures. 

Time. — The  beginning  of  the  2d  half  of 
Daniel's  last  week. 

We  are  now  at  the  beginning  of  the  end. 
When  the  "  7th  angel  sounded,  there  were 
great  voices  in  heaven" — a  mighty  out-burst 
of  rejoicings.     It  is  the  same  grand  choir  that 

*3:14  &c.     t6:  12  &c,  and  9:16  &c     XUx.  21:26. 


138  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.      Ad  IV. 


we  read  of  in  chapter  4:  The  number  of 
the  elect  is  now  completed.  The  Church  of 
the  Redeemed  is  safe  with  its  Lord.  The 
mystery  of  sin  is  almost  finished,  and  there- 
fore the  multitudes  of  the  heavenly  hosts  re- 
joice and  are  glad. 

l\  ij.  The  first  cause  assigned  for  their 
rejoicing  is,  that  "  the  kingdom  of  this  world 
is  become  the  Kingdom  of  our  Lord,  and  of 
his  Christ,  and  that  he  shall  reign  forever 
and  ever."      (R.  V.). 

The  earth  heretofore,  though  divided  up 
among  many  nationalities,  was  virtually  but 
one  kingdom.  "  The  whole  world  lieth  in 
the  evil  one'^  (R.  V.).*  He  is  its  God,t  and 
is  in  possession.  He  is  its  one  head,  and 
gives  his  authority  to  whomsoever  he  wills.  | 
And  thus  will  it  be  after  this.  No  matter 
what  the  future  subdivisions,  it  continues  to 
be  one  kingdom,  but  under  Christ.  || 

V.  ly.  ' '  Thou  hast  taken  to  thee  thy  great 
powej^^^^  &c.  This  is  another  cause  for 
thanksgiving.  When  the  Lord  came  to 
earth  he  emptied  himself  of  majesty  and 
power.  §  He  was  then,  and,  for  the  pur- 
poses of  his  salvation,  he  has  been  ever 
since,  seeming  weakness.  The  very  abjects 
have  scoffed   at   him    and   he   has   remained 


n  John,  5:19.     f^  Cor.  4:4.     tRev.   13:2.     ||Dan.  7:14, 
Lu.  1:32,  &c.     >^Phil.  2:f5,  etc. 


Scene  I  St.       REVKLATION,  11:15,  ETC.  139 

silent.  They  have  spit  upon  him,  and  he 
has  answered  to  never  a  word.  But  all  this 
is  now  of  the  past.  His  purposes  of  grace 
have  been  accomplished,  and  he  is  about  re- 
suming his  "  great  power, "  and  "  he  shall 
reign  forever  and  ever". 

K  i8.  ^^The  nations^'' ^  &c. ,  i.  e.  apos- 
tate Christian  peoples,  those  leagued  with 
the  Anti-christ.  *  Their  anger  is  in  contrast 
with  the  "wrath"  of  the  Lord  God  Al- 
mighty. 

^^The  time  of  the  dead^^^  clearly  those  who 
sleep  in  Jesus.  The  first  resurrection  is  for 
them  only.f  The  time  for  their  judgment 
(in  the  sense  of  reward)  has  come,  j 

' '  The  prophets, ' '  &c.  The  Old  Testament 
church  is  included.  "Them  that  fear  thy 
name,"  is  the  one  feature  that  distinguishes 
them  all. 

'^  Sviall  and  great.^'  The  distinguished 
and  the  inconspicuous.  There  is  a  similar 
antithesis  in  chapters  13:16,  and  19:18. 

This  ends  the  doxology.  It  is  anticipat- 
ive  of  the  end  which  they  about  The 
Throne  knoiv  to  be  near  at  hand. 

V,  ip.  The  opening  of  the  temple  of 
God  in  heaven  follows.  Perhaps  the  doxol- 
ogy and  the  opening  may  have  been  simul- 


Vs.  2:     fRev.  20:5.     tRev.  7:9,  20:4,  &c. 


140  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Act  IV. 


taneous.  Opening  is  disclosing,  making 
known.  The  Divine  purposes  are  now  re- 
vealed to  principalities  and  powers  in  the 
heavenlies.  Hence  their  doxology.  The 
mystery  of  God  is  finished.  The  putting 
forth  of  his  power,  and  the  manifestations 
of  his  glorious  purposes,  as  declared  to  his 
servants,  the  prophets,*  will  from  henceforth 
rejoice  the  hearts  of  his  loyal  subjects.  Even 
Satan,  who  seems  to  be  present,  t  sees  the 
end.  He  knows  that  he  is  to  be  cast  out, 
that  his  time  is  short. 

^^ There  ivere  lightnings,'^^  &c.  These  as 
yet  are  limited  to  the  heavenly  scene.  I'hey 
are  symbolic  of  the  wrath  (v.  1 8)  that  will 
soon  be  poured  out  on  Satan  and  his  king- 
dom. 


Revelation,  12: 

Act  IV.  11:15  &c.,  1 2  :to  20:1-4. 

Scene  2d.  — Chap.    1 2 : 

Location. — Partly  in  the  heavenlies,  and 
partly  on  the  earth.  The  Seer  continues  to 
occupy  a  position  where  he  can  command  all 
that  passes  in  both  locations. 

Dramatis  Personce. — The  woman  clothed 
with  the   sun.      The  Man-Child.      The    Dra- 


*Rev.  10:7.     tRev.  12:9,  12,  18. 


Scene  2d.  REVELATION,  12:  141 


gon.       Michael    and  his  angels.      The  rem- 
nant of  the  woman's  seed. 

Time. — The  beginning  of  the   last  half  of 
Daniel's  70th  week. 

Chp.  12:  We  here  open  on  a  new  scene, 
the  second  in  this  IV.  Act.  The  first  closed 
with  the  representations  of  the  temple  of  God 
opened  in  heaven,  with  its  accompaniments 
of  lightnings  &c.  (11:19).  All  that  follows 
from  the  beginning  of  this  twelfth  chap- 
ter to  verse  five  of  fifteenth,  we  regard  as  in 
a  measure  parenthetic.  The  7th  trumpet 
sounds,  but  the  vial  angels  do  not  at  once 
come  upon  the  scene.  When  the  7th  seal 
is  broken,  we  read  that  "there  was  silence  in 
heaven  about  the  space  of  half  an  hour."*  It 
was  suggested  that  this  was  a  silence  of 
preparation ;  so  to  speak,  the  shifting  and  re- 
adjusting of  scenery,  that  the  Seer  might 
be  the  better  prepared  for  the  new  series  of 
events  to  be  brought  to  his  notice.  So  here. 
We  are  entering  upon  a  new  series  of  events. 
The  previous  histories  will  be  continued.  They 
will  be  resumed  at  their  points  of  discontinu- 
ance. There  will  be  the  same  characters, 
but  they  will  appear  in  new  forms,  and  un- 
der different  circumstances.  The  Seer  needs 
therefore    much     explanation    that  he    may 


*8:1. 


14-4  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Ad  II . 


recognize  these  old  characters,  and  that  he 
may  become  thoroughly  master  of  details. 
For  this  purpose,  there  is  just  here  a  momen- 
tary suspension  of  the  onward  movement  of 
the  prophetic  history.  The  time  for  the 
judgment  has  come,  and  the  world  is  ripe  for 
it,  and  expects  it.  The  mission  of  the  7th 
trumpet  is  to  set  in  motion  the  vial-angels, 
that  the  execution  of  this  judgment  may  be- 
gin. But  the  Seer  must  first  be  made  to  un- 
derstand clearly  the  position  of  things,  and 
their  relations  to  each  other  and  to  coming 
events.  The  Church,  and  the  world  powers, 
and  the  unseen  forces  of  darkness,  will  still 
be  the  historic  subjects  to  be  unfolded  to  him. 
Bnt  he  must  comprehend  the  exact  position  of 
the  Church  at  this  time  in  its  two-fold  rela- 
tion of  visible  and  invisible.  He  must  also 
take  in  the  position  of  the  world-power  in 
its  assumptions,  exaltations,  and  blasphemies. 
The  onward  movement  of  the  history  is  there- 
fore suspended  for  this  purpose.  The  Tem- 
ple being  opened,  the  next  event  in  order 
would  be  the  summons  to  the  seven  vial- 
angels;  but  we  must  wait  until  we  reach  the 
15th  clip,  before  this  summons  is  issued. 
All  between,  from  clip.  12:  to  15:6,  is  there- 
fore parenthetic,  and  for  the  most  part  ex- 
planatory and  preparatory  for  the  judgment 
scene.     These  chapters  contain  a  succession 


Scene  2d.  REVELATION,  12:  143 


of  symbols,  pictures  and  explanations,  that 
are  to  the  Seer,  what  the  scenery,  the  cos- 
tumes, and  the  varied  artistic  combinations 
of  our  modern  stage,  are  to  us — helps  to 
the  better  understanding  of  what  is  said  and 
done  by  the  actors. 

V.  I.  There  appears  to  the  Seer  "a 
great  wonder  in  heaven. "  The  R.  V.  sub- 
stitutes "sign"  for  wonder.  It  is  the  same 
Greek  (o-^jMetov)  that  throughout  the  N.  T.  is 
translated  "miracle,"  and  sometimes  "sign" 
in  the  sense  of  miracle.  We  prefer  the 
rendering  of  our  old  version — "wonder." 
What  the  Seer  beheld  was  no  more  a  miracle 
than  the  horses  and  horsemen  of  the  other 
visions.  It  was  a  symbolic  representation. 
The  sight  caused  the  Seer  wonderment — as- 
tonishment. 

"y4  Woman:^'  A  woman  is  the  symbol  of 
the  Church  in  its  totality.  It  is  also  made 
adaptive  to  the  Church  in  whatever  relation 
we  find  it.  As  an  Apostate  Church,  she  is 
a  harlot,*  as  the  faithful  Church,  she  is  the 
the  bride,  t 

The  symbol  now  given  us  is  a  conception 
surpassingly  beautiful.  It  repays  prolonged 
study.  "x-V  woman  clothed  with  the  sun, 
and  the  moon  under  her  feet,  and  upon  her 


Rev.  17:1,  &c.     jRev.  19:7. 


144  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.        Act  IV. 

head  a  crown  of  twelve  stars."  This  is  the 
very  impersonation  of  majesty  and  purity. 
It  is  not  of  the  earth.  It  far  transcends  any- 
thing-earthly.  The  imagination  must  feast 
upon  it,  and  the  mind  grow  to  it,  and  enlarge 
itself,  before  it  can  realize  its  heavenliness. 
The  greatest  of  artists  has  made  this  his  sub- 
ject, and  has  given  to  the  world  a  master- 
piece. It  is  a  beautiful  painting;  but  be- 
side the  word-picture  it  is  feeble.  Who  can 
paint  the  Bride  of  Christ,  but  Christ  him- 
self, and  this  is  His  representation  of  her. 

There  can  be  no  question  that  the  true 
Church,  the  sealed  ones  of  all  ages,  is  here 
symbolized.  Sun,  moon,  and  stars  are  the 
scources  of  light  for  our  material  world.  By 
Divine  ordering,  for  its  spiritual  needs,  this 
true  Church,  is  ordained  the  "light  of  the 
world."*  To  represent  this  Church  there- 
fore as  clothed  and  adorned  with  the  sources 
of  physical  light  is  appropriate  and  beauti- 
ful. 

That  this  woman  represents  the  true 
Church,  the  sealed  ones  of  Chp.  7:,  and  the 
witnesses  of  Chp.  11:,  is  made  apparent  by 
V.  1 7.  Here  we  are  told  that  '  'her  seed  . . . 
keep  the  commandments  of  God,  and  have 
the  testimony  of  Jesus. ' '     None  but  the  true 

*Matt  5:14. 


Scene  2d.  RE:vELATION,  12:  145 

Church  can  produce  such  children.  We 
note  also  that  on  her  head  there  is  a  crown  of 
twelve  stars,  the  symbolic  number  of  the 
Church.  *  In  striking  contrast  with  the  light 
adorned  woman,  are  the  gaudy  earth -wrought 
trappings  of  the  harlot  sitting  on  the  scarlet- 
colored  beast,  t  and  equally  in  contrast  are 
the  judgments  that  are  awarded  them.  J 

V.  2.  We  interpret  this  symbol  as  repre- 
senting the  whole  body  of  the  sealed  ones. 
As  such  this  sun-clothed  woman  has  ever  been 
the  guardian  and  witness  of  the  truth,  and 
the  keeper  and  nourisher  of  God's  children. 
At  the  time  of  the  vision  (the  middle  of 
Daniel's  last  week),  and  in  the  condition  in 
which  she  is  represented,  she  is  in  pain  to 
deliver  up  all  the  children  that  she  is  at  this 
time  carrying.  In  the  ages  past  her  children 
have  been  removed  one  by  one,  and  she  has 
seen  them  thus  pass  on  "to  the  general  as- 
sembly and  Church  of  the  first-born,  which 
are  written  in  heaven.  "§  But  now  at  one 
birth  all  her  children  are  to  be  translated 
from  earth  to  heaven.  She  is  in  expectancy  of 
the  event,  and  is  awaiting  it.  She  is  feeling 
the  pressure  of  the  times.  The  powers  of 
heaven  are  being  shaken,  and  she  realizes 
from  passing  events  that  the  hour   of    "re- 

*See  p.  95.     tl7:4.     ^14:1,  &c.,  &  17:16.     ^Heb.  12:23. 


146  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Act  IV. 

demption  draweth  nigh."*  She  cries  there- 
fore, and  her  cry  is — "Come  Lord  Jesus, 
come  quickly. ' ' 

V.  J.  The  seer's  attention  is  diverted  for 
a  moment  from  this  sun-clothed  woman  by 
another  vision.  It  is  a  source  of  equal  won- 
derment to  him.  —  "A  great  red  Dragon." 
Verse  nine  designates  him  more  fully,  and 
identifies  him  with  "  the  prince  of  the  power 
of  the  air"— "the  God  of  this  world."  He 
is  represented  with  the  symbols  that  belong 
to  Daniel's  last  Beast, f  and  to  the  Beast  of 
chp.  13:1  &c., — "having  seven  heads  and 
ten  horns,  and  seven  crowns  upon  his  head." 
These  symbols  are  regarded  as  indicating 
complete  world  power,  a  power  that  belongs 
to  Satan.  "The  kingdom  of  this  world  "  is  as 
yet  his.  J  The  Beast||  is  but  his  representa- 
tive. When  Pharaoh  placed  Joseph  over  the 
land  of  Egypt,  he  put  his  ring  on  his  finger, 
and  arrayed  him  in  other  insignia  of  his 
royalty,  §  So  when  King  Ahasuerus  would 
honor  Mordecai,  he  ordered  him  to  be  clothed 
in  royal  apparel.  1  The  seven  crowned 
heads,  and  the  ten  horns  belong  to  Satan. 
They  are  the  insignia  of  his  kingship  over 
this  earth.  For  his  own  purposes  he  trans- 
fers them  to  the  Beast.      He  makes  him  his 


*I.u.  21:28.     17:7,    8.     tMatt.   4:8,   &c.,  1  John  5:11). 
IRev.  18:1,  &c.     ^^Gen.  41:41,  &c.     1[Esth   6:7. 


Scene  2d.  REVELATION,   12:  147 


Joseph  over  the  land  of  Egypt.  All  the 
governments  of  this  earth  have  ever  been 
controlled  by  him,  and  have  been  given  to 
whomsoever  he  will,  and  have  been  adminis- 
tered for  the  promotion  of  his  interests.  But 
to  this  last  representative  of  this  Beast- 
power,  there  will  be  transferred  in  a  remark- 
able degree  "  his  power,  and  his  seat,  and 
great  authority. ' '  '^ 

V.  /.  ^^  Stars, '^^  as  already  stated,  repre- 
sent prominent  persons.  Here  the  stars  are 
from  heaven.  They  therefore  represent 
prominent  dignitaries  of  the  visible  Church. 
They  are  cast  down  to  earth.  The  picture 
is  wonderfully  graphic.  There  are  but 
three  strokes  of  the  brush — the  Dragon,  the 
sweep  of  his  tail  among  the  stars  of  heaven, 
and  one-third  of  them  cast  to  the  earth. 
It  points  to  an  apostasy  in  the  visible 
Church,  brought  about  through  the  agency 
of  Satan.  At  this  moment  in  the  prophetic 
history  this  apostasy  comes  to  the  full.  We 
identify  it  with  the  apostasy  under  the  6th 
trumpet,  t  and  which  at  this  time  takes 
shape  under  the  earth- Beast. ;};  The  number 
cast  down  is  the  same  as  that  destroyed  un- 
der the  6th  trumpet.  II  It  is  with  his  tail 
that  the  Dragon  draws  these  stars  of  heaven 


13:2.     t9:14,  &c.     ;13:11,  &c.     1,9:18. 


148  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Wf/  /K 


from  their  high  places  and  drags  them  down 
to  the  earth.  With  his  tail,  /.  e.  with  his 
"cunning  craftiness",*  and  his  "  wiles", t 
and  his  "  lying  wonders",  and  his  "  deceiva- 
bleness  of  (concerning)  unrighteousness". if 
These  are  the  agencies  by  which  he  deceives 
and  draws  down  these  stars  to  the  earth — to 
the  substitution  of  philosophy,  and  science, 
and  culture,  and  such  like  worldly  wisdom 
(things  of  the  earth),  for  the  doctrine  of  God 
in  Christ.  And  so,  under  the  6th  trumpet,  || 
we  are  told  that  the  power  of  the  apostasy 
thus  described,  lies  "  in  their  mouth,  and  in 
their  tails".  These  stars  are  first  won  from 
their  allegiance  to  the  truth  by  the  lies  and 
cunning  craftiness  (the  tail)  of  the  Dragon, 
and  then  practice  the  same  with  success 
upon  others. 

As  children  of  light,  can  we  not  "  discern 
the  signs  of  the  times"?§  In  "the  higher 
criticism"  that  undermines  the  authority  of 
God's  word;  in  the  cowardice  that  cringes 
before  an  assumptive  science;  in  the  voices 
heard  in  all  our  churches  questioning,  if  not 
openly  denying,  the  doctrines  of  the  Atone- 
ment, of  eternal  punishment,  and  of  a  re- 
turning Lord;  can  we  not  by  these,  and 
many  similar  indications,  discern  the  sweep 


*Eph.    4:14.      tEph.    6:11.      +2  Thess.    2:10.      ||9:1{). 
^Matt.   16:3. 


Scene  2d.  REVELATION,  12:  Hit 

of  the   Dragon's  tail,    that    is  beginning  to 
bring  to  the  earth  the  stars  of  heaven? 

Successful  in  his  wily  schemes,  and  with 
his  apostasy  almost  at  its  culmination,  the 
Dragon  turns  his  attention  to  those  who  have 
refused  to  be  led  captive  by  him  at  his  will. 
He  is  now  seen  standing  before  the  woman 
anticipating  the  coming  birth,  and  deter- 
mined to  devour  the  man-child  to  be  brought 
forth.  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  symbols 
we  are  now  studying  take  us  back  in  a  meas- 
ure over  some  of  the  historic  ground  we 
have  already  traversed.  Under  the  6th 
trumpet*  we  have  the  apostasy  here  symbol- 
ized by  the  Dragon's  tail  drawing  the  stars 
from  heaven,  and  casting  them  down  to  earth. 
In  chp.  II :  there  are  the  sackcloth-witnesses 
corresponding  to  the  sun-clothed  woman 
crying  for  deliverance.  And  in  the  state- 
ment of  V.  5 — "And  her  child  was  caught 
up  unto  God,  and  to  his  throne,"  we  recog- 
nize the  call  of  chp.  i  i :  v.  I2,  "  Come  up 
hither."  The  translation,  as  we  think,  is 
shadowed  forth  in  both  instances.  This 
repetition  seems  to  be  required,  not  only  for 
the  unity  of  the  pictures,  but  that  the  con- 
tinuity of  the  historical  events  should  be 
perfectly  clear  to  the  seer. 


*9:14.  &c. 


150  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.         Ad  IK 

The  woman — the  true  Church,  is  crying 
and  waiting  for  deliverance.  This  moment 
of  her  anguish  may  correspond  to  the  three 
and  a  half  days  of  the  ''dead  bodies"  of 
the  witnesses  lying  unburied  in  the  streets  of 
Jerusalem.*  The  Dragon  is  seen  watching 
for  the  birth  of  the  child,  with  the 
avowed  purpose  of  devouring  it.  Up  to 
this  time  he  seems  to  have  had  access  in- 
to the  heavenlies.f  He  has  not  yet  been 
expelled.  But  he  knows  that  "the  end"  is 
near,  I  and  that  his  time  is  short..  His 
wrath  therefore  knows  no  bounds,  and  in 
the  madness  of  despair  he  seems  to  enter- 
tain the  hope  that  it  may  be  in  his  power 
to  frustrate  this  translation — the  Church 
delivering  up  her  Man-child.  In  the 
symbol  of  the  6th  trumpet,  ||  the  number  of 
the  horsemen  (the  heresies)  sent  forth  was 
immense.  It  must  be  by  these  that  he 
hopes  to  devour  the  Man-child — to  tear 
the  Bride,  or  at  least  a  portion  of  her,  from 
the  Bridegroom.  § 

K  5.  The  woman  brings  "forth  a  Man- 
child,  who  was  to  rule  all  nations  with  a 
rod  of  iron." — "She  was  delivered  of  a  Son, 
a  Man-child,  who  is  to    rule,"  &c.,  (R.  V.). 


*Rev.  11:8,    tl2:9.    t12:18.    yohn,  10:28.  etc.,  G:  37-41. 
i|9:16. 


Scene  2d.  REVElvA^TlON,  12:  151 


Who  is  this  Man-child?  Expositors  in  gen- 
eral agree  in  making  him  Christ.  The  fact 
that  he  was  to  rule  all  nations,  <fec. ,  seems  to 
point  to  Him,  and  to  none  other.  But  there 
are  serious  objections  to  this  view.  To  make 
the  Man-child  Christ,  is  to  make  the  Church 
His  Mother.  This  has  no  warrant  in  scrip- 
ture. The  Ivord-christ,  as  to  his  humanity, 
was  born  of  a  woman.  *  This  was  after  the 
flesh.  The  Church  as  here  symbolized,  is  a 
woman  not  after  the  flesh.  She  is  heavenly 
and  spiritual.  The  children  she  nourishes 
for  eternal  life  have  received  a  spiritual  birth. 
In  no  sense  can  Christ  be  said  to  have  received 
a  spiritual  birth,  or  any  other  kind  of  birth, 
from,  or  in,  or  through,  the  Church.  He 
was  begotten  of  the  Father  before  all  worlds. 
He  is  the  Maker  and  the  Organizer  of  the 
Church.  The  Church  is  ''his  body,"  "his 
Bride,"  but  not  his  Mother.  To  make 
her  his  Mother  is  to  make  the  less 
contain  the  greater.  It  was  not  until 
after  his  birth,  and  even  until  after  his 
death,  that  the  Church  had  its  being.  It 
is  more  correct  therefore  to  say  that  Christ 
gave  the  Church  being,  than  that  she  gave 
Him  birth.  We  must  not  interpret  a  sym- 
bol in  a  way  plainly  repugnant  to    the  letter 

*Gal.  4:2. 


162  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Act  IV. 


of  scripture.  We  cannot  therefore  accept 
the  generally  received  intepretation  that  the 
Man-child  is  Christ.  We  take  it  to  be — all 
on  earth  at  this  special  time,  who  are  in 
Christ  and  who  are  waiting  for  him.  That 
the  singular  number — "a  Son,  a  Man-child," 
should  be  used  when  numbers  are  concerned 
is  quite  in  accordance  with  scripture  usage. 
The  words,  Church,  bride,  body,  are  singu- 
lar, and  yet  they  stand  for  the  whole  number 
of  the  redeemed.  In  his  message  to  Pharaoh, 
God  says:  "Israel  is  my  son,  my  first-born.  "* 
And  so  of  Ephraim,  he  asks:  "Is  Ephraim, 
my  dear  son?  is  he  a  pleasant  child?  "f  AH 
true  believers  are  in  Christ,  and  are  one  with 
him.  What  is  said  of  him  is  true  of  them. 
They  shall  reign  with  him.  The  i\ngel 
tells  Daniel  "  that  the  kingdom  and  dominion, 
and  the  greatness  of  the  kingdom  under  the 
whole  heaven,  shall  be  given  to  the  people  of 
the  saints  (the  Man-child)  of  the  Most  High." 
|And  observe  that  the  child  is  no  sooner 
born  than  it  is  "caught  up  unto  God,  and 
to  his  throne. ' ' 

We  take  the  interpretation  to  be  this.  The 
true  Church  on  earth  at  this  particular  time  is 
represented  as  delivering    up  her  child  "the 


^^Ex.  4:22,  23.  tjer.  31:20.  jDaii.  7: 14,  27.  Matt  19:28. 
Lu.  22:29,  30.  Rom.  8:17,  cS^c.  I  Cor.  6:8.  Rev.  2:'^6,  27, 
3:21.     20:4,  6. 


Scene  2d.  REVELATION,  12:  153 

seed  ...  to  whom  the  promise  was  made. ' '  * 
It  is  done  at  once,  "  in  a  moment,  in  the  twink- 
ling of  an  eye."  It  is  the  mystery  of  the 
translation  which  has  been  revealed  to  us  in 
I  Cor.  15:51,  &c.,  and  still  more  fully  ex- 
plained in  I  Thess.  4:17,  &c.  It  is  the  para- 
ble of  the  ten  virgins  in  symbol.  It  is  the 
object  lesson  given  us  in  Rev.  ii:ii  &c. 

V.  6.  The  sun-clothed  woman — the  in- 
visible and  true  Church,  does  not  give  up  all 
her  children.  The  Man-child  being  taken  up, 
i.  e.  all  in  Christ  who  at  the  moment  of  the  7th 
trumpet's  sounding,  are  found  watching  and 
waiting  for  the  Bridegroom,!  being  caught 
up,  the  woman  will  still  be  on  the  earth. 
"Their  enemies  beheld  them"  is  the  state- 
ment in  Clip.  11:12.  The  removal  of  so 
great  a  number  must  attract  universal  at- 
tention. It  must  be  accounted  for  and  there 
is  onh'  one  way.  The  despised  Book  that 
has  been  branded  by  the  wisdom  of  the 
world  as  a  myth  and  a  fraud,  will  speak  and 
will  not  lie.  The  consternation  for  a  short 
while  will  be  great.  Many  will  give  glory 
to  God,  and  there  will  be  believers  added  to 
the  Church  of  such  as  are  being  saved. 
All  of  the  ten  watchers  are  spoken  of  as 
virgins  (true  believers),  though   five  are  fool- 


*Gal.  3:19.     tMatt.  25:1  &c. 


154  THE  APOCAIvYPTIC  DRAMA.         Act  IV. 

ish.  They  have  not  heeded  their  Lord's 
warning,*  and  are  therefore  exchided  from 
the  marriage  feast.  They  return,  however, 
with  oil  in  their  lamps.  These  are  spoken  of 
in  V.  17  as  "the  remnant  of  her  seed,  which 
keep  the  commandments  of  God  and  have 
the  testimony  of  Jesus  Christ. ' '  The  sun- 
clad  woman  will  therefore  still  be  on  the 
earth.  But  she  has  to  '  'fly  into  the  wilderness, 
where  she  hath  a  place  prepared  of  God ;  that 
they  should  feed  her  there  a  thousand  two 
hundred  and  three  score  days  " — 3^  years. 
The  Dragon  having  failed  in  his  designs  on 
the  Man-child, will,  in  his  desperation,  wage 
a  war  of  extermination  upon  the  remnant  of 
her  seed  (V.    1 7). 

"77?^  Wilderness^  Many  understand  by 
this  some  special  hiding  place.  We  would 
eliminate  the^idea  of  place,  and  regard  it  as 
such  general  protection  as  the  I^ord  has  vouch- 
safed to  his  Church  during  times  of  persecu- 
tion. There  always  has  been  suffering  and 
martyrdom,  but  he  has  never  allowed  exter- 
mination. This  remnant  of  the  woman's 
seed  that  will  now  be  left  within  the  visible 
Church  and  in  the  world,  will  be  like  the 
seven  thousand  hidden  ones  in  Elisha'sday.f 

There  is  here  a   note  of  time.      It  is  the 


*Lu.  21:36.     tl-  Kgs.  19:18. 


Scetie  2d.  REVEIvATION,  12:  155 

same  as  that  assigned  to  the  sackcloth  wit- 
ness.'^ This  difference  however  must  be 
noted.  With  them  it  is  the  first  half  (1260 
days)  of  Daniel's  last  week,  and  prior  to  the 
translation.  Here  it  is  the  last  half  of  the 
week,  and  after  the  translation  (V.  5).  All 
after  the  7  th  trumpet,  and  the  translation, 
belongs  to  the  last  half  of  Daniel's  week. 

Vs.  j-io.  The  war  in  heaven,  the  expul- 
sion of  Satan,  and  his  flight  to  earth,  are  to 
us  realities.  Believing  in  the  personality  of 
Satan,  and  of  all  concerned  in  this  conflict, 
and  knowing  that  earth  is  a  place,  and  that 
heaven  must  be  also,  we  can  find  neither 
figure  nor  symbol  in  this  language.  We  take 
it  literally. 

This  is  the  beginning  of  Satan's  progress 
towards  his  final  destination.  He  is  first  ex- 
pelled from  heaven  (Vs.  8-9) ;  then  he  is  seized, 
and  bound,  and  locked  up  in  the  bottomless 
pit  (20:1,  &c.);  and  last  of  all  he  is  cast  into 
the  lake  of  fire.f  Was  this  struggle  we  are 
now  considering  and  its  result  present  to  the 
Lord's  mental  vision  when  he  said — "I 
beheld  Satan  falling  as  lightning  from 
heaven?"   R.  V-i 

V.  10.  There  is  here  given  the  Seer  an- 
other of  those  explanatory  voices  helpful  to 


ai.3.     120:10      %\,-\x.  10:18. 


156  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.        Ad /K 

him  in  understanding  what  is  taking  place. 
This  loud  voice  is  probably  from  one  or  per- 
haps more,  of  the  redeemed,  for  it  speaks  of 
"our  brethren.^' 

l\  II.  ^^ They  overcame  Him  because  of  ^' 
(R.V.).  Through  (sta),  by  virtue,  on  account 
of,  ^^the  b/ood^'  &c.  They  were  not 
ashamed  of  the  cross  of  Christ.  They  ac- 
cepted the  doctrine  of  the  efficacy  of  the 
blood,  and  bore  their  testimony  to  it.  With- 
out its  shedding  the  accusations  of  the  ad- 
versary could  not  have  been  answered. 

V.  12.  ^^IVoe  to  the  inhabiters  of  the 
earth  and  the  Sea!^^  ik^.  This  is  the  third 
and  last  woe.'''  It  is  the  ''great  tribulation. ''t 
It  will  be  upon  Israel,:];  and  upon  the  rem- 
nant of  the  woman's  seed,§  and  upon  all  na- 
tions. ||  It  is  to  be  on  ''the  inhabiters  of  the 
earth  and  the  sea" — the  dominion  of  the  sea- 
Beast,  and  the  followers  of  the  earth- 
Beast. 

V.  I  J.  What  follows  to  the  end  of  the 
chapter  is  both  an  amplification  and  an  ex- 
planation of  the  statements  of  Verse  6th. 
The  events  are,  however,  presented  from  dif- 
ferent standpoints.  The  first  is  the  heavenl)- 
aspect  of  the   woman's  flight.      The   other** 

*8:13.      9:12.       11:14.      fMatt.    24:15  28.      Dau.  12:1. 
yer.  30:7.     ^^V.  17.     ||Lu.  21:25.     **Vs.  18  17. 


Scene  2d.  REVELATION.  12:  157 

gives  the  same  facts  with  the  fuller  details, 
and  is  an  earth-picture.  We  now  learn  why 
the  woman  had  to  fly  into  the  wilderness — 
the  Dragon  has  been  cast  out  of  heaven  and 
is  persecuting  her. 

V.  14.  ''To  f/iis  -a'OJfian  were giz^eti  tzuo 
icinjrs.'^  The  upbearing,  overshadowing, 
over-ruling,  providence  of  God,  that  causes 
"all  things  to  work  together  for  good  to  them 
that  love  God,  to  them  who  are  called  accord- 
ing to  his  purpose.''* 

'  \She  is  nourisJicd. ' '  The  same  Greek  that 
in  V.  6th  is  translated  "feed.''  The  oil  will 
be  supplied  that  these  lamps  may  continue 
buiuingt  through  all  these  1260  days,  so  that 
when  Christ  comes  there  wnll  be  a  true 
Church  (the  remnant  of  her  seed)  upon  the 
earth. 

]'s.  /j,  16.  These  symbols  are  very  diffi- 
cult of  explanation.  "The  serpent  casts  out 
of  his  mouth  as  a  flood"  &c.  We  are  dis- 
posed to  link  this  with  16:13,  14;  and  9:16  cS:c. 
With  "damnable  heresies" J — the  immense 
army  of  horsemen  of  Chp.  9:16,  he  will  en- 
deavor to  sweep  away  the  remnant  of  the  seed 
as  with  a  flood.  The  earth-Beast,  who  will 
be  at  the   head  of  these    horsemen  seems    to 

*Rom.    8:2S.       Ex.    9:4.      Deut.  32:11  &c.       Ps.  63:7. 
tll:3  &c,     j,  2  Pet.  2:1. 


158  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.         Act  IV. 

symbolize  the  same  fact  that  is  here  an- 
nounced. 

V.  1 6.  We  have  not  seen,  nor  can  offer  a 
satisfactory  explanation  of  this  symbol.  As 
the  time  for  its  fulfillment  approaches,  there 
will  be  more  light. 

V.  ly.  This  verse  is  explanatory  of  verse 
13.  It  tells  why  the  Dragon  persecuted  the 
woman. 

This  closes  our  second  scene.  In  it,  the 
translation,  which  had  previously  been 
brought  to  the  Seer's  notice  by  other  symbols, 
is  reaffirmed.  The  defeat  and  expulsion  of 
Satan  from  heaven  to  earth  is  pictured  to 
him.  The  fact  is  also  revealed  that  aftei  the 
translation  there  will  still  continue  to  be  a 
true  Church  upon  earth.  And  he  is  made  to 
understand  the  condition  of  the  untranslated 
Church — the  remnant  of  the  woman's  seed, 
down  to  the  end  of  the  1260  days. 


Scene  3d.  REVELATION,  13:  159 

Revelation  13. 

Act,   IV.  11:15,  <^c.,  i2:to  20:1-4. 

Scene,  3d.  Chp,  13: 

Location.      The  earth. 

Dramatis  Personoe.  The  Dragon.  The 
sea-Beast.  The  earth-Beast.  The  inhabiters 
of  the  earth. 

Time.     The  last  half  of  Daniel's  last  week. 

This  scene  opens  with  a  vision  very  differ- 
ent from  the  previous  one.  That  was  a 
woman  clothed  in  light,  this  is  a  Beast 
"scarlet-colored,"*  fierce,  cruel  and  impious. 
That  was  a  heavenly  picture  pure  and  beau- 
tiful; this  is  of  the  earth  earthy.  We  at 
once  identify  him  with  Daniel's  last  "dread- 
ful and  terrible"  Beast,  f  He  comes  on  the 
stage  of  action  fully  equipped  for  an  awful 
work.  Satan  is  now  upon  earth.  Keeping 
himself  out  of  sight  for  the  better  success  of 
his  lying  doctrines,  he  will  transfer  to  this 
Beast  his  ' '  power,  and  his  seat,  and  great  au- 
thority," and  he  shall  make  war  with  the 
saints  and  overcome  them.  Contemporary 
with  him  is  another  Beast  that  comes  up  out  of 
the  earth.  He  is  lamb-like,  but  speaks  great 
swelling  words.  He  exercises  spiritual  power 
over  the  nations,  and  is  confederate  with  the 

*17:3:     t7:7. 


160  THE  APOCALYTIC  DRAMA.         Ad  Il\ 

sea-Beast.  By  them  the  earth  is  subdued, 
and  brought  into  a  state  of  open  and  reckless 
rebellion  against  the  Most  High. 

/>.  /.  The  R.  V.  translates— "/2;2^  he 
[the  Dragon)  stood  upon  the  sand  of  the  sea. 
And  I  sazv  a  Beasf^  &c.  With  the  risino^  of 
this  Beast,  the  Dragon  ceases  to  occupy  the 
conspicuous  position  that  he  did  in  the  last 
scene.  He  hides  himself  in  this  Beast,  as  he 
did  in  the  serpent  in  Eden.  He  gives  him 
"his  power,  and  seat,  and  great  authority." 
This  Beast  comes  up  out  of  the  sea — out  of 
the  disturbed  civil  and  social  relations  of  the 
peoples.  "^^  It  is  out  of  the  same  sea  that 
Daniel  saw  his  Beasts  arise,  f  The  Greek  is 
erj^eof^  a  wild  beast ;  very  different  from  f^oa, 
the  living  ones,  of  Chp.  4:6. 

V.  2.  This  Beast  is  nondescript.  He  is 
a  combination  of  those  of  Daniel,  and  thus 
shows  his  unity  in  spirit  and  purpose  with 
those  who  have  preceded  him.  He  sym- 
bolizes the  aggregate  of  the  empires  of  this 
world  as  opposed  to  Christ. 

This  Beast  has  ' '  seven  heads,  and  ten  horns, 
and  upon  his  horns  ten  crowns,  and  upon  his 
heads  the  name  of  blasphemy  (V.  I.).  There 
is  a  still  further  descriptive  allusion  to  him 
in  Chp.  17:8  to  13.     We  will  bring  together 


*Rev.  17:15.     t7:2. 


Scene  3d.  REVEIvATION,  18:  161 

these  statements,  and  give  what  seems  to  us  a 
possible  explanation. 

The  seven  heads  in  Chp.  17:9,  are  said 
to  be  "seven  mountains,"  and  in  the  next 
verse,  these  mountains  are  said  to  be  "seven 
Kings  R.  v.).  The  seven  heads,  and  seven 
mountains,  and  seven  kings,  are  one.  They 
are  intended  to  represent  ruling  powers.  The 
seven  mountains  ma>-  perhaps  represent  the 
the  dififerent  forms  of  government  peculiar  to 
these  heads,  or  Kings.  Because  the  City  of 
Rome  is  built  on  seven  hills,  most  exposi- 
tors have  inferred  that  the  reference  is  to  that 
City,  and  to  the  Church  of  Rome — "the  seven 
heads  are  seven  mountains,  on  which  the 
woman  sitteth."*  But  this  sitting  of  the 
woman  upon  these  seven  heads,  which  are 
seven  mountains,  does  not  imply  possession, 
and  control,  and  sovereignty.  Just  the  con- 
trary. The  reference  is  to  the  tableau  of  V. 
3, — a  woman  sitting  upon  a  scarlet-colored 
beast  (Chp.  7 :).  The  Beast  referred  to  is  carry- 
ing the  woman  (V.  7. ).  Her  sitting  on  him  de- 
notes a  condition  of  dependence.  He  is  be- 
friending her — sustaining  her  in  her  position, 
whatever  that  may  be,  and  as  these  seven 
heads,  which  are  mountains,  represent  the 
same  Beast,  f  the  relations  of  the   woman   to 

*17:9.     tl3:l,  &c. 


162  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.         Ad  IV. 

them    must   be   the  same, — one   of  depend- 
ence. 

The  interpretation  given  the  mountains,  as 
standing  for  forms  of  governments,  finds  am- 
ple authority  in  scripture.  (Dan.  2:35.  Heb. 
12:22,  and  Rev.  14:1.  Is.  2:1  &c.  41:15. 
Ps.  68:15-16.  Ezek.  35:1,  &c.) 
This  Beast  has  also  ten  horns.  *  The  horn 
is  the  symbol  of  power,  and  ten  is  considered 
the  number  of  the  complete  course  of  the 
world — the  completed  development  of  world- 
power,  t  These  horns  wear  crown  s,  the  sym- 
bol of  imperial  power.  This  number  ten  is 
linked  with  all  the  symbols  of  this  world- 
power.  You  find  it  in  the  ten  toes  of  the 
great  image,  and  in  the  ten  horns  of  Daniel's 
last  terrible  Beast,  i  The  Roman  Empire 
continued  an  unit  throughout  the  first  four 
centuries.  It  was  then  divided  into  the  East- 
ern and  Western  Empires,  the  two  legs  of 
Nebuchadnezzar's  image.  Since  then,  the  ter- 
ritories and  nationalities  it  dominated,  have 
been  broken  up  and  subdivided  again  and 
again.  But  there  has  always  been  more  or 
less  adhesion  and  sympathy  under  a  common 
system  of  government — imperialism.  The 
idea  of  unification  has  never  been  lost  sight 
of      Its  realization  has  been  the  ambition   of 


«13:1,  &c.,  and  17.-7. 12.    IXangeon  Rev.  p.  316.      J7:7 


Scene  3d.  REVELATION,  13:  163 


many  who  Irom  time  to  time  have  dehiged 
Europe  with  blood.  These  ten  imperial 
horns  are  yet  future.  In  17:12,  they  are 
said  to  be  "ten  Kings,  which  have  received 
no  Kingdom  as  yet,  but,  they  receive  author- 
ity as  Kings,  with  the  Beast  for  one  hour. ' ' 
(R.  V.)  They  correspond  to  the  ten  toes  of 
the  image;  and  in  Daniel's  vision  of  the 
Beasts,  they  are  assigned  to  the  fourth  King- 
dom, and  to  its  last  end,  and  as  the  Beast 
(little  horn)  is  to  come  up  among  these  horns,* 
we  know  that  he  belongs  to  the  last  King- 
dom, and  to  the  last  end  of  tliat  Kingdom. 

In  explaining  "the  myster}''t  of  this  Beast, 
the  Seer  tells  us  (13:3):  "and  I  saw  one  ot 
his  heads  as  it  were  wounded  to  death;  and 
his  deadly  wound  was  healed."  And  in  17:8, 
he  is  spoken  of  as  "the  Beast  that  was, 
and  is  not,  and  yet  is,"  or,  as  the  R.  V. 
translates,  "he  was,  and  is  not,  and  shall 
come. ' '  This  is  still  further  explained  in  Vs. 
10 and  II.'  'There  are  seven  Kings (govermen- 
tal  forms) ;  five  are  fallen,  and  one  is,  and  the 
other  is  yet  to  come  ....  and  the  Beast  that 
was,  and  is  not,  even  he  is  the  eighth,  and 
is  of  the  seventh. ' ' 

' '  Thei^e  are  seven  Kings ^  five  are  fallen. ' ' 
We  have  interpreted    these  Kingships  to  be 


*Dan.  7:8.     tl7:7. 


164  THE  APOCAIvYPTIC  DRAMA.       Ad  IV. 

different  forms  of  government  through  which 
this  Beast-power  passes.  Following  this 
line  of  interpretation  we  know  from  history 
that  the  Roman  power  up  to  Apocalyptic 
times  had  numbered  six  different  forms  of 
government — (i),  Kings;  (2),  Consuls;  (3), 
Dictators;  (4),  Decemvirs;  (5),  Military  Tri- 
bunes. These  at  the  time  of  the  Seer  had 
passed  away, — ^\five  are  fallen y  (6)  Em- 
perors. *  This  was  the  form  of  government 
existing  at  the  time  the  revelation  was 
given, — "0/2<? />. "  ^^ The  other  (the  Sec'enth^) 
7s  not  yet  conie.^^  It  was  future  in  John's 
day.  We  regard  it  as  still  future.  Although 
the  Roman  Beast-power  in  its  imperial  form 
no  longer  exists  as  an  unit,  yet  in  its  frag- 
mentary portions  the  monarchical  form 
has  almost  universally  prevailed.  We  ma\- 
regard  therefore  the  imperial  (the  6th)  form 
of  the  Beast  power  as  still  existing. 

What  then  is  this  seventh  and  still  future 
form?  Let  us  note  some  of  its  features.  (i)It 
was  at  the  time  of  the  Seer's  writing  still 
future.  *  When  it  comes,  the  Beast  that  was 
(before  it),  i.  e,  the  imperial  form  of  govern- 
ment, will  receive  a  wound  unto  death, t 
Mrg.  "was  slain."  (3)  On  its  coming,  it  is  to 
' 'continue  a  short  space. "J 


*So  far  Bp.  Elliott.     *t7:10.     113:3.     il7:10. 


Scene  jd.  REVKLATION,  13:  l66 

We  are  disposed  to  think  that  there  is 
coming  an  era  of  lawlessness  that  will  sweep 
the  Roman  world,  and  that  will  upturn  its 
thrones.  And  it  is  well  for  those  who  rest  on 
the  most  sure  word  of  prophecy  to  observe 
"the  si^^ns  of  the  times."  Clouds  are  thick 
and  threatening  on  the  horizon,  and  it  will 
be  our  fault  if  the  storm  bursts  upon  us  un- 
awares. The  wonderful  progress  of  science, 
the  rapid  increase  of  knowledge,  the  cheer- 
ing successes  of  missions,  the  growing  influ- 
ence of  Peace  Congresses — rthis  promising 
outlook  makes  optimists  of  us  all.  But  we 
are  assured  that  "  when  they  shall  say  peace 
and  safety,  then  sudden  destruction  cometh, 
.  .  and  they  shall  not  escape.  "*  A  spirit 
of  unrest  and  dissatisfaction  is  brooding  over 
the  civilized  world.  It  is  attracting  the  at- 
tention of  all  thinkers.  You  read  of  it  in 
the  columns  of  the  newspapers,  and  the  page 
of  the  magazine,  the  quarterly,  and  the 
novel.  Everywhere  the  question  is  asked — 
how  can  we  allay  this  threatening  spirit?  It 
is  organizing  and.  combining  under  manifold 
names.  They  are  all  more  or  less  the  out- 
growth of  atheism,  and  lead  to  lawlessness. 
When  men  discard  the  fear  of  God,  and  the 
expectation  of  an  after  life,  and  a  righteous 

*lThess.  5:3. 


166  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Ad  IV. 


judgment,  they  also  break  the  bond  of  human 
brotherhood,  and  discard  all  the  elements 
that  combine  to  form  a  perfect  civilization. 
Self  becomes  the  center  of  all  action.  And  it 
is  this  fashion  of  atheism  that  is  now  taking; 
possession  of  men's  minds,  and  that  needs 
only  time  to  bring  about  the  awful  catastro- 
phy,  out  ol  which  the  Anti-christ  will  be 
developed.  The  resisting  influences  of  re- 
ligion are  being  rapidly  taken  out  of  the 
way.'''  It  was  so  in  France  in  1790.  There 
was  first  a  widespread  infidelity  nursed  by 
men  of  letters.  Society  was  corrupted,  con- 
fidence and  truth  fled.  Ivicentiousness  was 
given  free  rein.  Wealth  and  power  com- 
bined to  extort  and  oppress,  and  poverty  and 
ignorance  roused  itself  for  resistance.  Then 
came  the  upheaval;  and  the  monarchy,  and 
all  that  was  law  abiding,  vanished.  The 
same  results  must  follow  like  conditions. 
Now,  however,  on  a  more  extended  scale. 
The  whole  world  is  one.  Revolutions  can 
no  more  be  confined  to  nationalities.  The 
great  questions  of  the  day  are  agitating  the 
minds  of  men  throughout  the  civilized  world. 
When  they  come  to  be  settled,  there  will  be 
no  German,  no  Frenchmen,  no  Englishmen, 
&c.      The  oppressor  and   the  oppressed  will 


*2  Thess.  2:7. 


Scene  3d.  REVELATION,  13:  16'; 


Stand  face  to  face.  And  then  will  be  the  days 
when  "there  shall  be  signs  in  the  sun,  and 
in  the  moon,  and  in  the  stars;  and  upon  the 
earth  distress  of  nations,  with  perplexity; 
the  sea  and  the  waves  (the  uprising  masses) 
roaring;  men's  hearts  failing  them  for  fear, 
and  for  expectation  of  those  things  which  are 
coming  on  the  earth  for  the  powers  of  heaven 
shall  be  shaken. ' '  * 

This  era  of  lawlessness  and  bloodshed  is 
that  of  the  seventh  head — the  seventh  form 
of  government.  It  is  mob  sovereignty, — 
democracy  run  mad.  In  its  wild  frenzy  all 
thrones  will  be  overturned,  all  established 
principles  of  civil  law  abrogated,  all  recogni- 
tion of  religion  prohibited,  all  safeguards  to 
person  and  property  broken  down,  and 
anarchy  and  terrorism  will  reign  supreme. 
Thus  a  deadly  wound  will  be  inflicted  on  one 
of  the  heads  of  the  Beast.  The  long  estab 
lished  monarchical  form  of  government  that 
has  always  characterized  it,  will  be  slain, 
and  to  all  appearance — forever. 

But  this  wild  out-burst  of  passion  will  soon 
subside.  The  fury  of  so  fierce  a  storm  must 
spend  itself  quickly.  It  was  so  during  the 
French  revolution.  Its  "reign  of  terror" 
ran  its  course  in  426  days.     The  people  were 


*Luke  21:25,  26. 


1B8  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.        Act  IV. 


satiated  with  blood,  and  there  came  a  re- 
action. The  first  one  strong  enough  to  grasp 
the  reins  and  restore  social  order  and  personal 
security,  was  hailed  as  a  savior,  and  so  will  it 
be  here.  We  are  told — "//<?,"  this  seventh 
head,  "  nutst  continue  a  short  space^^  V.  lO. 
The  strain  will  be  too  great  for  long  continu- 
ance, "And  except  those  days  should  be 
shortened,  there  should  no  flesh  be  saved; 
but  for  the  elect's  sake  those  days  shall  be 
shortened."*  Humanity  will  long  for  deliv- 
erance, and  will  be  ready  to  welcome  any- 
one who  will  come  in  the  name  of  law  and 
order,  and  so  the  next  head  (the  eighth) 
''is  of  the  seventh,''  (V.  ii.)  "The  four 
winds  of  the  heaven"  t  have  been  striving  on 
the  great  sea,  and  from  the  midst  of  its  roar- 
ing tossing  wavest — the  madness  of  the  peo- 
ples, this  8tli  head  appears.  He  will  restore 
the  ancient  regime.  The  monarchial  princi- 
ple will  once  more  appear,  and  thus  "this 
deadly  wound  is  healed;  and  all  the  world 
wondered  after  the  beast.  §  It  will  recognize 
him  as  its  deliverer,  and  will  readily  yield  to 
him  all  the  power  and  honor  he  claims,  even 
to  worship;  and  this  beast  that  was,  and  is 
not,  and  that  is  to  come,  is  the  eighth  head.  || 
and  this  is  the  Anti-christ. 

*Matt.    24:22.      tDan.    7:2.      +Lu.    21:25.       Rev.    13:1 
^.13:3.     1117:8,  11. 


Scene  3d.  REVELATION,  13:  169 

John  tells  us  that  there  were  even  in  his  day, 
many  Anti-christs.  *  iV  person,  or  organiza- 
tion, that  in  any  way  detracts  from  the  au- 
thority and  glory  of  Christ,  manifests  the 
spirit  of  Anti-christ,  and  there  are  many  such 
in  the  world.  In  this  sense  we  may  regard 
the  Church  of  Rome  as  Anti-christian;  but 
she  is  not  the  iVnti-christ.  There  is  but  one 
such.  John  thus  describes  him  in  one  of  his 
epistles.  "Who  is  the  liar,  but  he  that 
denieth  that  Jesus  is  the  Christ?  This  is  the 
Anti-christ,  even  he  that  denieth  the 
Father  and  the  Son  (R.  V.)t  Rome  has 
never  denied  the  divinity  of  the  Lord, 
nor  his  mission.  She  is  not  therefore 
the  Anti-christ.  We  must  look  elsewhere  for 
him,  and  it  is  in  this  8th  head — this  last 
development  of  Gentile  Dominion  that  we  find 
him.  ' '  He  goeth  into  perdition. " i  "  Whom 
the  Lord  shall  consume  with  the  spirit  of  his 
mouth,  and  shall  destroy  with  the  brightness 
of  his  coming.  II  He  has  no  successor.  He 
is  taken,  and  is  "cast  alive  into  the  lake  of 
fire  that  burneth  with  brimstone  (R.  V.)§ 
With  him  the  image  is  broken  to  pieces,  and 
becomes  like  the  chaff  of  the  summer  thresh- 
ing-floors, that  the  wind  carries  away.  \  The 
mighty  power  which  Satan  energized,  and  by 

"I  John,  2:18.  tl.  John,  2:22.  ^17:8  and  11,  ||2  Thess. 
2:8.     i!9Rev..  20.     ^j  Dan.  2:35. 


170  THE  APOCAIvYPTiC  DRAMA.       Act  IV. 

which  he  dominated  over  the  earth  since  the 
days  when  Nebuchadnezzar  dreamed  his 
dreams,  and  which  has  at  last  cuhninated  in 
the  "little  horn,"  will  now  be  taken  away. 
"The  judgment  shall  sit,  and  they  shall  take 
away  his  dominion,  to  consume  and  to  des- 
troy unto  the  end. ' '  *  He  is  the  desolator,  and 
on  him  will  be  poured  the  determined  consu- 
mation.  f 

We  now  confine  ourselves  to  chapter  thir- 
teen. 

V.  5.  In  this  verse  there  is  a  note  of 
time.  The  power  of  this  Beast,  as  now  rep- 
resented by  its  8th  head,  is  to  continue  forty 
and  two  months — 3^  years.  It  is  the  same 
period  as  Daniel  assigns  to  his  "little  horn," 
and  to  his  "Prince.  "J  It  is  also  the  time  al- 
lotted for  the  treading  down  of  "the  Holy 
City, ' '  and  named  for  the  sackcloth  witnesses, 
and  the  woman's  wilderness  life.  § 

V.  y.  '  ^Pozver  was  given  hint' '  &c.  This 
is  by  the  Dragon.  ||  It  must  be  remem- 
bered that  this  power  is  permissive.  God  is 
over  all.  He  controls  in  the  armies  of 
heaven  and  upon  earth,  according  to  the 
good  pleasure  of  his  will.  What  ever  Satan 
may  accomplish  is  by  his  permission.  If  he 
makes  war  with   the  saints,  and    overcomes 


*Dan.  7:8-26.    fDan.  9:27.    t7:26,  9:27.    §Rev.  11:2,  3. 
12:6,  14.     1|13:2. 


Scene  3d.  REVELATION,  13:  171 

them,  divine  purposes  are  being  accom- 
plished, and  all  things  are  working  together 
for  the  good  of  them  who  love  God.  We 
need  not  fear  the  powers  of  evil.  Their  destruc- 
tiveness  is  under  control.  Johovah  God  says 
to  their  assumptions  and  their  madness — 
"  Hitherto  shalt  thou  come,  but  no  further  ; 
and  here  shall  thy  proud    waves  be  stayed."* 

This  bestowment  of  power  will  explain 
why  the  Beast  will  be  able  to  gather  so  vast 
an  army  for  the  last  struggle,  f 

K  ^.  This  is  a  summons  to  give  atten- 
tion. It  takes  us  back  to  2:7,  and  3:6,  13, 
2  2.  The  call  in  these  chapters  is  addressed  to 
the  Churches.  The  inference  is  therefore 
that  the  same  parties  are  here  intended. 

]\  10.  These  will  be  times  of  persecution, 
and  the  temptation  to  the  Church — the  rem- 
nant of  the  woman's  seed,  will  be  to  meet 
violence  with  violence — to  resist  with  carnal 
weapons.  The  warning  given  them,  is  that 
in  this  Satanic  war,  they  are  not  to  take 
the  sword  in  self  defense.  This  is  not  the 
way  God  wants  his  people  to  resist  the  devil4 
That  the  Beast  overcomes  them  is  by  permis- 
sion. §  And  it  is  by  the  spirit  of  passive  suf- 
fering for  Christ,  that  the  patience  and  faith 


*Job.  38:11.  fRev.  16:14.  17:12,  etc.  19:19.  JMatt. 
26:52,53.  10:23.  John,  18:11.  Rom.  12:19.  ^olm. 
19:11. 


172  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Act  IV. 

of  the  saints  is  manifested  to  the  world.    ^'In 
your  patience  possess  ye  your  souls. ' '  * 

V.I  I.  ''Another  Beast:'  This  the  earth- 
Beast.  Verse  one  describes  to  us  the  coming 
up,  and  appearance  and  nature  of  the  sea- 
Beast.  He  rises  out  of  the  political  and 
social  storms  that  agitate  the  people  (the 
sea).  He  is  the  last  head  of  the  material 
World-forces,  whose  history  has  been  given 
us  under  the  seals.  Now  we  have  the  earth- 
Beast — "He  comes  up  out  of  the  earth."  This, 
we  think,  is  "the  wisdom  of  the  world" — 
its  culture,  civilization,  and  humanitarianism. 
The  Apostle  James  says  of  it — "it  descendeth 
not  from  above,  but  is  earthly,  sensual  (or 
natural),  devilish,  "fit  represents  the  spiritual 
World-forces.  They  were  brought  to  our 
notice  under  the  trumpets.  The  sixth  trum- 
pet shows  them  to  us  a  great  company  of 
horsemen  (heresies)  spreading  themselves 
over  the  earth  and  destroying. 

Here  we  have  these  forces  organized  under 
a  head,  who  is  all-conspicuous.  In  the  trum- 
pet scene  "the  horsemen"  J  absorb  all  atten- 
tion. In  this  symbol,  their  leader — the 
earth-Beast,  is  the  one  absorbing  object  of 
consideration.  He  is  "the  False  Prophet  of 
Chps.  16:13,  and   19:20.      His  lamb-like   ap- 

*I,u.  21:19.     13:15.     19:16,  etc. 


Scene  3d.  REVELATION,  13:  173 


pearance, — "he  had  two  horns  like  a  lamb" 
(5:6),  and  indeed  the  whole  character  of  his 
career,  has  convinced  all  expositors  that  this 
symbol  represents  a  spiritual  power. 

'  ^He  spake  as  a  dragon. ' '  His  lamb-like 
appearance  and  dragon  utterances  bespeak 
his  true  character — a  false  prophet,  a  lying 
teacher,  an  emissary  of  the  Dragon.  This 
corresponds  with  the  Lord's  description  of 
false  prophets,  which  come  to  you  in  sheep' s 
clothing,  but  inwardly  they  are  ravening 
wolves.*  He  is  innocence  and  benevolence 
itself  in  his  professions  and  apparent  objects 
— having  the  form  of  godliness;  but  there  is 
uncompromising  enmity  in  his  heart  against 
the  Lord,  and  his  annointed.f 

Because  of  these  prophetic  characteristics 
so  conspicuous  in  this  Beast,  there  is  much 
unanimity  among  the  commentators  in  iden- 
tifying him  with  the  Papacy.  But  we  see 
more  clearly  in  this  symbol  the  impersonation 
of  the  spiritual  and  intellectual  forces  of  the 
world.  It  is  the  product  of  Protestantism 
rather  than  of  Romanism.  Romanism 
cramps,  binds,  enslaves.  Protestantism  in- 
culcates individual  responsibility,  and  intel- 
lectual freedom;  and  so  emancipates  Rome's 
captives.    And  it  is  this  emancipated  intellect 


*Matt.  7:15.  t2d  Pet.  2:1,  &c.  I.Tim.  4:1,  &c.  2. Tim. 
3:1,  &c.     4:2,  &c. 


174  THE  APOCAIvYPTiC  DRAMA.       Act  IV. 

broken  loose  from  "  the  wisdom  that  is 
from  above"  and  captivated  and  enslaved  by 
that  which  is  "from  beneath,"  that  it  seems 
to  us  to  be  here  represented.  We  are  disposed 
therefore  to  regard  this  Beast  as  entirely  dis- 
tinct from  Rome,  Rome  finds  its  symbol  in 
the  Harlot- woman  of  Chp.  17:  That  it  is 
not  Rome  is  clear  from  the  different  relations 
they  occupy  to  the  sea-Beast,  and  also  in  the 
different  destinies.  Rome,  the  Harlot- 
woman,  is  to  be  carried — "  upheld  and  sus- 
tained, by  the  sea  Beast  and  his  ten  Kings, 
and  at  last  is  to  be  destroyed  by  them.  *  But 
this  earth-Beast  is  to  be  confederated  with 
the  sea-Beast.  He  will  be  an  efficient 
and  indispensible  helper,  and  they  two  shall 
meet  the  same  judgment,  and  go  into  perdi- 
tion together,  t 

We  regard  this  symbol  then,  and  also  that 
under  the  6th  trumpet,  as  apostate  Protestant- 
ism. It  is  not  improbable  that  at  this  crisis, 
Protestantism  will  melt  away.  There  is  no  ad- 
hesion about  it.  The  intellectual  freedom 
that  is  one  of  its  underlying  principles,  is 
also  one  of  its  chiefest  elements  of  dis- 
integration. Rome  will  stand  the  shock, 
for  a  while  at  least.  Its  adhesive  qualities 
are  great.      It  is    the    most  adaptive,   and  at 


17:3,  1«.     tl9:^0. 


Scene  3d.  REVELATION,  13:  175 

the  same  time  powerful,  government  the 
world  has  ever  seen.  It  can  fight  fire  with 
fire.  But  in  this  hour  of  evil's  supremest 
triumph,  our  boasted  Protestantism  will 
probably  vanish.  Its  best  elements  will  hide 
themselves  in  the  dens  and  caves  of  the 
earth — the  remnant  of  the  woman's  seed  will 
be  in  the  wilderness ;  and  the  rest — the  great 
mass  of  it,  will  be  th-e  multitude  of  armed 
horsemen  (heresies),  swelling  the  train  of  this 
earth-Beast — the  False- Prophet. 

This  is  no  fancy  sketch.  It  is  a  fact  too 
plainly  shadowed  forth  on  the  pages  of  his- 
tory. Protestantism  is  even  now  riddled 
through  and  through  with  false  doctrine.  It 
is  undermining  its  foundation  with  its  own 
hands.  This  is  not,  therefore,  an  exaggerated 
statement-that  Protestantism  will  melt  away. 
It  is  a  logical  conclusion,  a  self-evident  fact. 
If  Chillingworth's  position  is  sound — "the 
Bible,  and  the  Bible  only,  is  the  religion  of 
Protestants,"  and  it  never  has  been  ques- 
tioned, then  Protestantism  rests  on  the  Scrip- 
tures as  the  Word  of  God.  Aside  from  them 
it  has  no  foundation.  It  has  neither  tradi- 
tions nor  councils  to  guide,  nor  Church  au- 
thority to  fall  back  upon.  Take  away 
then  our  Bible,  and  our  Protestantism  must 
go.  And  this  is  what  German  theology  with 
its  so-called  "higher  criticism"  is  doing.      It 


176  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.        Ad  IV. 

is  undermining  the  authority  of  the  Scrip- 
tures as  the  Word  of  God  by  endeavoring 
to  prove  that  from  the  beginning  to  end  they 
are  a  fraud.  And  Protestantism  loves  to  have 
it  so.  This  show  of  wisdom  takes  wonder- 
fully. To  be  a  learned  man  and  a  great  the- 
ologian, is  to  be  able  to  throw  doubt  on  every 
important  statement  of  the  Word,  and  where- 
unto  must  this  tend  but  to  the  rankest  infi- 
delity, and  to  the  utter  extinction  of  Protes- 
tantism. And  the  progress  toward  it  is  not 
slow. 

You  see  it  in  its  doctrines  of  the  Divine 
Paternity,  of  future  probation,  conditional 
immortality,  and  human  perfectability;  in  its 
Sabbath  desecration,  in  spiritualism,  in  the 
assumptions  of  science  falsely  so-called,  in 
Positivism,  and  Agnosticism,  in  Humanitari- 
anism,  and  Theosophism,  and  in  the  name  of 
culture,  the  modernizing  and  revival  of 
Mohamedanism  and  the  Ancient  religions  of 
the  East.  All  this  is  the  outgrowth  of 
Protestant  freedom  of  thought,  and  all  these 
heresiarchs  have  a  common  bond  of  union — 
rejection  of  the  scriptures  as  a  Divine 
Authority,  and  denial  of  the  Lord  who 
bought  them.  * 

V.    12.      " //<^'  cxercisetJi  all  the  poiver  of 


*2  Pet.  1 :  etc. 


REVELATION,  13:  177 


the  first  Beast  (the  Beast  of  the  Sea)  before 
hini^  (i.  e.  in  his  presence,  R.  V.),  and  he 
caiisetJi  the  earth  ardtJiem  zvhich  dwell  therein 
to  worship  the  first  Beast^  zvhose  deadly  zvoiind 
zuas  healed^' — the  eighth  head.  There  is 
here  a  confedracy,  a  union  between  the 
world's  power  and  its  culture  to  promote  a 
common  end.  It  results  in  "the  deification 
of  nature  and  humanity. ' '  The  miraculous 
powers  accredited  to  both  these  Beasts  are 
real.  The  power  that  is  now  witheld,  will 
then  be  given  through  the  Dragon.*  The 
God  of  heaven  will  seem  at  this  terrible 
moment  to  have  abdicated  his  throne,  and 
to  have  deserted  his  world. 

V.  i^.  He  makes  '  ^a?i  image  of  the  Beast^ ' ' 
crV.  This  sea-Beast  will  be  the  incarnation 
of  world-power.  Its  pre-eminently  distin- 
guishing characteristic  will  be  the  denial  of 
God  and  his  Christ,  f  As  Christianity  has 
its  cross,  and  Mahometanism  its  crescent,  so 
this  sea-Beast  will  have  his  symbol.  It  is 
the  earth-Beast,  the  world's  wisdom,  culture, 
and  art,  that  will  devise  and  produce  it,  and 
recommend  its  adoption.  It  is  probably  this 
symbol  (image)  that  the  anti-Christ  will  erect 
in  the  holy  place — "the  abomination" 
spoken   of  by   Daniel   and   the  Lord.;]:     We 


*Matt.  24:24.    2  Thess.  2:9.    fl  John  2:22.    tDan.  9:27, 
Matt.  24:15. 


178  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Act  IV. 


are  also  reminded  of  the  great  metallic  image.  * 

V.  ij.  ^^  And  he  had po-a  'er  to  give  lifi\ ' ' 
&c.  These  events  are  yet  futnre.  There 
must  therefore  be  much  that  we  cannot  as 
yet  even  spell  out,  We  must  wait,  Spirit- 
ualizing the  language,  we  may  give  it  this 
interpretation. — Everyone  will  be  compelled 
to  wear  (v.  i6)  one  of  these  images  as  an 
evidence  of  his  acceptance  of  the  damnable 
heresy  on  pain  of  consequences  (v.  17),  and 
so,  for  every  man  the  image  will  have  a 
living  and  speaking  power  for  life  or  death. 
'  ^Should  be  killed. ' '  Science  and  '  'advanced 
thought"  has  already  begun  its  ostracism 
upon  those  who  adhere  to  the  old  doctrines 
of  the  cross. 

Vs.  16  and  ly.  Here  again  we  must  wait 
until  the  time  comes  before  we  can  know 
what  this  "mark"  is.  It  is  in  contrast  to 
the  sealing  of  chap.  7:. 

V.  18.  Numerous  attempts  have  been 
made  to  solve  this  problem  of  the  Beast's 
number.  Here,  too,  we  must  wait.  Doubtless 
to  those  who  will  be  most  concerned,  there 
will  be  given  "wisdom."      They  shall  know. 

This  is  a  woeful  picture  of  Apostasy  here 
presented.  Such  a  state  of  things  seems 
impossible    from    our  present  standpoint  of 


*Dan.  2:31.  etc. 


Scene  3d.  REVELATION,  13:  179 

Church  aggressiveness,  and  mission  effort, 
and  successful  work.  And  we  look  at  the 
interpretation  given  these  symbols,  and  ask 
in  amazement, — can  these  things  be?  Is  it 
possible  that  there  could  be  such  an  outbreak 
of  evil  amid  our  Christianization  and  civiliza- 
tion? Humanly  speaking,  it  seems  impos- 
sible, and  the  belief  of  the  great  body  of  the 
Church  is  against  it.  But  we  turn  from  this 
view  of  the  seeming  probability  of  things — 
from  this  worldly  outlook,  to  the  teachings 
of  the  word  of  God;  and  here  we  find  the 
''sure  word  of  prophecy''  announcing  this 
apostasy,  and  the  Lord  and  his  apostles  fore- 
warning concerning  it.  The  Lord's  com- 
mand to  disciples  is  to  teach  his  Gospel 
among  alT  nations.  Their  attitude  is  to  be 
that  of  witnesses.  *  And  while  the  Gospel  is  to 
be  preached  in  all  the  world,  it  is  nowhere  said 
that  it  will  convert  the  world.  On  the  con- 
trary, the  testimony  everywhere  in  the  Book 
is,  that  along  with  the  witnessing,  and  re- 
sulting from  it,  there  will  be  opposition, 
hatred,  persecution,  and  apostasy,  f  The 
mission  of  the  Gospel  among  the  nations 
during  this  dispensation  is  witnessing,  not 
converting.  It  is  to  take  out  from  among 
the  nations   a   people   for  his  name.  4!     Indi- 


*Lu.  24:48.     Acts  1:8.     tMatt.  24:4-14.     jActs  15:14. 


180  THE  APOCAIvYPTIC  DRAMA.      Act  IV. 

viduals  will  be  converted,  but  not  nations. 
It  is  important  to  note  this,  lest  the  ardent 
missionary  spirit  now  pervading  the  Church 
be  chilled  by  results.  The  Gospel's  grand 
mission  now  is  witnessing.  *  And  when  the 
story  of  the  cross  has  been  told  to  all  nations, 
and  God's  elect  ones  have  been  sealed,  what 
then?  Why,  "the  end" — the  revealing  of 
"the  man  of  sin" — the  Anti-christ,  with  his 
assumptions  and  blasphemies  ;  an  Apostate 
Church  and  world  running  after  him  ;  a 
translated  Church  ;  and  wrath  poured  out. 
The  lyord  Christ  will  not  come  until  after 
these  events.  So  at  least  an  inspired  apostle 
tells  us :  "  Let  no  man  deceive  you  by  any 
means,  for  that  day  (the  day  of  the  Lord's 
appearing)  shall  not  come,  except  there  come 
a  falling  away  first,  and  that  man  of  sin  be 
revealed,  the  son  of  perdition,  "f 


Revelation,  14: 

Act.  IV.      11:15  &c.  i2:to  20:1-4. 

Scene ^  4th.  Clip.  14: 

Location.      In  the  heavenlies. 

Dramatis  Personoe.  The  Lamb.  The  144,- 
000.  The  announcing  and  executing  angels. 
The  Son  of  Man. 


*Matt.  24:14.     VI  Thess.  2:3. 


Scene  it h.  REVELATION,  14:  181 

Time.  The  beginning  of  the  last  half  of 
Daniel's  last  week. 

The  fourth  scene  opens  on  Mount  Sion. 
It  is  a  picture  of  the  Church  triumphant. 
The  number  of  "the  elect"  is  now  complet- 
ed, and  as  a  completed  Church,  the  Lamb 
and  his  144,000  meet  together  for  the  first 
time.  No  wonder  that  they  are  joyous  and 
that  they  make  the  heavens  ring  with  their 
'  'new  song. "  There  never  was  in  all  the  past 
when  that  song  could  have  been  sung  be- 
fore; there  never  w^ill  be  in  all  the  coming 
cycles  when  this  song  will  not  be  sung. 

The  previous  scene  was  on  the  earth,  and 
was  terribly  earthy.  This  is  in  the  heavens, 
and  is  heavenly.  The  two  are  strongly  in 
contrast.  They  represent  events  that  are 
transpiring  at  the  same  moment  in  the  differ- 
ent localities.  At  the  beginning  of  Daniel's 
last  week,  three  and  a  half  years  before  "the 
end,"  the  two  Beasts  are  at  the  height  of 
their  career,  deceiving,  blaspheming,  perse- 
cuting, destroying;  and  the  remnant  of  the 
woman's  seed  is  being  driven  by  the  Dragon 
into  the  wilderness.  This  is  on  the  earth. 
At  the  same  time  the  Man-Child  has  been 
caught  up  unto  God,  and  his  throne.  In  the 
heavenlies,  the  Lord  and  his  elect  are 
gathered  in  a  joVous  and  everlasting  union; 
and  before  The  Throne^  and   in   the  presence 


182  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Ad  IV 

of  the  Living  Ones,  and  the  Elders,  with 
harp  and  voice,  they  sing  their  "new  song, 
and  the  shout  of  their  triumph  is  as  the  voice 
of  many  waters,  and  as  the  voice  of  a  great 
thunder. ' ' 

This  scene  does  not  represent  progressive 
events,  or  if  so,  to  a  very  limited  extent. 
Everything  as  we  have  suggested,  in  chap- 
ters 12:  J  3:  and  14:,  excepting  the  first  five 
verses  of  chapter  twelve,  has  a  common 
starting  point — the  sounding  of  the  7th 
trumpet.  The  exact  status  in  the  heavens 
and  on  the  earth  at  this  instant  of  time,  is,  as 
it  were,  photographed,  that  the  Seer  might 
behold  and  understand  the  situation,  and 
might  write  it  out  for  the  study  of  the  future 
Church.  The  events  pictured  in  12:1-6,  the 
birth  of  the  Man-Child,  his  danger  from  the 
Dragon,  and  his  being  caught  up  to  God  (the 
translation),  transpire  just  before  the  sound- 
ing of  the  7th  trumpet,  and  are  the  same  as 
those  represented  in  chapter  11:1-15.  They 
are  the  last  acts  under  the  6th  trumpet.  The 
7th  follows  immediately.  The  re-introduc- 
tion here*  of  the  same  events  is  explanatory. 
It  is  also  necessary  to  the  unity  and  beauty  of 
the  most  beautiful  of  pictures.  The  pictures 
that  follow,  and  that  photograph    the   exact 

*12:l-6. 


Scene  4th.  REVBlvATION,  14:  188 


conditions  in  heaven  and  earth  the  moment 
after  the  yth  trumpet  has  sounded,  are  (i), 
the  Dragon  expelled  from  the  heavenlies,  and 
coming  down  to  earth  in  great  wrath  (12:7 
&c);  (2),  the  woman  having  delivered  up  her 
Child  (the  translation),  fleeing  with  the  rem- 
nant of  her  seed  into  the  wilderness  from  the 
wrath  of  the  Dragon  (12:6,  14  &c);  (3),  the 
Beast  of  the  sea  (13:1  <-Scc)  energized  by  the 
Dragon,  exalting  himself  and  beginning  his 
blasphemous  career;  (4),  the  Beast  of  the 
earth  (13:11  &c)  taking  form  and  by  means 
of  the  power  given  unto  him,  identifying 
himself  with,  and  greatly  sustaining  the  sea- 
Beast:  (5),  the  Lamb  and  his  144,000 
gathered  on  the  Mount  Sion  in  the  heaven- 
lies  (i4:i&c.)  Such  is  the  position  of  things 
in  the  heavenly  places  and  on  the  earth;  im- 
mediately after  the  7th  Angel  sounds;  and  so 
they  continue,  modified  by  the  circumstances 
incident  to  the  out  pouring  of  the  vials,  dur- 
ing the  next  3^  years — to  "the  end"  the 
pouring  out  of  the  last  vial. 

V.  I.  In  chapter  11:12  and  12:5,  there 
has  been  given  us  as  seen  from  the  earth, 
the  last  glimpse  of  the  translated  ones.  '  'They 
ascended  up  to  heaven  in  a  cloud;  and  their 
enemies  beheld  them."  They  were  caught 
up  to  God  and  His  throne.  Here  is  the  next 
scene.      This  is  what  followed  immediately 


184  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Act  fV. 

after  they  were  "caught  up  unto  God."  In 
Matt.  25:10  &c. ,  we  are  shown  the  outside  of 
the  shut  door,  and  what  took  place  without. 
Here  we  are  privileged  to  look  within.  We 
now  see  the  trysting  place  and  the  banqueting 
hall,  and  we  can  feast  our  eyes  and  ears  on 
what  is  there  taking  place.  The  Bride  is 
with  the  Bridegroom.  The  Church  trium- 
phant is  with  its  exalted  head.  * 

''The  La77ib''  (R.  V.)  This  is  the  same 
who  "is  in  the  midst  of  The  Throne  ^"^  ^  ^  2,nA 
who  tends  his  people  with  a  shepherd's  care,t 
And  it  is  also  the  same  Lamb  whose  wrath  is 
so  terrible  to  his  enemies.  § 

''Motmt  Sioji.''  Where  is  it?  It  is  the 
"holy  dwelling  place"  of  the  Most  High, 
even  heaven.  || 

''An  htindred  Jm^ty  and  four  thonsand.^^ 
They  are  the  same  as  those  of  chapter  7:4, 
9.  They  are  also  the  witnesses  of  1 1  :i2,  and 
the  Man-Child  of  12:5.  They  are  they  who 
through  all  the  ages  have  "come  out  of  great 
tribulation,  and  have  washed  their  robes,  and 
made  them  white  in  the  blood  of  the  Lamb.  "1 
They  are  the  gathering  together  of  two 
classes  of  saints — those  who  are  asleep  and 
those  who  at  this  moment  of  time  are  alive 
and    yet    in    the    flesh,    and    who   shall   be 


*L  Thess.  4:14.    t5:6.    :}:7:9,  17.    >^6:10  &c.     ||2  Chroii. 
30:27.     Heb.  12:22,  23,     'Seep:  94.     7:14. 


Scene  4th.  REVELATION,  14:  185 

changed  in  a  moment  in  the  twinkling  of  an 
eye.*  In  the  scene  of  the  transfiguration,  we 
have  these  two  classes  represented  in  the  per- 
sons of  Moses  and  Elijah.  Moses,  who  died 
and  was  buried  on  the  Mount;  and  Elijah, 
who  was  translated  in  the  chariot  of  fire. 

^^Havmg  his  narne^  and  the  ftame  of  his 
Father^  written  on  their  foreheads^  ^  (R.  V.) 
This  is  in  contrast  with  those  w^ho  have  the 
mark  of  the  Beast  in  their  hands,  and  on  their 
foreheads,  t 

V,  J. '  ''A7id  they  sung  as  it  were  a  nezvsong. ' ' 
This  is  the  first  time  the  conditions  are  such 
as  to  call  forth  this  song.  It  was  never  pos- 
sible before.  The  number  of  "the  elect  "  is 
now  completed.  Up  to  this  time  it  had  been 
an  incomplete  and  a  divided  Church,  a  part 
struggling  on  earth,  a  part  waiting  in  heaven.  % 
But  now  it  is  a  completed,  and  an  united 
body,  its  song  is  therefore  possible,  and  pos- 
sible for  the  first  time.  Israel  could  not  sing 
their  song  of  triumph  until  all  had  passed 
safely  through  the  sea  and  were  on  the  other 
shore,  ^^  and  it  was  only  those  who  had  been 
''redeemed  from  the  earth"  who  could  sing 
this  song.  "  It  presupposes  the  entire  depth 
and  circuit  of  their  experience,  and  the  whole 


*  1.  Cor.  15:51  &c.     1.  Thess.  4:13,  &c.  tl'^:16. 

jRev.  6:9  &c.     ^Ex.  15: 


186  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Act  IV. 

state  of  their  being  brought  from  the  earth. ' '  * 
Neither  the  Living  Ones,  nor  the  Elders, 
take  part  in  this  song.  It  is  sung^  "before" 
them,  i.  e.  in  their  presence.  They  cannot 
join  in  it.  This  is  conclusive  evidence 
that  they  do  not  symbolize  the  Redeemed 
Church,  t 

V.  4.  These  redeemed  ones  are  desig- 
nated by  six  marks. 

(a)  "They  are  virgins."  The  Greek 
word  is  applicable  to  men  as  well  as  to 
women.  It  is  clearly  used  here  in  a  spiritual 
sense — they  have  kept  themselves  from  idol- 
atry. In  Clip.  15:2,  we  have  this  same  com- 
pany described  as  those  who  "had  gotten  the 
victory  over  the  Beast,  and  over  his  image, 
and  over  his  mark,"  etc.  Whoredom  and 
adultery  are  figures  of  constant  occurrence  in 
scripture  to  denote  spiritual  unfaithfulness. 
They  are  frequently  used  in  connection  with 
Israel.  J  Such  is  the  condition  of  the  Church 
in  Thyatira.§  Paul  hopes  to  present  the 
whole  Corinthian  Church  to  Christ  as  "  a 
chaste  virgin.  "||  So  in  Matt.  25:  the  Church 
is  represented  under  the  figure  of  ten  virgins. 
In  Chp.  7:   this  same  company  (the  144,000) 


^  Lange,  Rev.,  p.  278.  fSee  p.  59,  &c.  jNum.  25:1-4: 
Jer.  2:3:  Ezek.  6:28:  Hos.  1:3:  ^^Rev.  2:20&c.  ||2,  Cor. 
11:2. 


Scene  ^th.  REVELATION,  14:  187 

are  called  "Israel. "  As  the  name  "Israel" 
has  been  there  taken  in  a  figurative  sense,  so 
must  we  here  regard  the  term  '  'virgins. "  It  is 
used  as  the  anthithesis  of  '  'harlot' '  in  Chp.  ij: 
We  have  no  question  as  to  the  symbolic  mean- 
ing of  "harlot"  in  that  chapter,  we  need 
have  none  as  to  the  import  of '  'virgins' '  here.  * 

(b)  ^^They  follozv  the  Lamb  whitherso- 
ever he  goethy  This  was  the  command 
laid  upon  them  while  in  the  world,  and  as 
they  did  it  faithfully  amid  self  denials,  re- 
proaches, and  great  tribulations,  so  will  they 
continue  this  following,  as  "the  ransomed  of 
the  lyord  .  .  .  with  songs,  and  everlasting  joy 
upon  their  heads."! 

(c)  ^^They  zvere  redeemed  ^^  (purchased) 
(R.  V.).+  ^^From  arnong  men'''' — "God  did 
visit  the  Gentiles,  to  take  out  of  them  a 
people  for  His  name.  "(Acts,  15:14.  Rev.  7:9.) 

(d)  ^  ^  They  are  first  fruits  tinto  God^^  &c. 
"Every  man  in  his  own  order:  Christ  the 
first  fruits,  afterward  they  that  are  Christ's 
at  his  coming"  §  It  includes  all  the  Re- 
deemed of  all  dispensations  up  to  the  time  of 
this  gathering  on  Mount  Sion. 

(e)  ' '/;/  tJieir  mouth  zvas  found  jw guile. ' ' 
They  were  true  in  their  allegiance  and  their 
service.      "Faithful  even  unto  death. " 

*Ezek.  6:99.  j  Is.  35:10.  Rev.  7:14  &c.  1 1  Peter. 
1:18  &c.     \X  Cor.  15:20,  23. 


188  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Act  IV. 

(f)  ''They  are  ivithoiit  faiUty  Their 
qualities  are  summed  up  in  this  one  word — 
faultless.  The  promise  has  been  fulfilled. 
They  have  not  only  been  kept  from  falling, but 
they  have  been  '  'presented  faultless  before  the 
presence  of  his  glory  with  exceeding  joy."* 
This  is  the  Church  that  Christ  loved,  and  for 
which  He  gave  Himself,  "that  he  might 
scanctify  and  cleanse  it,  with  the  washing 
of  water  by  the  word;  that  He  might  present 
the  Church  to  Himself,  glorious,  not  having 
spot,  or  wrinkle,  or  any  such  thing;  but  that 
it  should  be  holy  and  without  bjemish."t 

Vs.  6  and  j.  We  enter  now  upon  a  new 
series,  of  visions.  Let  it  be  remembered  that 
all  these  scenes  are  prior  to  the  judgments. 
The  vial-angels  have  not  yet  started  on  their 
mission  of  wrath.  J  All  that  we  are  now 
considering,  and  that  we  have  considered,  is 
initiative.  It  is  preparing  the  Seer  to  under- 
stand the  better,  the  onward  movement  of  the 
history,  with  its  succession  of  judgments, . 
when  it  shall  be  resumed.  We  are  now  see- 
ing from  the  heavenly  stand-point.  We  have 
witnessed  the  gathering  of  the  144,000  on 
Mount  Sion,  their  meeting  with  the  Lamb, 
and  we  have  also  heard  the  voice  of  their  ex- 
ultation.     They  still    occupy    this  position, 

*Jude,  24.     lEph.  5:25-28.     JChp.  10: 


Scene  4th.  REVELATION,  14:  189 


and  will  continue  to  do  so,  until  the  King 
rides  forth  with  his  armies,  and  begins  His 
grand  movement  towards  the  earth.  The 
first  of  these  visions  that  follow  relates  to  the 
coming  judgments.  It  pictures  to  the  Seer 
three  Announcing  Angels.  The  first  is 
the  Gospel-preaching  angel.  "When  the 
fullness  of  the  time  was  come"  for  the  first 
advent,  angels  announced  the  birth  of  the 
Son  of  Man;  and  later  on,  his  messenger 
went  before  his  face  to  prepare  his  way  be- 
fore him,  and  to  proclaim  that  the  kingdom 
of  heaven  was  at  hand.  So  now  at  this  his 
second  advent  there  doubtless  will  be  ample 
warning^  griven  the  Church  and  the  World 
that  they  may  prepare  for  his  coming.  The 
angel  is  seen  flying  "in  the  midst  of  heaven 
having  the  everlasting  Gospel  to  preach,"  &c. 
The  ascension  of  the  witnesses*  produces 
great  consternation.  The  five  excluded  virgins 
will  now  have  oil  in  their  lamps.  The  rem- 
nant of  the  Woman's  seed  will  unhesitatingly 
testify  in  behalf  of  their  coming  Lord,  and 
there  will  be  thus  a  general  proclamation  of 
2d  advent  doctrines  to  all  them  that  dwell  on 
the  earth. 

V.  8.     This  is  the  second  Announcing  An- 
gel.     The      burden    of    his     message    is — •■ 


ai:12,  13. 


190  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Act  IV. 

"Babylon  is  fallen."  It  has  been  decreed, 
and  therefore  in  God's  sight  it  is  accom- 
plished. Bear  in  mind  that  these  scenes  are 
from  the  heavenly  stand-point.  May  we 
venture  the  suggestion  that  they  are  not 
only  to  help  the  Seer  to  a  better  understand- 
ing of  coming  judgments,  but  also  the 
newly  glorified  Church,  and  even  the  living 
creatures,  and  the  Elders.  Satan  is  no  longer 
present,  and  the  Divine  purposes  are  now, 
therefore,  being  unfolded  with  unwonted 
clearness  to  the  angels,  who  desire  to  look 
into  these  things. 

^''Babylon.^^  The  manner  in  which  this 
judgment  was  executed  is  given  more  fully  in 
Chp.  1 8. 

There  is  a  very  general  agreement  that 
Rome  is  here  symbolized  by  Babylon.  We 
prefer  seeing  in  the  symbol  the  God-defying 
world-power  of  Gentile  dominion.  Baby- 
lon was  the  beginning  of  this  world-power. 
It  was  the  mother  city,  and  is  used  therefore 
appropriately  to  represent  its  entire  social 
and  commercial  systems  to  the  end.  Thus 
we  speak  of  Rome  as  the  representative  of 
the  religious  system  that  centers  there.  So 
we  make  London,  Paris,  or  any  of  the  great 
capitals,  stand  for  their  respective  countries, 
when  we  would  speak  of  their  policy,  their 


Scene  ith.  REVELATION,  14:  191 

commercial  standing,  &c.  (Seep.  211,  &c. , 
and  217,  <S:c.) 

Vs.  p-ii.  The  third  Announcing  Angel 
here  delivers  his  message.  It  is  one  of  warn- 
ing. It  may  be  that  these  angels  (messen- 
gers) signify  a  revival  of  Gospel  preaching 
by  the  remnant  of  the  woman's  seed,  and  that 
their  utterances  indicate  the  burden  of  the 
message  that  shall  then  be  delivered.  And  if 
so,  we  learn  that  in  that  day  the  Church  will 
not  shrink  from  preaching  concerning  a 
coming  Christ,  a  judgment,  and  a  hell. 

The  Dragon  will  have  cause  to  be  wroth 
with  the  woman,  and  the  two  Beasts  will  make 
war  with  the  saints.  They,  therefore,  that 
keep  the  commandments  of  God,  and  the 
faith    of  Jesus,    will  have  need  of  patience. 

(V.   12.) 

V.  jj:  ''''Blessed  are  the  dead  ivhich  die  171 
the  Lord  from  henceforth.^  ^  From  this  time 
on  to  "the  end" — from  the  beginning  of  this 
last  half  of  Daniel's  last  week.  According 
to  our  scheme  of  interpretation,  this  is  the 
period  of  these  prophecies  (11:15,  &c.  And 
12:  13:  and  14:)  that  we  are  now  consider- 
ing. In  prophetic  time  we  are  standing  just 
31^  years  from  the  time  of  "the  end." 
The  translation  is  an  accomplished  fact. 
The  "great  tribulation"  is  about  be- 
ginning.      The  remnant    of   the    woman's 


192  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Ad  IV. 

seed  is  still  upon  the  earth.  During  the 
continuance  of  these  3^  years  their  condi- 
tion will  be  truly  pitiable.  The  Dragon  in 
his  wrath  is  making  such  war  upon  them 
as  he  has  never  done  before.  Blessed  are 
they  who  by  a  natural  death  are  called  away, 
and  are  thus  spared  this  prolonged  suffer- 
ing during  these  1,260  days. 

V.  14.  We  have  had  the  three  Announc- 
ing Angels.  We  now  have  the  three  Ex- 
ecuting Angels.  The  Lord  Christ  is  at 
the  head  of  these  as  he  was  at  the  head  of 
the  others.  As  the  head  of  the  first  trio, 
he  appears  as  the  Lamb  surrounded  by  his 
triumphant  Church,  because  these  announce- 
ments (of  a  preached  Gospel  and  of  Baby- 
lon fallen,  and  of  wrath  on  the  Beast-wor- 
shipers) are  for  his  Church.  His  Church  on 
earth  possibly  is  to  be  his  agent  (his  angels) 
in  keeping  these  facts  before  the  world.  But 
now  he  appears  in  the  majesty  of  judgment, 
and  he  is  the  "Son  of  Man"  (Matt.  24:30. 
26:64.  2  Thess.  1:7,  &c.)  These  angels  at 
his  commanding,  come  forth  out  of  the 
temple  to  execute  wrath  upon  a  world  that 
will  not  be  warned.  (Matt.  13:30.  Lange, 
on  Rev.  in  loco.) 

The  fulfillment  of  these  prophetic  pictures 
is  yet  future.  Any  attempt  at  explanation 
must  be  only  conjectural — guessing.     They 


Scene  5th.  REVELATION,  15:  193 

are  an  announcement  of  what  is  to  come.  The 
fact  of  the  fulfilhnent  is  recorded  in  17:16, 
and  18:  and  19:  19,  &c. 


Revelation  15:16: 

Act  IV.     11:15,  &c.,  to  20:1-4. 

Scene  5 th.  — Chp.  15:16: 

Location. — Partly  in  heaven,  and  partly 
on  earth. 

Dramatis  Personce. — The  Seven  Vial- An- 
gels. "  Them  that  had  gotten  the  victory." 
The  Living  Ones.      The  Unclean  vSpirits. 

Time. — The  last  three  and  a  half  years  of 
Daniel's  last  week. 

It  is  still  a  heavenly  picture  we  are  con- 
sidering. The  drama,  however,  begins  now 
to  move  on.  x\t  first  sight  this  chapter  ( 1 5) 
with  its  song  of  triumph  and  its  opened 
temple,  seems  a  repetition  of  Chp.  11:15,  etc. 
It  is  rather  a  going  back  to  that  scene  than  a 
repetition  of  it.  In  that  scene  the  temple 
of  God  was  opened.  It  was  just  at  this 
point  that  the  digression  began,  and  it  is  to 
this  point  that  the  seer  is  again  brought 
(V.  5)  that  he  may,  as  it  were,  take  a  fresh 
start  There  are  some  new  features  here, 
e.  g.  the  "seven  angels  having  the  seven  last 
plagues,"  and  the  song,  which  is  unmistak- 
ably that  of  the  translated.      But  these  be- 


194  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Ad  IV. 

long  legitimately  to  that  first  scene,  and  pos- 
sibly were  represented;  but  their  narration 
has  been  delayed  until  the  explanations  to 
be  given  would  make  them  more  intelligible. 

It  was  suggested  that  the  onward  move- 
ment of  the  prophetic  history  was  interrupt- 
ed at  the  close  of  Clip.  ii.  Then  the 
Temple  of  God  had  just  been  opened  in 
heaven.  The  object  of  this  interruption  was, 
as  stated,  to  give  the  seer  an  intelligent  out- 
look of  the  heavenly  and  the  earthly  situa- 
tion at  the  opening  of  this  last  half  of 
Daniel's  Seventieth  Week.  All  between,  from 
Chap.  12:  to  15:6,  we  regarded  as  explanatory, 
and  intended  to  prepare  the  Seer  for  the 
better  understanding  of  the  coming  judg- 
ment scenes.  For  our  own  assistance  let 
us  again  recall  these  scenes. 

{a)  The  Church  in  pain  (because  of  per- 
secutions), and  ready  to  be  delivered  of  her 
Man-child  12:1,  2. 

{b)  A  great  apostasy.      Vs:  3,  4. 

{c)  The  translation.  V.  5.  After  this, 
the  translated  Church  becomes  a  feature  in 
the  pictures.  These  three  events  are  just 
prior  to  the  7th  trumpet,  or  the  beginning  of 
the  last  half  of  Daniel's  Week.  What  fol- 
lows is  immediately  after  the  trumpet  sounds. 

(d)  War  in  heaven,  and  Satan  cast  down 
to  the  earth.     Vs.  7-10. 


Scene  sih.  REVELATION,  15:  195 

{e)  Joy  in  heaven  over  the  event.  Vs. 
•0-13. 

(/)  The  woman  flying  into  the  wilderness. 
and  protected.      Vs.  6,  14. 

{g)  The  wrath  of  the  Dragon,  and  his 
war  on  the  seed,  which  continues  to  the  end. 
Vs.  13,   17. 

(//)  Tlie  starting  on  their  career  of  the  sea 
and  the  earth- Beast.      Chp.  13: 

(/)  The  Lamb  and  his  Church  triumphant 
on  Mount  Sion.      14:1-16. 

(/)  The  three  Announcing,  and  the  three 
Executing  Angels.      14:6,  &c. 

These  are  pictures  that  reveal  to  the  Seer 
the  status  of  all  the  parties,  who  will  be  in 
one  way  and  another  concerned  or  involved 
in  the  coming  judgments.  The  whole  is 
preparatory.  It  is  a  mapping  out  of  positions, 
and  a  description  of  the  coming  actors.  It 
is  information,  essential  to  the  leader  on  the 
eve  of  great  events  or  conflicts.  The  com- 
mander-in-chief from  some  eminence  is  sur- 
veying his  proposed  battle  field.  His  aides 
are  about  him.  Yonder  he  has  massed  his 
infantry.  His  cavalry  are  hidden  away  in 
the  valley.  The  artillery  occupies  the  ele- 
vations. He  takes  in  the  whole  situation. 
x\ll  is  now  ready.  It  waits  but  the  appointed 
hour,  and  the  word  of  command.  So  here, 
after  these  pictures  have  been  shown    him, 


196  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Ad  IV. 

the  Seer  is  able  to  take  in  and  understand 
the  positions  and  relations  of  all  the  parties 
concerned  in  this  approaching  conflict  be- 
tween the  powers  of  good  and  evil. 

And  thus  taught  and  prepared,  the  Seer, 
in  Chp.  15,  is  carried  back  to  the  initial 
scene  of  the  7th  trumpet*  — the  triumphant 
song,  and  the  open  temple.  This  time, 
however,  the  prophetic  history  moves  on  to 
its  completion. 

V.  7.  Reference  is  not  made  again  to  the 
7th  angel- trumpeter.  He  had  sounded  f  and 
all  that  follows  is  consequent  upon  it.  We 
had  already  been  told  of  this  opening  of  the 
temple.  That,  together  with  the  anthem  of 
the  Angelic  Hierarchy,  is  the  first  event  that 
follows  this  sounding.  %  The  next  is  this 
appearance  of  these  seven  angels,  §  having 
the  last  seven  plagues.  They  come  from 
the  Open  Temple  (V.  6)  of  Chap.  11:19. 
Their  procession  is  not  mentioned  when 
we  are  first  told  of  the  opening  of  this 
Temple,  because  the  narration  there,  as  we 
have  suggested,  was  interrupted  for  a  while. 
But  here  it  is  resumed,  and  just  when  this 
course  of  events  was  interrupted.  Between 
verses  i  and  5,  on  a  smaller  scale,  we  have 
a  repetition  of  this  parenthetical   structure. 


ni:15,etc.    tll:lo.    |11;19.    ^15:1. 


Scene  5th.  REVEiLATlON,  15:  197 

Verse  i  pictures  the  procession  of  the  seven 
angels  with  their  plagues.  Verses  2,  3,  and 
4,  give  us  the  song  of  those  who  had  gotten 
the  victory  over  the  beast;  and  verse  5  takes 
us  back  again  to  the  temple  scene  of  V.  i, 
and  to  the  out-going  angels.  And  thus  it  is 
after  this  larger  interruption — the  Seer  is 
taken  back  in  V.  i  (Chp.  15),  and  again  in 
V.  5,  to  the  same  opened  temple,  he  had 
seen  in  Chp.  11:19.  ^^^  ^^^w  from  amid 
its  lightenings,  and  voices,  and  thunderings, 
he  beholds  these  seven  angels  coming  out. 
The  progress  of  the  prophetic  history  is 
thus  resumed,  and  all  in  between  these 
two  points  *  must  be  regarded  therefore  as 
parenthetical, 

V.  2.  These  are  clearly  the  redeemed 
ones — the  whole  Church  of  Chp.  14:  Their 
song  is  not  to  be  associated  with  that  of  the 
Living  Ones,  and  the  Elders  of  11:15,  etc.  It 
is  entirely  distinct.  To  have  introduced  it 
when  that  first  song  was  sung,  would  have 
been  utterly  confusing  to  the  Seer.  He  would 
have  been  bewildered  as  at  the  Elder's  ques- 
tion in  Chp,  7:13,  etc.  But  now  that  he  has 
been  shown  the  Man-child  caught  up  to  God, 
and  Mount  Sion  with  the  Lamb  and  his 
144,000,   he    has    no  difficulty    in    deciding 


11:19,  &  15:6. 


198  THE  APOCAIvYPTiC  DRAMA.       Act  IV. 

who  they  are  that  sing-  this  song  of  Moses 
and  the  Lamb. 

The  order  of  events  seems  to  run  thus.  The 
seventh  Angel  sounds.*  At  once,  amid  the 
anthems  of  angelic  hosts,  the  temple  opens,  f 
and  the  seven  Angels  make  their  appearance. J 
Then  the  ransomed  ones  take  up  the  strain, 
and  sing  their  song  of  Moses  and  the  Lamb.  § 

K  J.  Moses  was  the  agent  of  a  deliver- 
ance that  called  forth  a  song  of  triumph 
from  God's  people.  ||  That  was  a  type  and 
fore-casting  of  this  deliverance  of  God's 
Church,  of  which  Christ  is  the  author  and 
the  perfecter.T[ 

Vs,  5,  etc.  The  opened  temple,  the  issu- 
ing Angels,  the  living  ones  presenting  them 
with  the  seven  vials  full  of  the  wrath  of 
God,  no  man  suffered  to  enter  the  temple  un- 
til these  plagues  shall  be  poured  out — these 
things  have  their  significance,  but  the  time 
for  their  unfolding  is  not  yet. 


Chapter  i6. 
And  now  the  last  awful  scene  of  the  drama 
begins.  Let  us,  even  at  the  risk  of  too  much 
repetition,  go  back  a  little,  and  take  in  as  fully 
as  we  can  the  order  and  meaning  of  the  sym- 
bols as  we  have  been  interpreting  them. 


ni:16.      tl:16  19.      ±15:1  &  6.      $:$  15:2-5.        ||Ex.  16. 
Heb.  3:1  7. 


Scene  oth.  REVELATION,  16:  199 

The  yth  seal  contained  the  seven  trum- 
pets,* and  the  7th  trumpet  contains  the 
vials,  t  111  the  visions  connected  with  the 
seals,  we  recognized  the  history  of  Gentile 
dominion  ("  the  times  of  the  Gentiles  "),  to- 
gether with  that  of  the  Church  (visible  and 
invisible)  in  its  relation  to  this  dominion. 
Then  in  the  symbols  of  the  trumpets,  we 
have  presented  the  spiritual  and  intellectual 
world  forces,  and  again  the  history  of  the 
Church  (visible  and  invisible)  is  given,  as  it 
stands  related  to  these  forces.  These  histories 
synchronize.  They  have  a  common  starting 
point,  the  cutting  off  of  Messiah  the  Prince; 
and  a  common  terminus  at  or  about  the  mid- 
dle of  Daniel's  last  week  —  "in  the  midst 
of  the  week. "I  At  the  sounding  of  the  7th 
trumpet,  §  these  histories  are  taken  up  again 
from  this  common  point  to  which  they  had 
all  been  brought  (the  middle  of  Daniel's 
week),  and  they  are  continued  to  "the  end." 
This  7th  trumpet  therefore  ushers  in  the 
events  of  the  last  3 1^  years  in  their  relation  to 
Gentile  dominion  and  theChurch.  It  was  down 
to  this  point  that  the  6th  seal  and  the  6th  trum- 
pet had  brought  them.  Under  this  7th  trumpet 
there  is  given  first  of  all,  a  description  of  the 


^8:1,  2.     tn:15&15:l.     tDan.  9:27.     pi:15. 


200  tHE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.         Ad  IV. 

various  actors  *  that  are  to  be  interested  in 
any  way  in  the  coming  events,  whether  in 
heaven,  or  earth,  or  under  the  earth.  And 
what  an  array  of  visible  and  invisible  forces 
they  are!  Man  is  but  a  puppet  to  be  moved 
at  their  pleasure,  and  to  be  crushed  by  their 
power.  All  these  forces  are  marshaled  be- 
fore the  Seer.  He  is  placed  in  a  position 
where  he  can  at  a  glance  command  every 
movement;  and  when  everything  is  so  ex- 
plained that  he  can  take  in  intelligibly  all 
that  will  transpire,  then  the  great  movement 
connected  with  this  yth  trumpet  begins. 
— The  sealed  ones  are  on  Mount  Sion;  they 
are  safe,  having  escaped  those  things  that  are 
coming  on  the  earth:  The  Anti-christ  has 
taken  his  Dragon-given  seat,  and  has  started 
on  his  career  of  conquest  and  of  blasphemy, 
upheld  by  the  earth-Beast,  and  the  Harlot- 
woman:  the  earth  is  ripe  for  vengeance :t  the 
messengers  of  wrath  are  commissioned,  %  and 
the  command  given  them  §  to  go  their  ways: 
the  Angels  of  Clip.  7:1,  etc.,  are  no  longer 
restrained,  and  "the  four  winds"  are  loosed, 
and  now  rush  on  earth,  and  sea,  and  trees,  an 
overwhelming  storm.  And  this  time  it  is  not 
man's  wrath;  but  "  the  wrath  of  the  Lamb; 


11:15  &c.  to  15:1-6.     tl4:15.     :|15:6.     ^16:1. 


Scene  5th.  REVELATION,  16:  201 

for  the  great  day  of  his  wrath  is  come;  and 
who  shall  be  able  to  stand?' '  * 

V.  I.  The  third  and  last  woe  is  come,  f 
It  is  the  Anti-christian  night  of  the  world. 
Its  last  hour,  and  its  darkest,  because  it  just 
preceeds  the  dawn — the  Parousia, 

If  our  theory  of  interpretation  is  correct, 
we^  are  dealing  with  last  things,  and  con- 
sequently with  things  future.  It  is  impos- 
sible therefore  to  conjecture  the  nature  of 
these  plagues. 

In  connection  with  the  seven  trumpets, 
and  the  seven  vials  under  them,  Bp.  Elliott 
calls  attention  to  the  taking  of  Jericho,  the 
fall  of  the  first  city  that  obstructed  Israel's 
entrance  into  Canaan.  The  Israelites  march- 
ed around  the  city  once  for  six  successive 
days,  blowing  their  trumpets;  on  the  seventh 
djxy  they  compassed  it  seven  times.  .  "It  al- 
most seems, ' '  says  Elliott,  '  'as  if  some  power 
were  marked  out  hereby  as  the  N.  T.  Jericho, 
whose  domination  opposed  and  whose  over- 
throw would  introduce  the  Saints'  enjoyment 
of  the  heavenly  Canaan."! 

V.  2^  cfc.  The  vials  are  poured  out  upon 
the  earth,  sea,  rivers,  fountains,  air.  All 
nature  becomes  disjointed.  What  was  the 
life  and  happiness  of  man  now  turns  against 


*6:16,17.    tll:14.    Jlvange,  on  Rev.,  p. 


213. 


202  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Act  IV. 

him.  Note  the  rapidity  with  which  the  vials 
follow  each  other.  The  Lord  is  making  quick 
work  of  it.  He  will  execute  his  judgments 
speedily. 

V.  6.  ^''For  they  have  shed  {poured  oict 
R,  V.)  the  blood  of  saints''  (2fc.*  "Blood 
to  drink."  They  shall  be  satiated  with 
slaughter,  ^.  ,^,,  as  during  the  French  revolu- 
tion. 

V.  y.  ^^ And  I  heard  the  Altar.,  saying'^ 
&c.  R.  V.  Perhaps  those  who  cry  in  Clip. 
6:9,  &c. 

Vs.  lo-ii.  Cf  9:20,  21.  The  source  of 
this  delusion  that  could  thus  harden  their 
hearts  and  drive  them  to  defiance  against 
the  power  that  was  crushing  them,  is  to  be 
found  in  verse  14.  See  also  17:12-15,  and 
19:  19. 

V.  I  J.  ^^  Three  tin  clean  spirits.,'' — A 
trinity  of  evil.  They  accord  with  the  "se- 
ducing spirits,"  and  their  "doctrines  of 
devils,"  that  the  Apostle  Paul  tells  us  of  i. 
Tim.  4:1  &c.  Their  mission  is  by  the 
specious  reasoning  of  worldly  wisdom  to 
blind  the  eyes  of  men  to  the  truth,  and  to 
harden  their  hearts  against  the  God  of 
heaven.  The  Beast  and  the  False  Prophet 
are  their  agencies. 


^Lu.  18:7-8.     Rev.  6:11. 


Scejiesth.  REVELATION,  16:  203 

V.  14.  "  That  great  day  of  God  A  Imigh  ty. ' ' 
This  day  is  to  be  carefully  distinguished 
from  "the  coming  of  the  Lord."  That  has 
taken  place  already.  It  was  for  his  people.  * 
They  are  now  (at  this  stage  of  the  prophetic 
history)  with  him  on  Mount  Sion,  spectators 
of  these  earthly  judgments.  The  day  of  the 
Lord  is  his  coming  for  vengeance.  These 
tribulations  are  only  the  preludes  to  it.  Cf 
Mai.  4:  Joel,  2:  2.  Thess.  1:7,  &c. 

''To gather  them''  &c.  Cf  Joel,  3:9,  &c, 
Ezek.  38:39:     Dan.    12:1.      Zech.  12:14: 

In  Ezek.  38:  and  39:  the  Revisers  read: 
"Son  of  Man,  set  thy  face  toward  Gog, 
of  the  land  of  Magog,  the  prince  of  Rosh 
(C*K")),  Meshech,  and  Tubal,  &c."  (V.  2). 
Meshech  may  stand  for  Moscow,  and  Tubal 
for  Tobalsk. 

The  "Gog"  mentioned  here  (Ezek.  38,  2), 
is  not  to  be  confounded  with  the  '  'Gog' '  of 
Rev.  20:8.  The  two  struggles  may  be 
wrapped  up  in  this  prophecy  of  Ezekiel.  But 
this  up-rising  of  i6:i4t  is  to  be  introductory 
to  the  millennium,  that  of  Chp.  20:  will  be 
after,  and  just  before  the  final  judgment. 

V.  ij.  This  reads  like  a  parenthesis.  The 
R.  V.    marks  it  as    such.      It  is  the  oft    re- 


*2.  Thess.  2:1.    And  1.  Thess.  4:13,  &c.    tCf.  17:12-15. 
And  19:  19. 


204  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Ad  IV. 

peated  warning  of  the  Master,  and  it  is  al- 
ways addressed  to  his  Church.*  True  and 
faithful  ones,  will  then,  as  now,  be  found  in 
every  portion  of  the  visible  Church. 

The  Seer's  attention  is  for  a  moment 
diverted  from  the  onward  movement  of  the 
vision,  to  receive  this  message  from  his  Lord, 
that  he  may  write,  and  hand  it  downf  to  the 
Church,  t  It  is  intended  especially  for  the 
Church  of  that  day — the  woman  hiding  in 
the  wilderness.  It  will  not  only  be  a  source 
of  warning,  but  of  hope  and  cheer  to  the 
remnant  ol  the  seed  in  this  their  hour  of 
great  perplexity  and  distress. 

'  'Keepeth  his  garments. "      Cf  3 : 1 8. 

V .  16.  The  movement  of  the  vision  is 
resumed.  '^And  he  gathered^^  &(i.  The  re- 
visers translate — "they."  This  is  better. 
The  reference  then  would  be  to  the  '  'three 
unclean  spirits"  of  V.  13 — "and  they 
gathered,  &c."  '^Armagedo)i.^^  More  cor- 
rectly Har-Magedon.  Har,  signifies  mount- 
ain. Some  have  fancied  that  they  can  lo- 
cate the  spot.  It  is  certain  that  this  battle- 
field will  not  be  far  distant  from  Jerusalem. 

V.  ly.  ^^  The  seventh  angel  poured  out  his 
vial,  &c.''  It  is  the  last.  The  7th  seal  un- 
folded into  the  seven    trumpets,  and  the  sev- 


*Matt.  24:  43,14.      Lu.  12:89,40.      1.  Thess.  5:2,  &c. 
tlO:ll.     tl2:17. 


Scene  sth.  REVELATION,  16:  205 

enth  trumpet  into  the  seven  vials.  But  there  is 
no  unfolding  for  the  seventh  vial.  There  are 
no  more  developments.  This  is  the  end. 
' '//  is  done. ' '  A  cry  once  went  up  from  the 
cross — "It  is  finished."  That  death  and 
that  cry  were  great  mysteries.  But  they 
were  only  a  part  of  the  one  great  mystery  of 
sin.  That,  too,  is  now  finished.  "It  is 
done."  The  full  measure  of  divine  judg- 
ment is  meted  out.  The  last  drop  in  the 
cup  once  filled  with  wrath  has  been  poured 
out,  and  the  very  dregs  thereof  the  wicked 
of  the  earth  have  wrung  out  and  drank,  "^  The 
result  is  that  the  earth  is  a  wreck.  Its  phy- 
sical conditions  are  disturbed;  its  governments 
have  ceased  to  be;  its  social  order  and  com- 
merce are  broken  up;  and  multitudes  of  its 
inhabitants  are  slaughtered.  Those  that  re- 
main are  terror  stricken,  and  their  hearts  fail- 
ing them  for  fear  of  what  may  be  coming. 
Satan  and  the  two  Beasts  have  not  yet  been 
judged.  They  are  still  on  the  earth,  and 
now  realize  fully  their  defeat  and  coming 
doom.  But  one  more  event  is  waited  for.  The 
Lord  is  at  hand  indeed.  Not  only  heaven, 
but  earth  and  hell  now  regard  it  as  certain. 
Just  at  this  point  there  is  again  an  inter- 
ruption  in   the     onward   movement  of    the 

*Ps.  75:8. 


206  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Act  IV- 

drama,  and  it  extends  through  Chps.  17: 
and  18:  The  object  of  this  interruption  is  to 
show  the  Seer  the  results  of  the  out-pouring 
of  these  vials — to  let  him  see  as  it  were,  the 
wreckage. 


Revelation  17: 

Act  IV.       11:15  &c.  to  20:  1-4. 

Scene^   6th.      Chps.  17.  18: 

Location.     The  earth. 

Dra^natis  PersoncE .  The  Harlot.  The 
Sea  Beast.  The  ten  Kings.  The  explain- 
ing Angel. 

Time.  At  the  end  of  Daniel's  week,  after 
the  pouring  out  of  the  last  vial,  and  just 
prior  to  the  Parousia. 

The  first  object  to  which  the  seer's  atten- 
tion is  called  is  ' '  the  great  Harlot  that 
sitteth  upon  many  waters,"  and  the  judg- 
ment upon  her.  That  he  may  the  better 
understand  who  this  woman  is,  and  how  her 
judgment  is  brought  about,  the  explaining 
Angel  takes  him  back  a  little  in  the  order  of 
events.  At  the  beginning  of  the  career  of  the 
sea-Beast  and  of  the  ten  Kings,  or  King- 
doms,* this  Harlot  had  long  been  enticing 
and  debauching  the  nations.      For  centuries 

n3:l,  &c.,  17;13. 


Scene  6th.  REVELATION,  17:  207 

she  had  been  drunk  with  the  blood  of  the 
saints,  and  had  been  making  the  inhabitants 
of  the  earth  drunk  with  the  wine  of  her  forni- 
cation. 

The  sea-Beast — the  ''symbol  of  the  aggre- 
gate of  the  empires  of  this  world  as  opposed 
to  Christ,"  as  we  learn  from  13:3  and  17:8, 
receives  a  wound  unto  death,  and  for  a  while 
is  not.  But  his  wound  is  healed,  and  he  is 
again.  It  was  suggested  that  this  wounding 
to  death  was  the  wiping  out  of  all  social 
order  and  monarchical  forms  of  government, 
by  means  of  socialism,  communism,  etc.* 
Out  of  the  chaotic  state  that  will  follow,  the 
Beast  of  the  sea,  the  eighth  head,  would 
arise.  The  Harlot  woman  (the  Apostate 
Church)  will  be  the  first  to  welcome  him,  and 
to  assist  him  in  grasping  the  reins  of  govern- 
ment and  in  restoring  order.  For  this  assist- 
ance the  Beast  and  the  ten  Kings  will  for  a 
while  be  very  grateful,  and  will  carry  the 
woman — will  enrich  her,  and  sustain  her  in 
her  assumptions  and  aggrandizements.  As 
they  acquire  power,  however,  and  progress 
in  their  sacriligious  claims  and  blasphemies, 
they  will  realize  that  the  woman  is  in  their 
way  and  troublesome,  and  too  much  of  a 
burden   to  carry.     They  will  therefore   turn 


*See  p.  165,  &c. 


208  THB  APOCAIvYPTiC  DRAMA.        Ad  IV. 

against  her  and  hate  her.*  And  thus  it 
comes  to  pass,  according  to  the  Angel,  that 
the  ten  horns  and  the  Beast  are  of  one  mind 
in  hating,  and  in  destroying  the  woman. 

V.  I.  "/  ivill  show  tmto  ///<?^,"  &c.  It 
was  one  of  the  seven  vial-angels.  He  had 
already  executed  his  office.  The  judgment 
was  a  thing  of  the  past. 

' '  The  great  Harlot ' '  (R.  V. ).  A  woman  f 
is  almost  exclusively  the  symbol  of  the 
Church,  and  a  harlot — an  adulterous  woman, 
of  an  Apostate  Church.  Jer.  2:3:  Ezek. 
16:23:  Hos.  1:3:  2  Cor.  11:2.  C£  Eph.  5:25- 
27.      Num.  25:1,  &c.      Cf.  Rev.  2:14. 

''  Many  zvaters.''  Cf  V.  15.  Her  exist- 
ence and  power  rests  upon  the  ignorance 
and  superstitions  of  many  peoples.  The 
Roman  and  Greek  Churches  number  at  the 
present  time  fully  250,000,000. 

Kj.  "  The  Wilderness^  ^  is  here  equiva- 
lent to,  and  is  explained  by  the  "many 
waters"  of  Vs.  i  and  15.  The  expression  is 
used  in  this  sense  in  Ezek.  20:35,  36.  God 
says  to  Israel — "  I  will  bring  you  into  the 
Wilderness  of  the  people,"  &c.  If  this  is  the 
correct  interpretation,  then  the  Seer  must  be 
understood  as  saying — he  (the  Angel)  gave 
me  spiritual  comprehension  to  perceive  (take 


*17:16.     tSee  p.  143. 


Scene  6th.  REVELATION,  17:  209 

in)  Kingdoms,  and  great  masses  of  peoples* 
who  had  been  inveigled  into  the  meshes  of 
this  Harlot,  and  who  were  sustaining  her. 

"  /  saw  a  zvomaji  sitting  upon  a  scarlet- 
colored  Beast ^^^  i.  e. ,  up-borne,  sustained  by 
him.  This  is  a  formidable  combination. 
The  Beast,  and  the  ten  Kings,  and  the  great 
Harlot — the  God-defying  World-power,  and 
the  Apostate  Church,  in  confederation.  It 
has  long  existed.  It  exists  now,  and  will 
continue  during  this  dispensation.  The 
fowls  of  the  air  have  taken  possession  of  the 
tree  that  had  spread  its  branches  to  heaven. 
Yea,  the  Woman  herself  mixed  her  meal 
with  the  unholy  leaven,  until  the  whole  be- 
came leavened,  t  But  the  Witnesses  for  the 
sufferings  of  Jesus,  and  the  glory  to  follow, 
must  neither  be  surprised  nor  discouraged  at 
the  successes  of  the  one,  nor  because  of  the 
God-defying  assumptions  of  the  other.  Their 
time  is  coming. 

The  position,  outward  adornments,  and 
atrocious  doings,  of  this  woman,  point  un- 
questionably to  the  Church  of  Rome.  B.  g. 
Her  arrayment  in  purple,  etc.  (V.  4.)  The 
word  ' '  Mystery'' '  on  her  forehead  (V.  5). 
We  have  it  on  good  authority  that  this  word 
was    once     inscribed  on  the    pope's     tiara. f 


*Matt.  4:8.     fMatt.  13:31-34.     t^ange  on  Rev.  p.  309. 


210  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.         Act  IV. 


''Mother  of  Harlots:''  She  styles  herself 
' '  Rome,  Mother  and  Mistress. "  "  Drunken 
zvith  the  blood  of  the  Saints^ ' '  sets  forth  her 
merciless  fury  in  shedding  the  blood  of  God's 
people. 

And  yet  we  are  not  to  regard  this  "  great 
Harlot"  as  exclusively  Rome.  In  its  total- 
ity, '  'corrupt,  lifeless  Christendom  is  the  har- 
lot." Her  assumptions,  power,  and  savage 
blood-thirstiness,  have  given  Rome  the  un- 
enviable prominence  as  the  apostate  Church — 
"The  Mother  of  Harlots."  As  the 
woman  in  Clip.  12:  stood  for  the  true  (the  in- 
visible) Church,  bearing  her  Man-child  that 
is  caught  up  to  God,  and  still  continuing  in 
the  world  with  the  remnant  of  her  seed  per- 
secuted by  Satanic  power;  so  this  woman 
symbolizes  "the  unfaithful  Church  generally 
and  universally  "  in  its  apostasy,  and  affiilia- 
tion  with  the  Antichristian  power.  It  is  not 
only  the  Roman,  but  the  Greek  Church,  and 
those  Protestant  Churches  that  affiliate  with 
them  in  their  ecclesiastical  views.  Because  of 
her  prominence,  Rome  is  made  to  stand  for 
the  whole  apostasy.  It  will  be  a  unit  in  lend- 
ing itself  to  the  sea-Beast  and  the  ten  Kings; 
and  up  to  a  certain  point  it  will  be  an  all 
important  factor  in  promoting  their  designs. 

This  confederacy  is  of  long  standing,  and 
this  united  action  in  carrying  out  satanic  pur- 


Sce7ie6th.  REVELATION,  17:  -         211 

pose  against  the  woman's  seed  at  this  special 
time,  finds  illustration  and  foreshadowing  in 
the  Lord's  day,  when  the  visible  (the  Jewish) 
Church  leagued  itself  with  Gentile  power  to 
'*  cut  off"  Messiah. 

' '  A  scarlet_  colored  Beast. ' '  This  is  the 
same  with  13:1,  &c. 

K  5.  "  Mystery. ' '  The  Revisers  in  their 
margin  propose  this  reading — "and  upon 
her  forehead  a  name  written,  a  mystery, 
Babylon  The  Great,  ' '  etc.  lyange  *  gives 
a  similar  rendering — "on  her  forehead  she 
has  a  name  written  as  a  mystery,  i.  e. ,  whoso- 
ever is  able  to  read  the  name,  will  read  the 
following  inscription:  "  Babylon,"  etc.  This 
reading  of  the  passage  seems  to  be  the  correct 
one,  judging  from  the  symbolic  use  of  the 
word  throughout  this  book. 

' '  Babylon. ' '  Babel  or  Babylon,  confusion. 
The  name  takes  us  back  a  long  way,  even  to 
the  plains  of  Shinar.f  Here  we  have  the 
first  record  of  an  high-handed  act  of  open 
apostasy  and  rebellion  against  the  Most  High. 
It  is  the  beginning  of  worldly  assumption 
and  rebellion.  J  Babel  soon  develops  into 
Babylon.  And  so  Babylon  from  being  the 
seat,  became  the  symbol  of  worldliness,  and 
of  the  Antichristian  power. 

-On  Rev.,  p.  307.    fGen.  11:   tGen.  10:  9, 10. 


212  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Act  IV. 

This  Harlot  woman  (the  Apostate  Church) 
is  given  this  name;  because  (i)  she  would 
(as  known  by  the  spirit  of  prophecy)  identify 
herself  with  this  God-defying  Gentile-power; 
because  (2)  she  would  possess  the  city  (Rome), 
which  at  the  time  the  vision  was  given,  was 
the  successor  of  Babylon  as  the  capital  of 
this  world-power;  because  (3)  it  was  from 
her  (all  through  the  iron  and  clay  period  of 
this  power)  that  these  kingdoms  would  derive 
the  cohesion  and  the  strength  to  enable  them 
to  maintain  their  positions,  and  to  dominate 
over  the  peoples  and  nations;  because  (4)  she 
would  be  ever  interfering  with  and  influenc- 
ing the  policy  and  politics  of  these  king- 
doms; because  (5),  assuming  the  spiritual 
power  to  be  superior  to  the  temporal,  and  by 
this  means  controlling  the  consciences  of  the 
masses  (V.  15),  she  would  be  enabled  to  en- 
force her  claims,  and  thus  would  be,  as  she  is 
to-day,  a  powerful  factor  in  the  midst  of 
these  world-governments.  Hence  the  state- 
ment of  V.  18,  "The  woman  which  thou 
sawest  is  that  great  city,  which  reigneth  over 
the  kings  oi  the  earth." 

She  is  called  "that  great  city,"  possibly 
to  designate  her  from  the  Babylon  of  the 
world-power,  because  of  the  heinousness  of 
her  apostasy  and  the  magnitude  of  her 
claims.     The   I^ord  says:  "My  kingdom   is 


Scene  6th.  REVELATION,  17 :  213 

not  of  this  world."  She  says:  "It  is." 
And  in  his  name,  she  has  made  herself 
empress  of  the  world,  reigning  over  the 
kings  of  the  earth,  and  domineering  the  con- 
sciences of  men. 

''The  Mother  of  Harlots.''  This  clearly 
implies  that  she  (the  Roman  Church)  is  not 
alone.  It  gives  her  pre-eminence  over  the 
others,  and  she  is  made  to  stand  for  all.  The 
Revisers  translate:  "The  mother  of  the  har- 
lots, and  of  the  abominations, ' '  etc. 

V.  6.  "/  ivondered  with  great  admira- 
tion''— "with  great  wonder,"  (R.  V.)  The 
seer  recognizes  the  symbol  (a  woman)  as  that 
of  the  Church.  Perhaps  he  recalls  her  as 
he  had  last  seen  her  in  Chp.  i2,  and  he  is 
therefore  amazed  at  her  present  appearance, 
"drunken  with  the  blood  of  the  saints,  and 
with  the  blood  of  the  martyrs  of  Jesus,  and 
identified  with  the  blasphemous  Beast. 

Vs.  8-14.  We  have  identified  this  Beast 
with  the  sea-Beast  of  Chp.  13,  and  for  our 
explanation  of  these  verses,  see  p.    159,  &c. 

V.  p.  ''Here  is  the  mind  zvhich  hath  wis- 
dom. ' '  Wisdom  not  of  this  world,  but  which 
Cometh  from  above.  We  are  reminded  of 
Daniel,  12:4,  9,  10.  It  is  a  note  of  explana- 
tion and  warning  intended  for  the  Lord's 
people  who  shall  be  on  the  earth  when  these 
developments  come  about.     His  people  will 


214  THE  APOCAIvYPTIC  DRAMA.         Ad  IV. 

be  found  then,  as  now,  hidden  away  in 
all  the  Churches,  and  to  their  enlightened 
minds  the  call  will  be  understood  and 
appreciated. 

V.  i^.  ^^  These  shall  make  war  witJi  the 
Lamb. ' '  It  must  be  through  the  remnant  of 
the  Woman's  seed.  Here  is  the  only  way 
that  they  can  strike  at  the  Lamb.  The 
statement  helps  us  to  the  reason  why  these 
powers  should  turn  against  the  Harlot  who 
had  been  so  helpful  to  them.  In  striking  at 
the  Harlot,  they  thought  they  were  warring 
against  the  Lamb.  But  it  is  a  case  of  mis- 
taken identity.  This  woman  was  a  fraud. 
She  was  a  wretched  caricature  of  the  follow- 
ers of  the  Lamb — "the  called,  and  chosen, 
and  faithful,"  Still,  in  her  outward  forms, 
and  in  her  spiritual  assumptions,  she  was  a 
reminder  of  Him,  and  in  so  far  was  a  hin- 
drance. They  hated  him  and  therefore  must 
hate  everything  that  reminded  them  of  Him. 
"The  remnant"  were  scattered  and  hidden 
away.  They  could  only  be  attacked  and 
slaughtered  as  individuals.  But  this  woman 
is  ostentatiously  visible.  She  "sitteth  upon 
many  waters,"  and  in  her  corporate  capacity 
she  is  accessible  to  those  who  hate  her. 

V.  i6.  The  Beast  and  ten  horns  are  the 
instruments  in  the  execution  of  this  judg- 
ment.     This,    of  course,    is   prior   to    their 


Scene  6th.  REVELATION,  17:  215 

being   overcome    by    the   Lamb.      Note   the 
four  elements  of  destruction. 

1.  They  "make  her  desolate" — by  with- 
drawing the  support  of  the  secular  arm. 

2.  They  make  her  "naked" — they  strip 
her  of  her  false  claims  and  they  expose  her 
frauds,  and  take  from  her  all  her  spiritual 
offices. 

3.  They  "eat  her  flesh" — her  substance 
— her  ill-gotton  wealth,  and  divide  it  among 
themselves. 

4.  They  "burn  her  with  fire."  Lange 
says:*  "In  a  sarcastic  auto  dafi^  suggestive 
of  so  many  like  proceedings"  in  her  drunken 
rage  against  God's  children. 

And  so  the  Lord  spues  the  Apostate  Church 
out  of  his  mouth,  t 

V.  J  J.  ^^For  God  hath  put  it  into  their 
hearts  to  fulfil  his  ivill^''^  &c.  God's  grasp 
upon  his  government  is  never  relaxed.  The 
heathen  may  rage,  and  the  people  imagine  a 
vain  thing,  and  the  Kings  of  the  earth  set 
themselves  up,  and  the  rulers  take  counsel 
together,  and  that,  too,  against  the  Lord; 
but  his  bit  is  in  their  mouths.  They  cannot 
lift  a  finger,  or  take  a  step,  without  his  per- 
mission. Nay,  more,  he  orders  and  controls 
all  their  action.     And  when  they  think  them- 


^On  Rev.,  p.  309,     13:16. 


216  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.        Act  IV 


selves  most  free  and  most  wise,  and  most 
independent,  then  it  is  that  they  are  but 
instruments  in  accomplishing  the  good  pleas- 
ure of  his  will.  And  yet  they  are  free. 
What  they  do,  they  do  from  the  heart,  and 
with  a  will.  In  this  instance  we  are  told 
"these  shall  hate  the  Harlot."  The  de- 
struction they  brought  upon  her  was  wholly 
in  accordance  with  their  own  desires,  and 
for  the  accomplishment  of  their  own  pur- 
poses. But  Jehovah  God,  the  God  whom 
they  had  denied  and  blasphemed,  was  also 
accomplishing  his  purposes.  Howbeit  they 
mean  not  so,  neither  do  their  hearts  think  so.  * 

Just  at  this  point  in  the  prophetic  history, 
and  by  way  of  review,  we  may  notice  the 
well  organized  confederacy  that  has  been 
developed  in  this  portion  of  the  drama,  f 

{a)  The  Dragon^  Chp.  12:3,  etc.  He  is  re- 
presented as  having  seven  heads,  etc.  By 
this  appearance  Satan  is  identified  with 
Gentile  dominion.  He  has  energized  it 
through  its  long  career,  beginning  with  Babel 
and  Nimrod.J  And  so  here  he  wears  the 
emblems  of  worldly  dominion.  He  is  the 
power  behind  the  throne.  It  is  not,  however, 
until  after  he  has  been  excluded  from  the 
heavenlies    and    from  the    Divine  presence, 


*Is.  10:5.  &c.      tis.  8:  9,  &c.     Rev.  16:  13,  14.  tGeii. 
10:9.  10. 


Scene  6th.  REVELATION,  18:  217 

and  has  come  down  to  the  earth,*  that  he 
takes  human  shape,  and  gives  his  power,  etc.f 
to  a  man.  His  destiny  is  given  us  in  Chp. 
2o:io. 

(b)  The  Beast  —  the  sea-Beast.  %  His 
destiny  is  recorded  in  Chp.  19:^0.  He  is 
not  killed,  but  taken,  and  cast  alive  into  a 
lake  of  fire.  All  prophetic  language  points 
to  special  judgment  upon  the  Antichrist.  § 

(c)  "The  ten  Horns,"  or  Kingdoms,  out 
of  which  the  sea-Beast  is  to  arise,  and  which 
will  give  their  power  and  strength  to  him.  || 
Their  destiny  is  given  us  in  Chps.  16:14,  and 
19:17,  etc. 

{d)  ''Another  Beast'' — the  earth-Beast. If 
He  is  the  same  as  the  False- Prophet,**  His 
destiny  is  united  with  that  of  the  sea-Beast,  ft 

{e)  ''The great  Harlots XX  For  her  destiny 
see  17:16,  etc. 


Chapter  18: 


There  is  much  unanimity  in  the  interpreta- 
tion of  the  symbols  of  these  two  chapters.  §§ 
The  Harlot  of  the  one,  and  the  Babylon  of 
the  other,  are  types  of  the  apostate  Church, 

*12:9.  tl3:2.  +13:1,  etc.  ^Dati  9:27;  7:11;  8:25;  11:45. 
2.  Thess.  2:8;  Rev.  7:11.  ||13:1,  17:12,  13.  1113:11. 
**16:13.     ttiy:20.     \%\1.     ^^The  17:  and  18: 


218  THE  APOCALYTIC  DRAMA.         Ad  IV. 

i.  e.  of  Rome.  Chapter  17:,  it  is  supposed, 
pictures  the  Harlot  Church,  and  discloses  the 
agents  of  her  destruction;  while  chapter  18: 
describes  to  us  under  the  symbol  of  a  city — 
"great  Babylon,"  the  results  of  this  destruc- 
tion. 

There  are  very  serious  difficulties  that  call 
for  explanation  before  this  view  can  be 
accepted.  It  is  probable  that  no  explanation 
can  be  given  that  will  be  free  from  difficulties, 
we  must  therefore  examine  and  choose  that 
which  presents  the  least. 

The  statement  in  V.  18  (17:) — The  woman 
which  thou  sawest  is  that  great  city,"  etc., 
seems  strongly  to  favor  the  close  connection 
and  identity  of  these  two  chapters.  The 
name  "Babylon  the  Great,"  that  is  upon  the 
Harlot's  forehead,  also  strengthens  this  view. 
Further,  in  Vs.  3,  6-9,  of  Chp.  18,  there 
are  expressions  and  allusions  that  tally  with 
the  descriptions  and  doings  of  the  Harlot  in 
Chp.  17,  and  that  makes  the  argument  all 
the  stronger  in  favor  of  the  oneness  of  these 
visions. 

On  the  other  hand,  there  are  descriptions 
and  facts  to  be  noted  in  this  1 8th  Chp.  that 
can  have  no  relation  to  an  apostate  Church, 
nor  to  the  city  of  Rome,  as  its  representative. 
They  seem  clearly  to  indicate  that  the  visions 
refer  to  different  subjects. 


Scene  6th.  REVElvATlON,  18:  219 

I.  Note  the  fact  that  the  chapters  them- 
selves seem  to  give  distinct  evidence  to  this 
effect.  The  agencies  used  in  describing  to  the 
Seer  the  results  of  the  judgments  are  differ- 
ent. Chp.  17:  opens  with  the  announcement: 
"One  of  the  seven  Angels  which  had  the 
seven  vials,  talked  with  me,"  etc.,  and  in 
Chp.  18:  the  Seer  says:  "After  these  things  I 
saw  another  Angel  come  down  from  heaven, ' ' 
etc.  Here  is  a  different  agent.  He  is  not 
even  one  of  the  seven-vialed  angels.  The 
conjunction  "and,"  at  the  beginning  of  the 
verse,  is  omitted  by  the  Revisers,  thus  dis- 
connecting the  two  visions  more  completely. 
We  seem  in  this  way  to  be  notified  that  the 
vision  of  the  Harlot  is  finished — that  we  are 
done  with  her,  and  that  we  are  now  called  to 
the  consideration  of  other  events. 

Keep  in  mind  the  situation  as  we  are  sup- 
posing it.  The  last  vial  has  been  poured 
out.  The  earth  is  a  wreck.  The  onward 
movement  of  events  has  been  arrested,  and 
the  Seer  has  been  called  to  look  upon  the 
results — the  debris.  The  first  accomplished 
judgment  to  which  his  attention  is  directed 
is  that  of  the  woman's — the  Harlot's.  It  is 
complete.  But  the  woman  is  not  the  only 
subject  for  judgment.  There  are  many. 
There  are  all  her  confederates.  Not  one  will 
be   allowed  to  escape.     In  Chp.  17:  we  are 


220  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Act  IV. 

told  that  she  is  burnt  with  fire — consumed 
utterly.  There  is  nothing  more  to  be  said 
concerning'  her.  Here  ends  her  history. 
And  now  (Chp.  i8:),  after  this  picture  of 
completed  judgment  has  been  exhibited,  an- 
other angel  comes  ^to  the  Seer,  and  shows 
him,  as  we  think,  another  wreck.  True,  he 
speaks  of  this  destruction  as  that  of  "Babylon 
the  Great"  (V.  2),  the  name  given  to  the 
apostate  Church  of  Chp.  17:.  The  reason 
for  the  use  of  this  symbol,  in  connection 
with  the  Harlot  woman,  has  already  been 
given.  *  This  apostate  Church  has  been  so 
greedy  after  political  power,  and  has  been  so 
successful — "reigning  over  the  kings  of  the 
earth,"  that  of  necessity  she  becomes  identi- 
fied in  spirit  and  in  action  with  the  world- 
power.  Consequently  the  language  that  is 
descriptive  of  the  one  is  also  applicable  to 
the  other.  Thus  we  can  readily  reconcile 
the  fact  that  these  two  chapters  treat  of 
different  subjects,  although  using  descriptive 
language  that  in  several  instances  is  identical. 
2.  Note  also  that  while  in  Chp.  17:  the 
Harlot  is  spoken  of  as  "Babylon  the  Great," 
in  Chp.  18:  there  is  no  mention  made  of  the 
Harlot.  The  subject  of  this  last  vision  is — 
a  city,  a  great  centre  of  political  power   and 

*p.  211. 


Scene  6th.  REVELATION,  18:  221 

commercial  influence,  and  if  she  is  called  "a 
queen,"  and  "no  widow,"  it  is  the  self-as- 
sertion of  her  own  heart.  It  is  also  the  spirit 
and  language  that  the  O.  T.  Scriptures 
ascribe  to  Babylon,  the  imperial  mistress  of 
the  world,  the  capital  of  Gentile-power  at 
that  time.  *  All  her  surroundings  are  mater- 
ialistic —  merchantmen,  ships,  commerce, 
slaves,  all  kinds  of  merchandise,  enriching 
herself  and  others.  Very  different  from  this 
is  the  woman  in  Chp.  17:  She  wears  the 
gorgeous  apparel,  but  she  does  not  sell  it,  and 
even  where  they  seem  to  have  things  in  com- 
mon there  is  a  difference.  E.  g.  The  in- 
habitants of  the  earth  are  said  to  have  been 
made  drunk  with  the  wine  of  the  Harlot's 
fornication  ;t  but  of  this  city  it  is  announced 
that,  the  nations  have  drank  of  the  wine  of 
the  wrath  of  her  fornification  (18:3).  In  the 
first  instance  it  is  the  picture  of  feasting  and 
debauchers^,  delightful  to  the  animal  man; 
in  the  other,  it  is  the  participation  in  the 
judgments  inflicted.! 

3.  The  statement  V.  24  (18:)  is  not 
strictly  true  of  the  Harlot  of  Chp.  17:;  but  it 
is  of  Babylon  as  the  symbol  of  Gentile 
dominion.  Rome,  as  an  Apostate  Church, 
has  for  the  most  part    used  the  secular  arm 

*Is.  13:19.    14:4.    47:1,  &c.    Zepli.  3:15.    tl7:2.     +Rcv. 
14:10. 


222  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.      Ad  IV. 

in  her  murders.  Whereas  this  world-power 
has  not  only  slaughtered  God's  people  that 
have  been  handed  over  to  it,  but  multitudes 
that  cannot  be  charged  to  Rome.  In  regard 
to  this  power  it  can  truly  be  said — "and  in 
her  was  found  the  blood  of  prophets,  and  of 
saints,  and  of  all  that  were  slain  upon  earth." 
The  devil  was  a  murderer  from  the  beginn- 
ing. * 

4.  Then  observe  that  in  Clip.  17:  the 
Beast  and  the  ten  Kings  hate  the  woman. 
They  are  of  one  mind  in  desiring  her  destruc- 
tion, and  are  the  willing  instruments  in  its 
accomplishment.  Not  so  in  the  destruction 
of  the  Babylon  of  Chp.  18:  Neither  the 
Beast,  nor  the  ten  Kings  are  the  instruments, 
of  it.  They  do  not  desire  it.  On  the  con- 
trary, they  mourn  over  it.  Kings  (V.  9),  as 
well  as  merchants,  bewail  her. 

5.  And  observe  further,  that  this  lamen- 
tation by  representatives  of  commerce,  never 
has  been,  and  never  can  be,  applicable  over 
the  destruction  of  an  Apostate  Church,  nor 
over  the  City  of  Rome,  as  its  representative. 
Rome  has  never  been  a  commercial  city.  Her 
situation  is  against  it,  and  the  lack  of  states- 
manship has  ever  diiven  from  her  gates  the 
commerce  that  might  have  drifted  towards  it. 


7ohn,  8;14. 


Scene  6th.  REVELATION,  18:  223 

6.  And  once  more  let  it  be  noted  that 
while  in  the  17th  chapter  the  agents  of  the 
woman's  punishment,  and  the  manner  of  it, 
are  carefully  given;  in  Chp.  i8th,  all  such 
information  is  with-held.  The  intimation  is 
that  it  is  sudden — "in  one  hour,'"^  and  we 
are  left  to  the  inference  that  it  is  effected 
without  human  agency.  If  man  had  accom- 
plished her  ruin,  "the  Kings  of  the  earth 
would  have  been  the  agents  most  forward  in 
the  movement;  but  we  read  that  they  are 
among  her  chief  mourners. 

In  view  of  these  considerations,  we  are  dis- 
posed to  regard  the  Babylon  of  Chp.  18th, 
as  the  symbol  of  the  Babylon  of  the  Euphra- 
tes. As  such,  it  stands  for  the  civilization 
and  dominion  of  Gentile  power,  At  the 
time  of  this  overthrow,  it  may  have  been 
centralized,  as  in  the  days  of  Nebuchadnez- 
zar. Perhaps  after  the  destruction  of  the 
Harlot  by  the  Beast,  Rome  may  be  made  the 
capital  of  his  ursurpations,  of  his  commerce, 
and  of  his  idolatrous  practices.  We  are  not, 
however,  so  much  disposed  to  regard  it  as  the 
destruction  of  a  city,  as  of  a  system.  Baby- 
lon represents  the  whole  succession  of  Gen- 
tile dominion  in  the  culmination  of  its 
power,    its    culture,     its    prosperity,    and  its 

*Vs.  10,  19. 


224  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Act  IV. 

wickedness.  It  is  the  world  full-ripe  for 
judgment.  It  is  the  great  metallic  image 
standing  on  its  feet,  and  the  stone  crashing 
against  it,  and  toppling  it  over,  and  grinding 
it  to  powder. 

Any  difficulties  that  may  be  suggested  by 
expressions  found,  e.  g.  in  Vs.  3,  6,  9,  18, 
will  be  readily  removed,  by  keeping  before 
us  the  fact  that  this  world-empire  will  have 
assumed  at  this  time  an  ecclesiastical  charac- 
ter. Like  the  Apostate  Church,  it  has  become 
a  politico-ecclesiastical  power.  Its  head  is 
the  Anti-Christ.  He  has  assumed  divine  pre- 
rogatives and  honors.  He  has  his  false- 
prophet,  and  performs  miracles,  and  makes 
merchandise — not  only  of  gold,  but  of  '  'souls 
of  men,"  sealing  them  with  his  mark,  and 
compelling  them  to  worship  him. 

V.  2.  The  language  of  this  verse  is  that 
of  the  O.  T.  scriptures.  *  It  was  the  prophetic 
denunciation  against  the  Babylon  of  that 
day.  It  is  now  the  announcement  of  the  ful- 
fillment of  these  denunciations  upon  the 
whole  world-system  of  which  Babylon  was 
then  the  embodiment. 

The  angel  speaks  of  this  judgment  as  a 
thing  accomplished — "Babylon  is  fallen" — 
"is  become,"  etc. 


^Is.  13;21,  22;  34:11,  13-15.    Jer.  50;5X. 


Scene  jth.  REVELATION,  19:  225 

V.  20.  The  whole  face  of  things  is  now 
changed.  The  world's  day  of  rejoicing  is 
past.  The  sorrow  of  God's  people  is  about* 
to  be  turned  into  joy.  The  waiting  time  for 
the  souls  under  the  altar  is  at  an  end.  *  The 
assurance  given  to  his  Church  by  the  Lord 
in  the  days  of  his  flesh,  is  on  the  eve  of  ac- 
complishment— "I  will  see  you  again,  and 
your  heart  shall  rejoice,  and  your  joy  no  man 
taketh  from  you. ' '  f 


Revelation  19. 

Act  IV.    11:15,  etc.,  to  20:1 — 4. 

Sce7ie  ph.    Chps.   19:20:    1-4. 

Location.     Heaven  and  Karth. 

Dramatis  Personce.  The  King  of  Kings. 
The  Bride.  The  Living  Ones.  The  Elders. 
The  Armies  of  Heaven.  The  Beast  and 
False-Prophet.      Kings  of  the  earth.      Satan. 

Time.      "The  End." 

The  onward  movement  of  events  is  now 
resumed.  It  was  interrupted,  as  suggested, 
at  the  close  of  Chp.  17:  that  the  wreck, 
produced  by  the  vial  judgments,  might  be 
exhibited  to  the  Seer.      There  had  been  vast 


mev.  6:9,  etc.     tjohn  16:20,  22. 


226  THE  APOCAIvYPTIC  DRAMA.       Ad  IV. 

destruction,  yet  there  is  much  life  remaining 
on  the  earth.  The  Harlot  has  been  burnt, 
H^nd  the  great  emporium  of  the  world's  power, 
and  commerce,  and  culture,  has  been  thrown 
down;*  but  the  Antichrist  and  his  False- 
Prophet  are  still  alive  and  defiant.  The  ten 
kings  and  their  armies,  and  the  merchants  and 
their  followers  that  raised  so  pitious  a  cry 
over  their  fallen  Babylon,  these  all  remain, 
and  their  judgment  is  at  hand  (19:19,  etc.). 

We  have  seen  that  there  were  three  ex- 
planatory pictures  given  us  just  after  the 
sounding  of  the  7th  trumpet,  t  and  just  prior 
to  the  out-pouring  of  the  vials.  The  course 
of  the  prophetic  history  is  arrested  to  give 
them. 

1.  The  first  is  that  of  the  true  (the  in- 
visible) Church,  the  translation  of  the  Man- 
Child,  and  Satan  cast  down  to  earth,  and 
persecuting  the  remnant  of  her  children.  J 

2.  Next  we  have  the  rise  and  career  of 
the  two  Beasts.  § 

3.  And  then  comes  the  picture  of  the 
Lamb  and  his  144,000,  on  Mount  Sion — the 
once  invisible  and  struggling  Church,  now 
translated  and  amid  the  heavenly  glories. 

These  are  the  three  pictures  explanatory  of 
the  situation  at  the  beginning  of  the  last  half 


n7;16;  18:21.     tll:15.     .|12:    §13: 


Scene  jih.  REVELATION,  19:  227 

of  Daniel's  week,  and  just  before  the  pouring 
out  of  the  vial  judgments. 

Chapter  15th  takes  us  back  to  the  initial 
scene  of  the  triumphal  song  of  the  opened 
temple.*  And  Chp.  i6th  tells  us  of  the 
going  forth  of  the  angels  with  their  vials, 
and  of  the  judgments  that  are  executed. 
Once  again,  we  have  the  history  interrupted, 
but  only  for  a  moment,  that  the  Seer  may 
have  the  opportunity  of  surveying  the  ruin 
that  has  been  produced — the  destruction  of 
the  Harlot — the  false  Church;  and  the  over- 
throw of  Babylon,  the  center  of  the  world's 
commerce,  civilization,  and  power. 

And  now,  in  Chp.  19:,  we  are  cabled  back 
to  the  Mount  Sion  scene  of  Chp.  14:.  That 
scene  was  just  after  the  translation,  and  just 
before  the  pouring  out  of  the  vials.  This  (19:) 
is  after  the  wrath  has  expended  itself.  The 
scene  is  in  the  heavens.  The  "much  people" 
of  V,  I.  (the  Redeemed),  have  been  lookers- 
on  at  all  these  dreadful  events.  These  are 
they  who  have  been  counted  worthy  to  escape 
all  those  things  that  have  come  upon  the 
earth,  t  They  are  the  "called,  and  the  chosen, 
and  the  faithful, "J  They  heard  the  voice 
bidding  them  in  Chp.  18:20,  "rejoice  over 
her,"  etc.      And  now  we  have  the  response: 

*ll:15;etc.     fLu.  21:36.     $17:14. 


228  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.         Ad  IV. 

"A  great  voice  of  much  people  in  heaven, 
saying-,  Allehiia!  Salvation,  and  glory,  and 
honour,  and  power,  unto  the  lyord  our  God," 
etc. 

And  so  this  7th  scens  opens.  It  is  the  last 
grand  scene  that  brings  this  present  dispensa- 
tion to  its  close.  With  Chp.  19th,  the  move- 
ment of  the  prophetic  history  is  resumed, 
and  is  not  again  interrupted  until  it  reaches 
its  glorious  consummation. 

V.  I.  This  is  the  same  multitude  that  has 
been  brought  to  our  notice  before  in  Clips. 
7:9,  and  14:1,  &c. 

There  is  a  two-fold  cause  for  the  halleluias. 

(a)  The  destruction  of  the  Harlot,  (V.  2.)  and 

(b)  the  marriage  of  the  Lamb,  (V.  6.) 

V.    J.      ''''And  her  smoke    rose  up  forever 

and  ever. ' '    Alas,  for  the  fastidious  preachers 

'of  our   day   who    cannot  so  much  as  say — 

'  'hell  fire. ' '     They  will  hardly  be  able  to  join 

in  the  halleluias  of  this  rejoicing  people! 

V.  /.  The  first  portion  of  this  chapter 
is  a  grand,  responsive  choral  service.  The 
first  three  verses  are  the  response  of  the  Re- 
deemed to  the  summons  in  Chp.  18:20.  In 
this  verse  (4)  the  Living  Ones,  and  the  El- 
ders, worship,  and  respond,  with  their — 
"amen,  alleluia,"  to  the  anthems  of  the  Re- 
deemed. It  is  the  same  Throne  scene  so 
magnificently  pictured   in  Chp.  4th,     After 


Scene  jth.  REVELATION,  19:  229 

this  (V.  5. )  there  comes  a  voice  from  out  of 
The  Throne  calling  upon  all  the  servants 
of  God  to  praise  him,  and  then  is  heard  the 
grand  chorus  from  ''a  great  multitude,  as 
the  voice  of  many  waters,  and  as  the  voice 
of  mighty  thunderings,  saying,  alleluia!  For 
the  Lord  God  Omnipotent  reigneth  (V.  6.) 

V.  y.  ^^Thc  marriage  of  the  Lamb^'^^  &c. 
The  Bride  is  the  whole  body  of  the  Re- 
deemed at  the  time  of  the  Lord's  second  com- 
ing; and  "the  marriage  is  the  union  of  this 
body  with  a  personally  present  Christ  in 
glory  and  government.  "*  Another  picture  of 
this  event  is  given  in  Dan.  7:13,  &c. ,  and 
still  another  in  Rev.  20:4. 

^^His  wife.^^  We  have  called  attention  to 
the  fact  that  throughout  the  Apocalypse  a 
woman  is  the  symbol  of  the  Church,  and 
that  as  such  it  has  a  three  fold  sense. 

1.  The  woman  of  Clip.  12:,  is  the  true, 
pure  Church.  It  is  the  little  flock  ;t  the  Be- 
lievers of  all  ages  ;|  the  sealed  ones;  §  the  faith- 
ful witnesses  on  earth,  the  "called,  and 
chosen,  and  faithful  ;"||  "the  blessed  company 
of  all  faithful  people." 

2.  The  woman  of  Clip.  17th  is  the  visi- 
ble Church.  She  has  become  a  Harlot, 
apostate,  unfaithful  to  her  Lord  and  spouse. 

-•^E.  R.  C.  in  Lange,  p.  337.      fLu.  12:32.      tHeb.  11: 
^Rev.  7:     i|ll:  17:14. 


230  THE  APOCAIvYPTiC  DRAMA.       Ad  IV. 


3.  The  woman  of  Clip.  19:  7,  and  21:9, 
is  the  same  as  at  Chp.  12.  It  is  the  faithful 
Church  now  glorified — the  Bride  of  the 
lyamb;  the  wife,  partaking  of  the  marriage 
feast . 

The  woman,  the  Harlot,  the  Bride.  These 
are  the  three  aspects  of  the  Church  as  pre- 
sented to  us  in  the  New  Testament.  The 
woman  is  the  Church  Militant,  the  Bride  is 
the  Church  triumphant* 

'  ^Hath  made  herself  ready. ' '  '  'These  are 
they  which  have  come  out  of  great  tribula- 
tion, and  have  washed  their  robes,  and  made 
them  white  in  the  blood  of  the  Lamb. ' '  f 

V.  8.  Note  the  contrast  between  the 
simple  dress  of  the  Bride,  and  the  vulgar 
gorgeousness  of  the  Harlot.  J 

^^The  fine  lineit  is  the  righteous  acts  0/ 
the  saints^  (R.  V.)  It  is  their  own  right- 
eousness, that  which  is  inherent,  as  distinct 
from  that  which  is  imputed.  § 

V.  p.  ^^The  marriage  stepper.^ ^  It  was 
promised  long  ago — "I  will  not  drink  hence- 
forth of  this  fruit  of  the  wine,  until  that  day 
when  I  drink  it  new  with  you  in  my  Father's 
kingdom. "II  "That  day"  has  now  come. 


*Auberlin,  p.  276. t  Rev.  7:14.  22:14.  Jude,  24. 
Eph.  8:20.  5:25,  &c.  ^17:4.  ^Alford  in  loco.  ||Matt. 
20:29.    If  10:4. 


Scene  jth.  REVELATION,  19:  231 

' '  Wi'ite. ' '  This  is  in  contrast  with  '  'seal  up 
those  things,"  &C.1 

V.  10.  ^^And  I  fell  dcun  before  his 
feet  to  li^orsliip  hwi^  and  he  said  unto  ?;/<?, 
see  thou  do  it  not:  I  am  a  felloiv  servant^'''' 
(R.  V).  Clearly  there  is  no  saint  worship  in 
the  Church  above. 

V.  II.  Thus  far  everything  has  been  pre- 
paratory. It  may  be  that  while  the  vials  are 
being  poured  out  upon  the  earth,  these  events 
are  transpiring  in  heaven.  While  earth  is 
being  convulsed  to  its  centre,  the  Mar- 
riage of  the  Lamb  with  his  Bride  is 
taking  place  in  heaven  with  appropriate 
festivities  and  rejoicings,  the  armies  of  the 
King  are  gathering,  and  the  King  himself 
is  preparing  to  go  forth  in  righteousness  to 
judge  and  to  make  war.  And  now  the  last 
vial  is  drained,  and  the  Seer  has  beheld  the 
wreckage.  All  is  ready,  and — heaven  opens. 
It  had  opened  on  the  Christ  in  his  humilia- 
tion that  his  divine  sonship  might  be  recog- 
nized;* it  had  opened  for  his  readmission  as 
the  risen  savior ;t  and  now  it  opens  for  him 
again,  that  he  may  go  forth  as  King  of  Kings, 
and  Lord  of  Lords. 

In  Clip.    4th,    V.  I,    it  is    a  door  that  is 


*Matt.  3:16.     f  Acts,  1:9,  11.     +Rev.  1:7.     Ps.  68:  1-5, 
17,  33,  &c. 


232  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Ad  IV. 

Opened.  Here  it  is  heaven  itself.  Heaven's 
King  with  heaven's  armies  is  to  pass  out,  and 
a  door  is  not  sufficient.  Heaven  itself  must 
open  to  give  him  egress.  J 

r\    Tj.      ''^His  name  is  ,    .     The   ivord  of 
Goay     John,  i:i,  and  i.  John  i:i. 

^^ Clothed  ill  a  vesture  dipped  in  blood .^^ 
Is.  63:1,  &c. 

V.  14,  ^''And  the  arnnies  in  heaven  fol- 
hnved  him^^^  etc.    Matt  25:31  &c. 

This  is  Jesus  glorified.  He  is  no  longer 
the  despised  Galilean,  the  homeless  wan- 
derer, the  man  that  has  not  where  to  lay  his 
head,  the  rejected  Messiah,  the  crucified 
malefactor;  but  the  exalted  Prince  and  Sav- 
ior, going  forth  with  the  shout  of  a  king. 
Heaven,  earth,  and  hell  are  stirred  at  his 
presence.  Every  eye  is  attracted  to  him. 
Enemies  tremble  before  him.  Believers 
admire  his  beauty  and  rejoice  in  him.  The 
whole  universe  is  astir  with  interest,  and  adds 
pomp  and  magnificence  to  the  occasion. 
And  this  is  Jesus.  He  who  once  hung  on 
the  cross,  with  the  inscription  written  over 
him  in  mockery — "77/^  King  0/  the  Jews.'''' 
All  is  now  changed.  By  the  Divine  decree, 
he  is  exalted  head  over  all  things,  and  he 
goes  forth  from  the  midst  of  the  very  Throne 
itself  with  the  names  emblazoned  on  his  ves- 
ture— King  of    Kings  and   Lord    of   Lords. 


Scene  7th.  REVELATION,  19:  233 

Every  eye  in  the  universe  beholds  him,  every 
tongue  confesses  to  him,  every  knee  bows 
before  him.  And  this  is  Jesus  again  with 
us — Jesus  in  the  glory  foreshadowed  on  the 
mount. 

Up  to  this  point  (V.  14)  it  is  an  heavenly 
picture.  Now  the  triumphal  march  begins, 
and  the  scene  is  transferred  to  earth. 

V.  75.  ' '  Ozct  of  his  mouth  goeth  a  sharp 
sword^'^^  df^;. *  It  is  the  sharp  sword  of  judi- 
cial decision,  t 

V.  77.  ''''Standing  in  the  Siin^'^''  as  this 
proclaiming  Angel  does,  possibly  denotes  his 
conspicuousness.  This  is  that  day  and  hour 
of  which  it  was  once  said — no  man  knoweth; 
no,  nor  the  angels  of  heaven,  but  my  Father 
only.  J  It  is  now  so  proclaimed,  and  in  such 
' '  a  loud  voice, ' '  throughout  the  great  uni- 
verse, that  even  the  very  fowls  that  fly  in  the 
midst  of  heaven  are  summoned  to  be  present, 
and  to  take  part  in  its  awful  events. 

' '  The  Slipper  of  the  great  God.  ■ '  This  is 
in  marked  contrast  with  the  Marriage  Supper 
of  the  Lamb  (V.  9). 

There  is  a  similar  summons  in  Ezekiel 
(39:17-21).  His  prophecy  in  chapters  37:  to 
40:,  clearly  synchronizes  with  this  time,  and 


*2.  Thess.  2:8.     Hos.  6:5.      fMatt.  25:31,  &c.      JMatt. 
24:36. 


234  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Act  IV. 


will  be  found  profitable  reading  in  this  con- 
nection. It  fills  out  what  is  here  only  in 
outline.  The  destruction  of  the  Anti-christ 
and  his  host,  the  restoration  of  Juda  and 
Israel,  and  the  King  who  is  to  reign  over 
them  in  righteousness, — these  are  the  sub- 
jects on  which  the  prophet  dwells  with 
remarkable  fulness. 

V.  /p.  For  the  preparations  on  the  part 
of  the  Beast  for  the  conflict,  see  16:14,  1 6 
and  17:8-16. 

Vs.  20^  21.  This  is  the  consummation 
determined.  It  is  poured  out  on  the  deso- 
lator.  *  He  is  the  Prince  of  the  people  that 
should  come,  after  the  cutting  off  of  Messiah, 
to  destroy  the  holy  City;  he  is  the  man  of 
sin,  the  son  of  perdition,  of  the  Epistlet;  and 
he  is  the  Beast  of  the  Apocalypse  and  of 
Daniel.  % 


Chapter  20:1-4. 

Of  the  great  confederacy  to  which  we  have 
called  attention,  §  we  have  seen  the  Harlot 
burned  with  fire,  the  ten  Kings  and  their 
armies  slain  with  the  sword,  the  two  Beasts 
taken  and  cast  alive  into  the  lake  of  fire,  and 


*Dan.  9:27.     t2.  Thess.  2:8.     tRev.  13:1  &c.  and  Dan 
7:11.     ^p.  216. 


Scene  I  St.  REVELATION,  20:  235 

now  there  remains  but  one  to  be  dealt  with 
— Satan,  the  head  and  front  of  this  rebellion. 
The  first  verses  of  this  2otli  chapter  tell  us 
what  is  done  with  him.  He  is  bound,  and 
cast  into  the  bottomless  pit,  and  shut  in,  that 
he  should  deceive  the  nations  no  more,  till 
the  thousand  years  should  be  fulfilled. 

Act  V.      20:4-7. 

Scene  I  St. — Chp.  20:4-7. 

Location. — The  earth. 

Dramatis  Personcs. — Christ;  they  that  are 
his — resurrected;  and  the  inhabitants  of  the 
earth. 

Ti)}ie. — The  times  of  refreshment  and 
restoration  of  all  things. 

These  are  the  times  of  refreshing  and  of 
the  restoration  of  all  things,  "which  God 
hath  spoken  by  the  mouth  of  all  his  prophets 
since  the  world  began. "  "^  It  is  Jesus,  the  son 
of  the  Highest  upon  the  throne  of  his  father 
David,  t  and  his  saints  about  him.  J  This  is 
the  time  of  Israel's  redemption  and  glory. 
The  seventy  weeks  determined  upon  the  peo- 
ple and  the  holy  city  have  now  met  their 
accomplishment.  Transgression  is  finished; 
an  end  has  been  made  of  sins;   reconciliation 


*Acts  3:19  &c.  fLu.  1:32.         JMatt.  19:28.     Dan. 

7:13  &c. 


286  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.         Act  V. 

for  iniquity  has  been  accomplished;  everlast- 
ing righteousness  has  been  brought  in;  the 
visions  and  the  prophecy  have  been  ratified; 
and  the  Most  Holy  has  been  anointed.  *  If 
we  would  know  more  of  the  splendor  of  this 
reign  than  is  here  given,  we  must  study  the 
"sure  word  of  prophecy"  that  we  have  con- 
cerning it. 

V.  4.  '  ^Judgment  zvas  give^i  unto  tJiem. ' ' 
The  IvOrd  and  his  saints  reigning,  f  At  his 
coming  the  Lord  subdues,  judges,  and  pun- 
ishesj — he  treads  ' '  the  wine-press  of  the 
fierceness  and  wrath  of  Almighty  God," 
and  then  brings  in  his  salvation  and  estab- 
lishes his  kingdom  in  righteousness.  The 
little  Stone  becomes  a  great  Mountain.  The 
proclamation  goes  forth,  and  the  kingdom  of 
this  world  becomes  the  kingdom  of  our  God 
and  his  Christ.  It  probably  will  be  theo- 
cratic, such  as  Israel's  was  at  the  first.  Jesus 
is  king.  His  is  the  throne.  The  govern- 
ment is  on  his  shoulders.  But  saints  and 
men  will  be  the  agents  in  the  administration. 
Thus  Jesus  will  reign  over  the  earth,  but  not 
necessarily  upon  it.  Perhaps  his  relations 
to  the  earth  may  be  shadowed  forth  by  the 
transfiguration  scene.  §     His  position  was  on 


*Dan.  9:24;  see  p.  26.         fDan.  7:13,  14,  27.        JMatt. 
25:31  &c.        J<Matt.  17: 


Scene  ist.  REVELATION,  20:  287 

the  mount,  and  thus  above  the  earth  and 
overlooking  it;  and  disciples,  men  in  the 
flesh,  representatives  of  the  earth  and  its 
kingdom,  prostrate  at  his  feet.  The  heavenly 
and  the  earthly  brought  together,  yet  sepa- 
rate and  distinct.  Men  in  glory,  and  men  in 
the  flesh,  and  Jesus  visible  to  all,  accepted 
by  all,  and  controling  all.  And,  to  fill  up  to 
completeness  the  typical  scene,  from  the 
throne  of  his  glory — the  mount  of  eminence, 
He  shall  be  transfigured  before  men,  and 
glorified  saints,  and  angels;  and  the  voice 
from  the  most  excellent  glory,  penetrating 
through  all  space,  and  heard  by  all  Intelli- 
gences, shall  announce — "This  is  my  beloved 
Son,  in  whom  I  am  well  pleased.  Hear  ye 
Him." 

^^ Thrones^  and  they  sat  upon  them.'''*  Who 
are  "they?"  Undoubtedly  the  sealed  ones 
of  Chp.  yth,  and  the  144,000  of  Chp.  14th. 
They  are  the  Redeemed  of  all  ages — both 
those  who  have  slept  in  Jesus,  and  those  who 
were  caught  up  to  meet  him  at  his  coming. 

''^And  I  saw  the  sotils  of  them  that  zvcre 
beheaded.''^  &c.  And  who  are  these?  Do 
they  differ  from  them  who  sat  on  the  thrones  ? 
The  inference  seems  to  be  that  they  do. 
Who  then  are  they  ?  We  have  accounted  for 
the  resurrected  in  Christ,  and  for  the  trans- 
lated.    They  are  on  the  "thrones."     After 


238  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.        Act  V. 


the  "Man-child"  was  caught  up  to  God,  the 
woman  still  continued  on  the  earth,  and  it 
was  "the  remnant  of  her  seed"  that  was  to 
contend  with  the  Beast,  and  to  refuse  to 
receive  his  mark,  and  to  worship  his  image, 
and  that  must  witness  for  Jesus,  even  unto 
death.*  And  these  must  be  they.  "The 
souls  of  them  that  were  beheaded  for  the  wit- 
ness of  Jesus,  and  for  the  word  of  God,  and 
which  had  not  worshiped  the  Beast,  neither 
his  image,  neither  had  received  his  mark 
upon  their  foreheads,  or  in  their  hands." 
The  foolish  virgins  returned  with  oil  in  their 
lamps.  It  was  too  late  for  the  marriage 
feast.  The  door  was  already  shut.  They 
must  abide  without,  and  face  the  storm ;  and 
by  keeping  the  commandments  of  God,  and 
maintaining  the  testimony  of  Jesus,  amid 
the  universal  Apostacy,  they  must  make 
amends  for  past  unfaithfulness,  and  they  too 
shall  live  and  reign  with  Christ  a  thousand 
years. 

V.  5.  ''The  rest  of  the  dead,''  i.  e.,  those 
not  included  in  the  above  category, 

'  'A  thousand  years. ' '  We  are  not  com- 
pelled to  restrict  this  to  literal  years.  "One 
day  is  with  the  Lord  as  a  thousand  years, 
and  a  thousand  years  as  one  day.  "t     It  sym- 

*13:17.        12.  Pet.  3:8. 


Scene  1st.  REVELATION,  20:  239 

bolizes  an  seon — the  world's  sabbatic  year, 
an  age  of  blessedness. 

' '  This  is  the  fij'sf  resurrection. ' '  Scripture 
speaks  of  three  resurrections.  In  the  15th 
Chp.  of  I.  Cor.,  the  iVpostle  presents  the 
fact  of  a  resurrection,  and  says  (V.  22):  "For 
as  in  Adam  all  die,  even  so  in  Christ  shall 
all  be  made  alive.  But,"  he  continues, 
"every  man  in  his  own  order."  And  then 
he  gives  this  order. 

1.  "Christ  the  flrst-fruits. "  First  in  pre- 
eminence, and  in  the  peculiarity  of  its  con- 
ditions; and  first  also  in  the  order  of  time, 
in  that  there  was  none  before,  and  has  been 
none  since,  like  it. 

2.  "Afterward  they  that  are  Christ's  at  his 
coming. "  An  interval  of  near  two  thousand 
years  has  now  elapsed  since  the  Lord's  resur- 
rection, and  this  after-resurrection  has  not 
yet  taken  place.  This  is  the  resurrection 
that  in  this  vision  is  mentioned  as  the  first. 

3.  '  'Then" — after  the  resurrection  of  those 
at  Christ's  coming — "then  the  end."  This 
will  be  a  long  interval.  Not  only  is  there 
the  thousand  years  of  the  reign,  but  there  is 
also  the  period  of  the  Satanic  outbreak.  It 
is  not  until  after  this  event  that  we  read: 
"And  I  saw  the  dead,  small  and  great,  stand 
before  God,"  &c.  (V.  12),  and  this  is  "the 
end,"  or  the  second  resurrection, 


240  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.        Act  V. 

Here  only  two  resurrections  are  referred  to. 
The  vision  concerns  things  present  and  future 
— "the  things  which  are,  and  the  things 
which  shall  be  hereafter."*  The  resurrec- 
tion of  Christ  is  so  peculiar  to  himself,  and 
is  an  event  so  entirely  of  the  far  past,  that  it 
is  not  brought  into  consideration  here.  The 
resurrections  mentioned  here  are  the  same 
that  the  Lord  refers  to  when  he  says  that  ^  'all 
in  the  graves  shall  hear  his  voice,  and  shall 
come  forth;  they  that  have  done  good  to  the 
resurrection  of  life;  and  they  that  have  done 
evil,  unto  the  resurrection  of  judgment."! 
These  are  two  distinct  resurrections,  and  as 
such  well  defined  by  scripture  usage.  When 
the  resurrection  of  the  Lord,  or  of  those  in 
him,  is  the  object  of  reference,  the  preposi- 
tion «  is  always  introduced,  and  it  is  a 
resurrection  out  of^  ox  from  among^  the  dead: 
But  when  it  speaks  of  this  last  rising — the 
resurrection  of  judgment — the  preposition  is 
omitted,  and  its  language  is — the  resurrection 
o/the  dead. 

K  d.  "  T/ze  second  death. ' '  There  is  no 
question  as  to  the  nature  of  this  death.  {  But 
what  is  the  first  death  ?  Is  it  merely  the  dis- 
solution of  the  body  ?     This  seems  to  be  the 


*Rev.  1:19.  fjohn  5:38,  29.  Lu.  14:14.   Acts  24:15. 

|21:8. 


Scene  ist.  REVELATION,  20:  241 

accepted  view.  But  is  there  not  a  prior 
death  ?  A  death  to  which  we  must  trace  the 
dissohition  of  the  body?  *  We  venture  to 
su^orest  that  the  first  death  is  our  condition 
by  nature — a  fleshly-mind  that  is  enmity 
against  God.  Thus  antagonized  the  soul  is 
"without  God, "and  is  ''condemned  already." 
And  so  we  read:  "The  mind  of  the  flesh  is 
death. "t  (R.  V.)#., 

This  we  take  to  be  the  first  death.  There 
is  hope  in  it,  for  Christ  can  quicken  the  dead 
in  trespasses  and  sins. J  And  hence  the  dis- 
tinction so  strikingly  brought  out  here.  In 
the  first  death  there  is  hope,  in  the  second 
there  is  none.  It  is  "the  lake  of  fire"  burn- 
ing forever  and  ever.§  Those  who  attain  to 
this  "first  resurrection"  are  they  who  in  this 
life  have  passed  (ck)  out  of  (R.  V.)  this  first 
death-state  into  the  life-state.  ||  "On  such 
the  second  death  hath  no  power. ' ' 

"The  second  death"  is  then  the  carrying 
out  to  the  full  that  sentence  of  condemnation 
which  is  on  this  first  death,  and  which  has 
not  been  lifted  in  this  life.  The  soul  is  now 
without  hope,  and  is  "punished  with  ever- 
lasting destruction  from  the  presence  of  the 
Lord,  and  from  the  glory  of  his  power. "If 

*Rom.  5:12.  James  1:14,  15.  fRom.  8.6,  7.  Eph.  2:1, 
11-13.  tEpb.  2:1.  Johu  6:40,  47,  57.  5:24.  ^^Rev. 
20:14.     21:8.     14:11.     ||John  5:24.       1|2.  Thess.  1:9. 


24-3  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Act  VI. 


Revelation   20. 

Act  VI.     20:7-15. 

This  act  may  be  divided  into  two  scenes — 

Scene  I  St. — The  Apostacy. 

Scene  2d. — The  Jndgment. 

Its  location  will  be  the  earth,  and  its  dra- 
matis personse  will  be  Satan,  the  inhabitants 
of  the  earth,  "the  rest  of  the  dead,"  and  the 
Judge.    The  time  is  after  the  thousand  years. 

Vs.  7  and  8.  Satan  is  released  from  his 
prison,  and  is  permitted  to  visit  the  earth. 
At  once  he  is  at  his  old  business — deception.* 
He  seems  not  to  have  learned  wisdom  by  the 
past.  Or  perhaps  his  fallen  nature  finds  all 
its  satisfaction  in  opposing  the  ways  of  truth 
and  righteousness,  and  in  leading  others  into 
sin  and  suffering.  "The  imagination  of  the 
thoughts  of  his  heart  is  only  evil  contin- 
ually, "f 

* '  Gog  aiid  Magogs  to  gather  them  together 
to  battle. ' '  This  is  the  last  great  battle  with 
the  powers  of  evil.  After  this  the  judgment, 
and  the  lake  of  fire,  which  is  the  second 
death.  I 

The  question  has  been  asked — Why  is  thivS 


•Gen.  3:1  &c.     tGeu.  6:5.     ^See  p.  203, 


Scene  ist&  2d.     REVELATION,  20:  243 


second  outbreak  of  evil  allowed  ?  While  we 
cannot  fathom  Divine  counsels,  we  can  dis- 
cern a  reason  for  ihis  permitted  outbreak, 
that  for  the  present  at  least  is  abundantly 
satisfactory.  The  great  problem  through  all 
these  ages  has  been  concerning  evil  in  the 
universe,  and  its  final  issue.  What  is  to  be 
done  with  it  ?  He  that  sits  upon  The 
Throne  has  been  solving  this  problem. 
And  now  that  He  is  about  bringing  it  to  its 
solution,  he  would  have  his  wisdom  perfectly 
apprehended,  his  justice  fully  acknowledged, 
and  his  judgments  heartily  acquiesced  in,  by 
all  his  Intelligences.  To  make  them  realize 
the  malignant  character  of  evil,  its  unalter- 
able nature,  and  the  exceeding  danger  of  its 
presence,  is  an  all-important  step  in  this 
direction.  A  world  is  allowed  to  be  dom- 
inated by  this  power.  Love  passing  all 
understanding  is  bestoA^ed  upon  it.  The 
truth  is  made  known  to  it.  Grace  and  life 
are  offered  it.  After  a  long  and  awful  expe- 
rience, there  is  given  to  it  an  aeon  of  exemp- 
tion from  the  curse  of  this  power,  and  of 
blessedness  in  the  presence  of  the  Redeemer. 
In  the  midst  of  the  very  fulness  of  this  bless- 
edness. Divine  influences  are  withdrawn,  and 
the  prince  of  evil  is  allowed  once  more  to 
appear  on  the  scene,  and  the  heart  of  the 
fallen  creature  cannot  stand  alone.     No  pro- 


244  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.       Act  VI. 

cess  of  training  in  truth  and  righteousness, 
no  long  continued  enjoyment  of  paradisic 
bliss,  can  heal  its  hurt,  or  eradicate  its  dis- 
ease. It  turns  at  once  to  the  intruder  and 
welcomes  his  presence,  and  yields  to  his 
seductions.  The  incurable  nature  of  this 
principle  of  evil  is  now  completely  demon- 
strated; and  the  wisdom  and  justice  of  the 
Sovereign  Ruler  of  the  Universe,  in  consign- 
ing it  to  everlasting  destruction  from  the 
presence  of  his  glory,  is  completely  vindi- 
cated. 

V.  lo.  ''The  lake  of  fire,''  &c.  This  is 
Gehenna.  It  differs  from  Hades  and  "the 
bottomless  pit."*  The  Beast  and  False- 
prophet  are  in  this  lake  already.  And  now 
Satan  is  to  be  cast  in  with  his  adherents,  and 
his  agencies — death  and  Hades.  And  it  is 
forever.  As  he  lived  a  thousand  years  in  the 
abyss,  so  he  and  his  will  continue  to  exist  in 
this  fiery  prison  forever  and  ever.  No  more 
letting  him  loose  to  deceive  and  to  work  ruin 
in  God's  glorious  universe. 

And  this  is  the  end  of  sin,  and  sorrow, 
and  death.  They  have  their  place.  But 
God's  people  no  more  come  in  contact  with 
them.  For  them  they  are  things  of  the  past. 
The  problem  of  evil  is  solved. 

*Rev.  19:20  &cf.c.         20:3  &  10,        ]VIatt.  6:22.  29,  30, 
10:28.     Mk,  9:43. 


Scene  I  St  &  2d.      REVELATION,  20:  245 

And  it  must  be  noted  that  with  all  the 
events  connected  with  this  rebellion  and 
judgment,  the  redeemed  have  no  connection, 
save  as  lookers  on.  Their  judgment  has  passed 
long,  long  before,  and  it  was  unto  life.* 
This  resurrection,  and  the  white  throne,  and 
the  opened  books,  and  the  judgment,  and  the 
fiery  lake — these  are  for  those  only  whose 
names  are  not  found  written  in  the  Lamb's 
book  of  life. 


Revelation  21:22: 
Act  VIL     21:22: 

This  introduces  a  new  dispensation.  These 
are  "the  things"  in  all  their  fulness  that 
God  has  prepared  for  them  that  love  him.  f 

Verses  24  and  28,  of  i.  Cor.  15:  have  met 
their  accomplishment.  We  call  attention  to 
verses  22  to  29  of  this  15th  Chp.  of  i.  Cor- 
inthians. They  are  worthy  of  careful  study. 
For  range  of  thought,  and  condensation  of 
statement  there  is  nothing  like  it  in  human 
language.  In  its  few  paragraphs  there  is 
outlined  the  leading  events  we  have  been 
studying  in  this  historic  drama — events  that 

*John  5:29.         tl.  Cor.  2:9. 


246  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.         Act  VIL 

in  their  duration  and  consequences,  run 
through  all  time  and  into  the  eternal  ages. 
Glance  at  them  for  a  moment.  Verse  22 
tells  that  "in  Christ  shall  all  be  made  alive," 
i.  e.  resurrected.  "But  (V.  23)  every  man 
in  his  own  order."  First,  Christ.  This  is 
redemption  completed.  Afterward  they  that 
are  his  at  his  coming.  This  is  the  thousand 
yearsof  Rev.  20 : "Then  the  end" (V.  24).  The 
ages  of  the  millenium  are  past.  The  ser- 
pent's head  has  been  crushed;*  the  general 
resurrection  and  the  judgment  have  taken 
place;  the  devil,  death  and  Hades  have  been 
cast  into  the  lake;  and  so,  "the  end" — the 
completion  of  Messiah's  work.  The  mys- 
tery of  the  Divine  purposes  concerning  evil 
has  been  solved.  Its  license  has  been  revoked, 
and  its  power  broken,  and  it  has  been  con- 
signed to  its  own  place.  And  what  follows  ? 
Why,  He,  the  seed  of  the  woman,  the  son 
of  man,  David's  son,  delivers  up  the  king- 
dom unto  God,  even  the  Father.  His  mis- 
sion was  to  "destroy  the  works  of  the  devil  ;"t 
to  deliver  his  captives  from  his  grasp  ;|  and 
to  restore  the  kingdom  of  this  world  to  its 
rightful  sovereignty.  §  And  with  Satan  and 
his  emissaries  (death  and  Hades)  in  the  lake 
of  fire,    his    mission    has    been    successfully 

*Gen.  3:15.      fl.  John  3:8.      ^Eph.  4.8.      ^Rev.  11:15. 


REVELATION,  21:  &  2±  241 

accomplished.  All  conflict  is  at  an  end.  He 
has  reigned  "till  he  hath  pnt  all  enemies 
under  his  feet"  (V.  26),  And  now  a  new 
order  of  things  is  ordained  in  which  God  is 
"all  in  all"  (V.  28).  And  these  are  the 
things  that  these  closing  chapters  of  the  Rev- 
elation unfold  to  us. 

P\  4.  ^^The  former  things  are  passed 
azvayy  And  this  passing  away  is  not  con- 
fined to  things  material.  Things  spiritual 
come  within  its  sweep.  Observe,  e.  g.,  that 
in  the  new  order  there  is  a  tabernacle,  i.  e. 
dwelling  place  (21:3),  but  no  temple  (V. 
22).  Even  this  is  among  "the  former 
things."  The  temple  necessitated  the  priest, 
the  altar,  and  the  sacrifice,  This  new 
dispensation  will  not  require  them.  The 
work  of  redemption  has  been  completed. 
Sin,  and  death,  and  Hades,  as  disturbing 
elements,  are  no  more.  The  ruined  Kden 
has  been  restored.  The  instruments  of  that 
restoration  are  no  longer  needed,  and  are 
therefore  laid  aside.  So  also  in  regard  to  the 
Messianic  Kingdom.  It  too  has  accom- 
plished its  purpose,  and  is  numbered  among 
the  things  of  the  past.  All  things  have 
been  subdued  unto  the  Son;  and  now  the 
Son  also  himself  is  subject  unto  Him  that  put 


248  THE  APOCALYPTIC  DRAMA.      Act  VII. 

all  things  under  him,  that  God  may  be  all 
in  all.  * 

And  all  things  are  made  new  (V.  4).  These 
new  things  are  yet  in  the  mind  and  counsels 
of  God.  Secret  things  that  belong  unto 
Him.  Even  as  here  hinted  at,  they  are 
beyond  our  conception  and  understanding. 
They  are  in  the  far,  far  away.  We  look 
toward  them.  In  their  indistinctness,  they 
are  to  us  as  the  delicate  penciling  of  moun- 
tain rano-es  on  the  distant  horizon.  For 
more  distinct  outlines,  and  for  clearer  views, 
we  must  wait  "until  the  day  break,  and  the 
shadows  flee  away,  "t  Meanwhile,  we  have 
a  "blessed  hope;"  and  that,  too,  in  the  near 
future,  even  "the  glorious  appearing,"  and 
"the  kingdom;"  concerning  which,  the  lyord 
himself  has  taught  us  to  pray,  saying: 
"Our  Father,  which  art  in  heaven. 

Thy  Kingdom  come."   Amen. 

n.  Cor.  15:28.        fCaut.  2:17. 


